G600IntegratedSystem STCInstallationManual

G600
AML STC Installation

Manual
190-00601-06 November 2008 Rev. B

© 2008
Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual
and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and
to print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of
this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that
any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, GDU 620™, and G600™ are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries.
FliteCharts™ and SafeTaxi™ are also trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks
may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® and ChartView™ are registered trademarks of Jeppesen, Inc.; SkyWatch® is a registered
trademark of L-3 Communications; and XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
©1984 – 2007, MATLAB® is a registered trademark of The MathWorks, Inc.
Garmin International, Inc.

1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: 913-397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): (888) 606-5482
http://www.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 870 850 1243
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd., SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: 503.581.8101
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
1 3/28/2008 Initial Release
2 5/30/2008 Added more detail to installation requirements.
3 6/13/08 Clarify shield ground requirements.
A 7/23/08 Production Release
Incorporated feedback from the field. Added autopilots and/or flight
directors (Cessna 300B/400B/800B IFCS, Collins AP-106-107,
B 11/13/08
Honeywell KFC 275/325, S-TEC 60-2/65). See Current Revision
Description for a complete list of changes.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page A

Rev. B 190-00601-06
CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION
Page Section
Revision Description of Change
Number(s) Number
B Added caution to warn that supplemental data cards are locked to the
1-13 1.8
particular display after the data card has been inserted.
2-1 2.3 Added the GTP 59 to the G600 LRU Kit Contents (Table 2-1).
2-2 2.4.1 Removed the GTP 59 from the accessories kit (Table 2-3).
2-3 2.4.3 Added new section for creating a new software loader card.
2-6 2.5.3.1 Added the words ‘circuit breaker’ to the G600 labels (Table 2-4).
Added information that an external HDG/GPSS switch is required to
2-11 2.5.9
utilize the roll steering conversion feature.
2-11 2.5.9.1 Added information about relocating the ADI to the copilot’s side.
Added new section about ADIs with Integral Flight Director
2-11 2.5.9.4
Presentation.
Added a note that a Magnetic Interference Survey must be completed
after mounting the GMU 44. Added a note that if reusing wiring for the
2-20 2.5.11.5
GMU 44, the existing wiring must meet the requirements specified for
the GMU 44.
Added new section and figure defining requirements for relocating ADI
2-26 2.5.11.8
with flight director to the copilot’s side ADI.
Added new section about GPSS roll steering considerations. This
2-27 2.5.16
clarifies when an external GPSS switch will be required.
Added sight compass to the special tools required list. Also added a
3-1 3.1
USB to RS-232 converter.
Corrected the type of screws called out for the mounting rack of the
3-70 3.2.5
GDC 74A (figure was correct). Removed recommended torque.
Added statement that only wire specified in section 2.4.2 should be
3-81 3.4
used for G600 connections.
3-84 3.4.2.1 Added a caution to not use self-tapping screws supplied with slide lock.
5-4 5.4 Added a note that a Software Loader Card can be created.
Added a note that in order to enable or disable features an Installer
5-14 5.5.5
Unlock Card is required.
5-16 5.5.9 Included additional Cessna and Collins autopilots in Table 5-2.
Updated Table 5-3, GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings to include
5-17 5.5.10
additional Collins, Honeywell and S-TEC flight directors.
Added section about configuring flight director settings using manual
5-18 5.5.10.1
entry.
5-19 5.5.10.1 Added Table 5-3A, GDU Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings.
Revised CAUTION to address use of a sight compass when completing
5-22 5.6.2
the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure.
5-24 5.6.3 Revised compass swing procedure to allow the use of a sight compass.
Added a note that it is possible to induce attitude and/or heading errors
5-32 5.8.2
when conducting air data tests.
Clarified a step to look for LOC 2 on the PFD for installations with dual
5-34 5.8.4
navigators.
Added a note that if an ADI is installed on the copilot’s side, the flight
5-36 5.8.5.3 director for that ADI must be aligned to its aircraft symbol before doing
the G600 flight director calibration.
5-39 5.8.5.5 Added a step (#9) to the heading course and error test.
6-4 6.2 Added troubleshooting information to table.
Page B G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 Rev. B
CURRENT REVISION DESCRIPTION
Page Section
Revision Description of Change
Number(s) Number
Updated Figure C-9, GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions to remove
C-10 Appendix C
semicircular notch on right side of cutout.
D-9 D.2 Removed Figure D-12 (it was a duplicate).
Included additional Cessna, Collins and Honeywell autopilots, and

E-2 E.3
added notes [4] and [5] to table.
Included additional Cessna, Collins, Honeywell, and S-TEC external

E-3 E.4
flight directors in table.
E-4 E.6 Added Avidyne TCAD as an approved traffic source (display only).
F-3 Fig F-1 Clarified meaning of Essential and Main bus.
F-11 Fig F-10 Added interconnect data for flight directors.
Added interconnect data for S-TEC ST-670 flight director. Incorporated
F-19 Fig F-11
Installation Bulletin 842.
Added interconnect data for Collins AP-106/107 autopilots/flight
F-26 Fig F-13
directors.
Added interconnect data for Cessna 300B IFCS/400B IFCS/800B IFCS
F-32 Fig F-14
autopilots/flight directors.
Added Interconnect data for Avidyne TCAD. Incorporated Installation
F-36 Fig F-17
Bulletin 834.
F-43 Fig F-23 Added Ethernet architecture information.
Updated of laptop or PC requirements to complete the magnetic
G-1 G.1
interference survey.
DOCUMENT PAGINATION
Section Pagination
Table of Contents iii - xiv
Section 1 1-1 through 1-14
Appendix A A-1 through A-2
Appendix B B-1 through B-16
Appendix C C-1 through C-18
Appendix D D-1 through D-12
Appendix E E-1 through E-6
Appendix F F-1 through F-44
Appendix G G-1 through G-18
Appendix H H-1 through H-6
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page C

Rev. B 190-00601-06
This page intentionally left blank
Page D G600 AML STC Installation Manual

190-00601-06 Rev. B
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information which is subject to the Export Administration Regulations
("EAR") issued by the United States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and
which may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign nationals inside or outside of the United
States without first obtaining an export license. A violation of the EAR may be subject to a penalty of up
to 10 years imprisonment and a fine of up to $1,000,000 under Section 2410 of the Export Administration
Act of 1979. Include this notice with any reproduced portion of this document.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This Notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like additional information, please refer to our web site at
www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CAUTION
The GDU 620 uses a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important
to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified
as safe for anti-reflective coatings
CAUTION
All GDU 620 screen shots used in this document are current at the time of publication.
Screen shots are intended to provide visual reference only. All information depicted in
screen shots, including software file names, versions and part numbers, is subject to
change and may not be up to date.
This manual is written for software version 2.0 or later. The software version and information in this
document are subject to change without notice. Visit the Garmin web site (www.garmin.com) for current
updates and supplemental information concerning the operation of this and other Garmin products.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page i

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Page ii G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Scope ..............................................................................................................................................1-1
1.2.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems not Covered by the STC ..................................................1-1
1.2.2 Class I/II aircraft not identified on the AML .......................................................................1-1
1.2.3 Class III Aircraft not Identified on the AML .......................................................................1-2
1.2.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G600 AML STC...........................................................1-2
1.2.5 Required Documentation for All Installations .....................................................................1-2
1.3 G600 System Overview..................................................................................................................1-2
1.3.1 G600 LRU Descriptions.......................................................................................................1-5
1.3.2 Required GPS Navigator......................................................................................................1-6
1.3.3 Required Standby Instruments .............................................................................................1-6
1.3.4 Optional Systems .................................................................................................................1-6
1.3.5 Interface Summary ...............................................................................................................1-6
1.4 G600 Installation ............................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.1 Installation Overview ...........................................................................................................1-9
1.4.2 Installation Configurations.................................................................................................1-10
1.5 Technical Specifications...............................................................................................................1-10
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms...................................................................................1-10
1.5.2 Physical Characteristics......................................................................................................1-10
1.5.3 Power Requirements ..........................................................................................................1-11
1.6 Certification..................................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.1 TSO Compliance ................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.1.1 GDU 620 ...................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.1.2 GRS 77 ......................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.1.3 GMU 44.....................................................................................................................1-11
1.6.1.4 GDC 74A...................................................................................................................1-12
1.6.1.5 GTP 59 ......................................................................................................................1-12
1.7 G600 System Documentation.......................................................................................................1-12
1.8 Databases......................................................................................................................................1-13
1.8.1 Basemap Database .............................................................................................................1-13
1.8.2 Navigation Database ..........................................................................................................1-13
1.8.3 FliteCharts Database ..........................................................................................................1-13
1.8.4 ChartView Database...........................................................................................................1-14
1.8.5 SafeTaxi Database..............................................................................................................1-14
1.8.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases...............................................................................1-14
1.8.7 Obstacles Database.............................................................................................................1-14
1.8.8 IGRF Model .......................................................................................................................1-14
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Pre-Installation Information ...........................................................................................................2-1
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page iii
190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.3 Available Equipment ......................................................................................................................2-1
2.4 Installation Materials ......................................................................................................................2-2
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin ....................................................................................2-2
2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied...................................................................................2-3
2.4.3 Software Loader Card ..........................................................................................................2-3
2.5 Installation Considerations .............................................................................................................2-6
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration..........................................................................................2-6
2.5.2 Standby Instruments.............................................................................................................2-6
Placards and Labels..............................................................................................................2-6
2.5.3 2-6
2.5.3.1 New Labels..................................................................................................................2-6
2.5.3.2 Existing Placards .........................................................................................................2-7
2.5.4 Power Distribution ...............................................................................................................2-7
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing ...........................................................................................................2-8
2.5.6 External Annunciators..........................................................................................................2-8
2.5.7 External Course Deviation Indicators ..................................................................................2-8
2.5.8 External Sensors...................................................................................................................2-9
2.5.8.1 GPS Navigator.............................................................................................................2-9
2.5.8.2 Navigation Receiver ....................................................................................................2-9
2.5.8.3 Weather .......................................................................................................................2-9
2.5.8.4 Traffic ..........................................................................................................................2-9
2.5.8.5 ADF ...........................................................................................................................2-10
2.5.8.6 Stormscope (function not currently supported) .........................................................2-10
2.5.8.7 External TAWS (function not currently supported) ..................................................2-10
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface ....................................................................................2-11
2.5.9.1 Autopilot ADIs and Gyros.........................................................................................2-11
2.5.9.2 Autopilot Turn Coordinators .....................................................................................2-11
2.5.9.3 Altitude Pre-Selector and Remote Annunciators.......................................................2-11
2.5.9.4 ADIs with Integral Flight Director Presentation .......................................................2-11
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations.......................................................................................2-12
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations ...................................................................................................2-12
2.5.11.1 GDU 620 Location and Mounting.............................................................................2-12
2.5.11.2 Standby Instrument Location ....................................................................................2-14
2.5.11.3 New Instrument Panel Considerations ......................................................................2-18
2.5.11.4 GRS 77 Location and Mounting................................................................................2-19
2.5.11.5 GMU 44 Location and Mounting ..............................................................................2-20
2.5.11.6 GDC 74A Location and Mounting ............................................................................2-23
2.5.11.7 GTP 59 Location and Mounting................................................................................2-24
2.5.11.8 Copilot ADI with Flight Director – Location............................................................2-26
2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations ......................................................................................2-26
2.5.12.1 HIRF Considerations .................................................................................................2-27
2.5.12.2 Pressurized Aircraft Considerations ..........................................................................2-27
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements........................................................................................................2-27
Page iv G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration.......................................................................................2-27
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations .......................................................................................................2-27
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations ................................................................................2-27
2.5.16.1 ARINC 429 GPSS .....................................................................................................2-27
2.5.16.2 G600 Roll Steering Converter Function....................................................................2-27
3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE......................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Special Tools Required...................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Equipment Installation....................................................................................................................3-2
3.2.1 GDU 620 Display Location and Mounting ..........................................................................3-2
3.2.1.1 GDU 620 Display Location.........................................................................................3-2
3.2.1.2 Installation Considerations ..........................................................................................3-4
3.2.1.3 Temporary Installation of Cutout Template ................................................................3-5
3.2.1.4 Trim Plate Considerations ...........................................................................................3-6
3.2.1.5 Trim Plate Installation (if required).............................................................................3-6
3.2.1.6 GDU 620 Installation ................................................................................................3-11
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting ....................................................................3-12
3.2.3 GRS 77 AHRS Location and Mounting.............................................................................3-15
3.2.3.1 Considerations for all GRS 77 Installations ..............................................................3-17
3.2.3.2 Preparation for Installation with GRS 77 Universal Mount ......................................3-18
3.2.3.3 Preparation for Installation without GRS 77 Universal Mount .................................3-32
3.2.3.4 GRS 77 Rack to Unit Flatness Check........................................................................3-38
3.2.3.5 Installation of the GRS 77 AHRS..............................................................................3-39
3.2.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting...............................................................3-40
3.2.4.1 GMU 44 Universal Mount (Optional) .......................................................................3-40
3.2.4.2 Installation of GMU 44 Magnetometer with GMU 44 Universal Mount..................3-45
3.2.4.3 Magnetic Interference Survey ...................................................................................3-57
3.2.4.4 Method for Determining Heading Angle Offset for Wing Installation .....................3-58
3.2.5 GDC 74A ADC Mounting .................................................................................................3-68
3.2.5.1 Pitot-Static Connections GDC 74A...........................................................................3-71
3.2.5.2 Composite Aircraft GDC 74A ADC Installations .....................................................3-73
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting...............................................................................3-76
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures ...................................................................................3-78
3.3.1 GRS 77 Static Test Loads ..................................................................................................3-78
3.3.2 GDC 74A Static Test Loads...............................................................................................3-78
3.3.3 GMU 44 Static Test Loads.................................................................................................3-79
3.3.4 Test Procedures ..................................................................................................................3-79
3.4 Cabling and Wiring ......................................................................................................................3-81
3.4.1 Wiring Harness...................................................................................................................3-81
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors ......................................................3-82
3.4.2.1 Shield Block Assembly Procedure ............................................................................3-84
3.4.2.2 Configuration Module Installation (P741, P771 and P6202 Only) ...........................3-87
3.5 Unit Replacement .........................................................................................................................3-89
3.5.1 GDU 620 Unit Replacement ..............................................................................................3-89
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page v
190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.5.1.1 Removal.....................................................................................................................3-89
3.5.1.2 Replacement ..............................................................................................................3-89
3.5.1.3 Return to Service .......................................................................................................3-90
3.5.2 GRS 77 Unit Replacement .................................................................................................3-90
3.5.2.1 Removal.....................................................................................................................3-90
3.5.2.2 Replacement ..............................................................................................................3-90
3.5.3 GMU 44 Unit Replacement................................................................................................3-91
3.5.3.1 Removal.....................................................................................................................3-91
3.5.3.2 Replacement ..............................................................................................................3-91
3.5.4 GDC 74A Unit Replacement..............................................................................................3-92
3.5.4.1 Removal.....................................................................................................................3-92
3.5.4.2 Replacement ..............................................................................................................3-92
3.5.5 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed) .........................3-92
3.6 Weight and Balance......................................................................................................................3-94
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis...............................................................................................................3-95
4 SYSTEM INTERCONNECT.............................................................................................................4-1
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CHECKOUT ..................................................................................5-1
5.1 System Configuration Overview ....................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information .......................................................................................5-1
5.2.1 PFD ......................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.2 MFD .....................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2.3 GDL 69 Audio Mute Speed .................................................................................................5-2
5.2.4 Airspeeds (PFD)...................................................................................................................5-2
5.3 Mounting, Wiring and Power Checks ............................................................................................5-3
5.4 Software Loading ...........................................................................................................................5-4
5.4.1 GDU 620 Software Loading ................................................................................................5-4
5.4.2 GRS 77 Software Loading ...................................................................................................5-5
5.4.3 GMU 44 Software Loading..................................................................................................5-6
5.4.4 GDC 74A Software Loading................................................................................................5-7
5.4.5 GDL 69/69A Software Loading (Optional) .........................................................................5-8
5.4.6 Software Load Confirmation................................................................................................5-9
5.5 System Setup ................................................................................................................................5-10
5.5.1 System Configuration.........................................................................................................5-10
5.5.2 Airframe Configuration......................................................................................................5-10
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration.......................................................................................................5-10
5.5.4 Manifest Configuration ......................................................................................................5-13
5.5.5 Optional G600 Feature Activation .....................................................................................5-14
5.5.5.1 ChartView..................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.5.2 Altitude Preselect.......................................................................................................5-14
Page vi G600 AML STC Installation Manual
Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration .................................................................................................5-15
5.5.7 GDC Configuration............................................................................................................5-15
5.5.8 GDL 69/69A Configuration ...............................................................................................5-15
5.5.9 Autopilot Configuration .....................................................................................................5-16
5.5.10 Flight Director Configuration.............................................................................................5-17
5.5.10.1 Flight Director Settings Using Manual Entry............................................................5-18
5.5.11 Updating the Configuration Module ..................................................................................5-20
5.6 GRS 77 AHRS Calibration and Check.........................................................................................5-21
5.6.1 GRS 77 Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation...........................................................................5-21
5.6.2 GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration ....................................................................5-22
5.6.3 Compass Swing..................................................................................................................5-24
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation ...........................................................................................5-26
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test ..........................................................................................5-27
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test ........................................................................................5-29
5.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional)..................................................................5-31
5.8 Ground Checks .............................................................................................................................5-32
5.8.1 Database Check..................................................................................................................5-32
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks......................................................5-32
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test ..............................................................................................5-34
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test....................................................................................5-34
5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test .....................................................................................................5-35
5.8.5.1 Autopilot Engagement Test .......................................................................................5-35
5.8.5.2 Flight Director Test ...................................................................................................5-35
5.8.5.3 Flight Director Offset Calibration (if required) .........................................................5-36
5.8.5.4 Altitude Preselector Test ...........................................................................................5-37
5.8.5.5 Heading and Course Error Test .................................................................................5-38
5.8.5.6 VOR/Localizer and Glideslope Deviation Tests .......................................................5-41
5.8.5.7 ARINC 429 GPS Roll Steering Test .........................................................................5-42
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test.............................................................................................5-43
5.8.6.1 TAS Traffic Interface Test ........................................................................................5-44
5.8.6.2 TIS (Garmin GTX 33/330) Interface Test.................................................................5-45
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69/69A Checkout Procedure ........................................................................5-46
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure ...................................................................................5-48
5.8.9 GDU Cross-Fill Checkout Procedure (Dual GDU 620 Installations Only).......................5-48
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check..................................................................................................................5-48
5.9 Placard Relocation/Switch Labeling ............................................................................................5-49
5.10 Flight Checks................................................................................................................................5-49
5.10.1 General System Flight Check.............................................................................................5-49
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments ................................................................5-49
5.10.2.1 Flight Director Performance......................................................................................5-49
5.10.2.2 Autopilot Performance ..............................................................................................5-52
5.10.2.3 Roll Steering Performance ........................................................................................5-53
5.10.2.4 Altitude Preselector Performance..............................................................................5-53
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page vii

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.11 Documentation Checks.................................................................................................................5-54
5.11.1 AFMS.................................................................................................................................5-54
5.11.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICAW)............................................................5-54
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log.......................................................................................5-54
6 TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting ......................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test.................................6-1
6.1.1.1 Electrical Current Return Paths ...................................................................................6-1
6.1.1.2 Nearby Electrical Loads ..............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1.3 Ferromagnetic Materials..............................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems .....................................................................6-1
6.2 G600 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................6-3
6.3 G600 Alerts ....................................................................................................................................6-5
6.4 Autopilot Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................6-7
6.5 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed).........................................................................6-9
6.6 Contacting Garmin for Assistance................................................................................................6-10
7 LIMITATIONS ...................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Operation ........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 STC Installations ............................................................................................................................7-1
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels ..............................................................................7-1
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G600 System ..........................................................................7-2
7.2.2.1 GNS 500W Series TAWS Annunciation.....................................................................7-2
7.2.2.2 Altitude Alerter and Pre-Selectors...............................................................................7-2
7.2.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the G600 .........................................................................7-2
7.2.3 Major Alterations .................................................................................................................7-2
7.2.4 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ............................................................................7-2
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Cleaning..........................................................................................................................................8-1
8.2 GDC 74A........................................................................................................................................8-1
APPENDIX A STC DATA................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1 STC/PMA Information .................................................................................................................. A-1
A.2 Permission to use STC................................................................................................................... A-1
A.3 Continued Airworthiness Instructions ........................................................................................... A-1
A.4 STC Approved Model List ............................................................................................................ A-1
APPENDIX B LRU CONNECTOR PIN-OUT INFORMATION ................................................... B-1
B.1 GDU 620 PFD/MFD ..................................................................................................................... B-1
B.1.1 P6201 Connector................................................................................................................. B-1
B.1.2 P6202 Connector................................................................................................................. B-2
B.1.3 P6203 Connector................................................................................................................. B-4
B.2 GRS 77 AHRS............................................................................................................................... B-6
B.2.1 P771 Connector................................................................................................................... B-6
B.3 GMU 44 Magnetometer .............................................................................................................. B-10
Page viii G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
B.3.1 J441 Connector.................................................................................................................. B-10
B.4 GDC 74A..................................................................................................................................... B-11
B.4.1 P741 Connector................................................................................................................. B-11
APPENDIX C OUTLINE AND INSTALLATION DRAWINGS.................................................... C-1
C.1 Drawing List.................................................................................................................................. C-1
APPENDIX D SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS .................................................................................... D-1
D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts ................................................................................................. D-1
D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples ..................................................................................................... D-7
D.3 GDC 74A Installation Examples ................................................................................................. D-10
APPENDIX E EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION............................... E-1
E.1 Electric Standby Attitude Indicators.............................................................................................. E-1
E.2 GPS Source.................................................................................................................................... E-1
E.3 Autopilot........................................................................................................................................ E-2
E.4 External Flight Directors ............................................................................................................... E-3
E.5 Navigation Receivers..................................................................................................................... E-4
E.6 Traffic Source................................................................................................................................ E-4
E.7 Data Link ....................................................................................................................................... E-5
E.8 2 ¼” Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters ........................................................................ E-5
E.9 ADF Receiver................................................................................................................................ E-5
E.10 Weather Radar Source ................................................................................................................... E-6
E.11 Lightning Source ........................................................................................................................... E-6
E.12 External TAWS Source ................................................................................................................. E-6
APPENDIX F INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS ............................................................................... F-1
F.1 Drawing List...................................................................................................................................F-1
APPENDIX G MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE SURVEY PC SOFTWARE ................................G-1
G.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... G-1
G.2 Test Cable Requirements............................................................................................................... G-2
G.3 GMU 44 Location Survey Tool Software Installation Instructions............................................... G-3
G.3.1 For New MATLAB Installations:..........................................................................................G-4
G.3.2 For Existing MATLAB Installations:....................................................................................G-7
G.4 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey with the GLS Tool................................................... G-10
G.4.1 Data Collection..................................................................................................................G-12
G.4.2 Data Analysis ....................................................................................................................G-14
APPENDIX H MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTALLATIONS .......................H-1
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators .................................... H-1
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments .............................................................................. H-4
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1. G600 System Overview – Single GDU...................................................................................1-3
Figure 1-2. G600 System Overview – Dual GDUs ...................................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3. G600 Interfaces – Single GDU ...............................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-4. G600 Interfaces – Dual GDUs ................................................................................................1-8
Figure 1-5. Typical Instrument Panel Modification...................................................................................1-9
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page ix
190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure 2-1. GDU 620 ADI Location........................................................................................................2-12
Figure 2-2. Original ADI Area.................................................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-3. GDU 620 ADI Location Requirement ..................................................................................2-13
Figure 2-4. Acceptable Installation Area for 3 1/8 Inch Standby Instruments ........................................2-15
Figure 2-5. Side View Stepped Panel for 3 1/8 Inch Standby Instruments..............................................2-15
Figure 2-6. Acceptable Installation Area for 2 ¼ Inch Standby Instruments ..........................................2-16
Figure 2-7. Acceptable Installation Area for Mixed Standby Instruments ..............................................2-17
Figure 2-8. Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer ...............................................................2-21
Figure 2-9. Level Mounting of GMU 44 Magnetometer .........................................................................2-22
Figure 2-10. Heading Offset Limit GMU 44 Magnetometer ...................................................................2-22
Figure 2-11. GDC 74A Air Hose Fitting Locations.................................................................................2-23
Figure 2-12. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe – Single Engine Aircraft ...............2-24
Figure 2-13. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe – Twin Engine Aircraft .................2-25
Figure 2-13A. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe – Twin Engine Aircraft ..............2-26
Figure 3-1. Example of an Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration .......................................................3-3
Figure 3-2. Example of a Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration .................................................3-3
Figure 3-3. GDU 620 Installed, Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration .......................................3-4
Figure 3-4. GDU 620 Recommended Connector Clearance......................................................................3-5
Figure 3-5. Trim Plate Installation, Thin ...................................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-6. Trim Plate Installation, Thick..................................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-7. Structural Trim Plate Installation, Correct Installation ...........................................................3-9
Figure 3-8. Structural Trim Plate Installation, Incorrect Installation.......................................................3-10
Figure 3-9. Acceptable Modifications to Edge Detail .............................................................................3-11
Figure 3-10. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments To the Right and Diagonal ...........3-12
Figure 3-11. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Panel ..............3-13
Figure 3-12. Example of GDU 620 Installed with 2 1/4” Standby Instruments ......................................3-14
Figure 3-13. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Inward Facing Angle Brackets) ...............................................3-18
Figure 3-14. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Outward Facing Angle Brackets).............................................3-18
Figure 3-15. GRS 77 Universal Mount Assembly ...................................................................................3-19
Figure 3-16. Hole-Pattern Configuration to Set Incline in Assembly for Aircraft Level ........................3-20
Figure 3-17. Top Bracket to Angle Bracket Assembly............................................................................3-20
Figure 3-18. Assembling GRS 77 Mounting Rack to GRS 77 Universal Mount ....................................3-21
Figure 3-19. Installation of Universal Mount to Mounting Plate.............................................................3-22
Figure 3-20. Mounting Location (Composite Aircraft) ...........................................................................3-23
Figure 3-21. Mounting Bolt Preparation (Composite Aircraft) ...............................................................3-24
Figure 3-22. Mounting Bolt Installation and Alignment (Composite Aircraft).......................................3-25
Figure 3-23. First Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft) ......................................3-26
Figure 3-24. 2nd Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)........................................3-27
Figure 3-25. Installation of GRS 77 AHRS Universal Mount in Tube and Fabric Aircraft Using Welded
Tabs ....................................................................................................................................3-28
Figure 3-26. Installation of GRS 77 AHRS Universal Mount in Tube and Fabric Aircraft Using MS21919
Clamps ................................................................................................................................3-30
Figure 3-27. Using the GRS 77 Universal Mount in Locations of Previously-Installed Equipment.......3-32
Figure 3-28. Installation of the Mounting Rack to the Mounting Plate ...................................................3-33
Figure 3-29. Installation of GRS 77 on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter riveted to Aircraft Skin) ................3-34
Figure 3-30. Installation of GRS 77 on Existing Floor Panel or Installed Support Panel........................3-36
Figure 3-31. Installation of GRS 77 with Installed Support Plate ...........................................................3-37
Figure 3-32. Measuring GRS 77 to Mounting Rack with Feeler Gauge..................................................3-38
Figure 3-33. GRS 77 Final Installation Example.....................................................................................3-39
Figure 3-34. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted.................................................................3-41
Figure 3-35. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted ............................................................3-41
Figure 3-36. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted - Suspended ............................................3-42
Figure 3-37. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted – Suspended.......................................3-42
Page x G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 3-38. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 1..........................................................3-43
Figure 3-39. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 2..........................................................3-43
Figure 3-40. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Using Support Equipment, Examples. ........3-44
Figure 3-41. Top Plate Alignment to Aircraft Heading ...........................................................................3-45
Figure 3-42. Installation Rack Rivet Through Holes ...............................................................................3-46
Figure 3-43. Installation Rack to Top Bracket Installation......................................................................3-46
Figure 3-44. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Bracket Assembly.........................................3-47
Figure 3-45. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Hole-Patterns ................................................3-48
Figure 3-46. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method (Side Plate Mounted)..........3-49
Figure 3-47. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method (Side Plate Mounted)..........3-49
Figure 3-48. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method........................................3-50
Figure 3-49. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method........................................3-50
Figure 3-50. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure ..........................................................3-51
Figure 3-51. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure ..........................................................3-51
Figure 3-52. Example of a 4° Lateral Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount ...............................................3-52
Figure 3-53. Example of a 6° Rotated Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount ..............................................3-52
Figure 3-54. Installation of the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount.........................................3-53
Figure 3-55. GMU 44 Installation Clearance...........................................................................................3-55
Figure 3-56. Possible Hole-Patterns on the GMU 44 Universal Mount ..................................................3-56
Figure 3-57. Rivet Line Method to Determine Mounting Panel Alignment............................................3-58
Figure 3-58. Dividers Used to Transfer Panel alignment ........................................................................3-59
Figure 3-59. Using Dividers to Transfer the Panel Alignment ................................................................3-60
Figure 3-60. Transferring The Mounting Plate Alignment......................................................................3-60
Figure 3-61. Transferring the Mounting Panel Line ................................................................................3-61
Figure 3-62. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Forward Fuselage...................................................3-61
Figure 3-63. Center Mark for the Forward Fuselage (Plumb Bob Method) ............................................3-62
Figure 3-64. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Aft Fuselage...........................................................3-62
Figure 3-65. Center Line (Plumb Bob Method).......................................................................................3-63
Figure 3-66. Transferring Center Line Step 1 (Laser Square Method)....................................................3-64
Figure 3-67. Transferring Center Line Step 2 (Laser Square Method)....................................................3-64
Figure 3-68. Measuring the Heading Angle Offset..................................................................................3-65
Figure 3-69. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 1 .............................................................................................3-65
Figure 3-73. GDC 74A Recommended Clearance...................................................................................3-68
Figure 3-74. Installation of the Mounting Rack to the Mounting Plate ...................................................3-70
Figure 3-75. Pitot-Static Connections for Single GDU Installation ........................................................3-71
Figure 3-76. Pitot-Static Connections for Dual GDU Installation ...........................................................3-72
Figure 3-77. Drilling Hole-Pattern on Mounting Rack for Composite Aircraft ......................................3-73
Figure 3-78. Pressing Mounting Rack Into Flox/Epoxy Mix (Composite Aircraft) ................................3-74
Figure 3-79. Cloth lay-up for Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft).......................................................3-74
Figure 3-80. GDC 74A Final Installation Example (Composite Aircraft)...............................................3-75
Figure 3-81. GTP 59 OAT Probe Installation..........................................................................................3-77
Figure 3-82. Upward Static Load Test.....................................................................................................3-80
Figure 3-83. Forward Static Load Test ....................................................................................................3-80
Figure 3-84. Connector and Backshell Assembly....................................................................................3-84
Figure 3-85. Shielded Cable Preparation .................................................................................................3-85
Figure 3-86. Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly .......................................................................3-85
Figure 3-87. Configuration Module Installation ......................................................................................3-88
Figure 3-88. Sample Weight and Balance Calculation ............................................................................3-94
Figure C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations ............................................................................................. C-2
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page xi

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure C-2. GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity........................................................................ C-3
Figure C-3. GMU 44 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity ........................................ C-4
Figure C-4. GRS 77 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity.......................................... C-5
Figure C-5. GDC 74A and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option I) ..................... C-6
Figure C-6. GDC 74A and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option II).................... C-7
Figure C-7. GDC 74A Mounting Orientation Limits................................................................................ C-8
Figure C-8. GDC 74A Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation ............................................................... C-9
Figure C-9. GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions.............................................................................................. C-10
Figure C-10. Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )............................................................................................ C-11
Figure C-11. GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions .............................................................................. C-12
Figure C-12. GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions............................................................................. C-14
Figure C-13. Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions ............................................................. C-16
Figure C-14. GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions ....................................................................................... C-17
Figure D-1. Installation of GDU 620 with Ideal Six-Pack........................................................................ D-1
Figure D-2. Installation of GDU 620 with Non-Ideal Six-Pack ...............................................................D-2
Figure D-3. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Instrument Panel ...D-3
Figure D-4. Installation of GDU 620 Using 2 1/4 Inch Backup Instruments ...........................................D-4
Figure D-5. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments Below...................................................D-5
Figure D-6. Installation of GDU Using Both 2 1/4 Inch and 3 1/8 Inch Backup Instruments..................D-6
Figure D-7. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted .............................D-7
Figure D-8. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted .............................D-7
Figure D-9. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Suspended - Side Mounted.........D-8
Figure D-10. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount- Bottom Mounted ......................D-8
Figure D-11. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Suspended - Bottom Mounted..D-9
Figure D-12. Not Used..............................................................................................................................D-9
Figure D-13. Installation of GDC 74A to Mounting Plate......................................................................D-10
Figure D-14. Installation of GDC 74A – Horizontal Orientation ...........................................................D-10
Figure D-15. Installation of GDC 74A – Vertical Orientation ...............................................................D-11
Figure D-16. Installation of GDC 74A – Vertical Orientation using Stringers ......................................D-11
Figure F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU).............................. F-3
Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDUs)............................... F-4
Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT- GDC 74A/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect.............................. F-6
Figure F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU) ................................................................ F-7
Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDUs) ................................................................. F-8
Figure F-6. GPS Source Interconnect (Single GDU)................................................................................ F-9
Figure F-7. GPS Source Interconnect (Dual GDUs)............................................................................... F-10
Figure F-8. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU) ................................................................ F-12
Figure F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDUs) ................................................................. F-13
Figure F-10. Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect.................................... F-14
Figure F-11. S-TEC Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect .................................................................. F-18
Figure F-12. Century Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect................................................................. F-22
Figure F-13. Collins Autopilot Interconnect........................................................................................... F-26
Figure F-14. Cessna Autopilot Interconnect ........................................................................................... F-30
Figure F-15. Audio Interconnect............................................................................................................. F-34
Figure F-16. GDL 69/69A Interconnect ................................................................................................. F-35
Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect ............................................................................... F-36
Figure F-18. ADF Interconnect............................................................................................................... F-38
Figure F-19. External Switches (GPSS) ................................................................................................. F-39
Figure F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI Interconnect (Integral Battery)............................... F-40
Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI Interconnect (External Battery).............................. F-41
Page xii G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect .................................................................................. F-42
Figure F-23. Weather Radar Provisions Interconnect............................................................................. F-43
Figure G-1. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup with Direct Connection to PC.....................................G-2
Figure G-2. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup using RS-485 to RS-232 Converter ............................G-2
Figure H-1. Instrument Panel Patches.......................................................................................................H-2
Figure H-2. Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments ......................................................................H-4
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page xiii

190-00601-06 Rev. B
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1. G600 Equipment Environmental Qualification Forms...........................................................1-10
Table 1-2. G600 LRU Physical Specifications ........................................................................................1-10
Table 1-3. LRU Current Specifications ...................................................................................................1-11
Table 1-4. Garmin G600 Reference Documentation ...............................................................................1-12
Table 1-5. Other Reference Documentation ............................................................................................1-12
Table 1-6. Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation .............................................................1-12
Table 2-1. G600 LRU Kit K10-00004-00 Contents, Black .......................................................................2-1
Table 2-2. Options Available .....................................................................................................................2-1
Table 2-3. G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-00 Accessories ............................................................2-2
Table 2-4. G600 Labels..............................................................................................................................2-6
Table 2-5. Magnetic Disturbances ...........................................................................................................2-20
Table 2-6. Maximum Wire Lengths.........................................................................................................2-27
Table 3-1. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options with GRS 77 Universal Mount................3-15
Table 3-2. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options without GRS 77 Universal Mount...........3-16
Table 3-3. OAT Probe Kit P/N 011-00978-00.........................................................................................3-76
Table 3-4. Socket Contact Part Numbers.................................................................................................3-81
Table 3-5. Recommended Crimp Tools...................................................................................................3-82
Table 3-6. Backshell Assembly ...............................................................................................................3-82
Table 3-7. Configuration Module Kit – 011-00979-00 (for P741 and P771) ..........................................3-87
Table 3-8. Configuration Module Kit – 011-00979-02 (for P6202) ........................................................3-87
Table 3-9. Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart ..............................................................3-87
Table 3-10. GRS 77 Calibration Criteria ................................................................................................3-91
Table 3-11. Unit Weight and Balance Data .............................................................................................3-94
Table 3-12. LRU Current Requirements..................................................................................................3-95
Table 5-1. Airframe Specific Configuration Data......................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2. GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings .........................................................................................5-16
Table 5-3. GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings.................................................................................5-17
Table 5-3A. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings ..........................................................5-19
Table 5-4. Heading Verification ..............................................................................................................5-24
Table 5-5. Airspeed Test Points...............................................................................................................5-33
Table 5-6. Flight Director Configuration Settings ...................................................................................5-51
Table 5-7. Autopilot Configuration Settings............................................................................................5-52
Table 5-8. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log.....................................................................5-55
Table 6-1. GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide ............................................................................................6-3
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide ...................................................................................6-5
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide.............................................................................................6-7
Table 6-4. Mid-Continent Standby ADI Troubleshooting Guide ..............................................................6-9
Table G-1. Example Detailed Sequence .................................................................................................G-11
Page xiv G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
1 General Description
1.1 Introduction
This manual covers the G600 system, which includes the GDU 620 display, GDC 74A air data computer,
GRS 77 AHRS, GMU 44 magnetometer and GTP 59 temperature probe. This manual describes the
physical, mechanical and electrical characteristics, as well as instructions and other conditions and
limitations for installation and approval for all components of the G600 system. It is intended for use by
persons certified by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to install avionics. It includes installation
and checkout procedures for the G600 to standards described in Title 14 CFR Part 43.
1.2 Scope
This installation manual applies to the modification of an aircraft to support the installation of the G600
system and the required standby instruments. Interfacing to additional equipment is also covered by this
manual; however, the installation of such peripheral equipment (traffic / weather sensors, GPS, NAV,
autopilot systems, etc.) is not covered. Those systems require other installation data and approval.
The data contained within this manual is FAA approved under the G600 AML STC SA02153LA, which
is applicable for implementation within airplanes that are type certificated under the Civil Air Regulation
3/4 (CAR 3/4) or Title 14 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 23. Currently the STC data supports
aircraft identified via AC 23.1309-1C as Class I, II, or III. The G600 system installation covered by this
STC is not appropriate for Part 23 Commuter Category (Class IV), or Part 25 Transport Category aircraft,
nor is it appropriate for Part 27/29 Rotorcraft.
Installation of the G600 system in an aircraft imposes specific limitations which may affect the
operational capabilities of some aircraft, specifically RVSM compliance. Section 7 of this manual lists all
the Limitations of the STC, which should be carefully reviewed prior to any installation.
1.2.1 Approved Aircraft with Systems not Covered by the STC
Aircraft identified on the Approved Model List have been determined to meet a minimum required
configuration for applicability of the STC. However, since some of these aircraft may have been
modified over the years or may have been manufactured with systems which are not identified or
approved in this manual for integration with the G600, it may be difficult to use the data herein to
completely substantiate the installation in compliance with the STC. It is the installer’s responsibility to
make the final determination of applicability for each aircraft. Use Section 2 of this manual to assess
each installation prior to modifying any Type Certified aircraft to ensure the applicability of the G600
AML STC.
It is possible / permissible for installers and other appropriately certificated persons to seek approval for
installation and operational use of the G600 with systems not identified in this manual. It is the
responsibility of such persons to validate any compatibility and document any limitations of such
interfaces and to provide that data to the FAA for approval by means of a TC, STC, or Field Approval
prior to returning the aircraft to service.
1.2.2 Class I/II aircraft not identified on the AML
Aircraft identified via AC 23.1309-1C as Class I or II airplanes which are not identified on the G600
AML STC may be valid candidates for the G600 AML STC. Installers should contact Garmin Tech
Support with detailed drawings of the aircraft’s proposed installation. Engineering analysis may allow for
the inclusion of these aircraft in a future revision of the FAA Approved Model List.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
1.2.3 Class III Aircraft not Identified on the AML
Some aircraft identified via AC 23.1309-1C as Class III airplanes have been delayed inclusion on the
AML based upon additional data required by the Small Aircraft Directorate and Aircraft Evaluation
Group. Field Approvals for this class of aircraft should not be made; instead, installers or other
appropriately agencies should contact Garmin directly to develop the required data needed to support an
installation of this type under the STC.
1.2.4 Other Aircraft Not Covered by the G600 AML STC
Commuter Category Aircraft (Part 23 Class IV), Transport Category Aircraft (Part 25), and Rotorcraft
(Part 27/29) are not part of the G600 AML STC. The data in this installation manual and the components
of the G600 system have not been tested to operate under the standards specified for these types of
aircraft. Field Approvals for these aircraft should not be made.
1.2.5 Required Documentation for All Installations
Regardless of applicability of the AML STC or alternative field approval application for installation and
operational approval, prior to completing the installation and before returning the airplane to service, the
installer or other appropriately certificated person is required to complete and submit an FAA Form 337;
“Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance” to the appropriate FAA
Flight Standards District Office describing the work accomplished. The FAA Form 337 must detail the
equipment and systems to which the respective G600 System is interfaced and reflect appropriately
approved or acceptable data for which any follow-on FAA Field Approval is being sought. See AC 43.9-
1E for instructions for completing the FAA Form 337. In addition, the G600 Configuration and Checkout
Log must be completed and attached with the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness such that any
aircraft with the modifications detailed in this manual may be properly maintained.
1.3 G600 System Overview
The G600 system is designed to replace the standard “six-pack” instruments, along with any external
CDIs and ADF indicator. Standby instruments (ADI, airspeed indicator and altimeter) are required, and
these usually go in the locations vacated by the removed instruments. An overview of the G600 system is
shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. Further detail on each of the LRUs is provided in the following
sections.
Page 1-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 1-1. G600 System Overview – Single GDU

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure 1-2. G600 System Overview – Dual GDUs

Rev. B 190-00601-06
1.3.1 G600 LRU Descriptions
GDU 620: The GDU 620 has dual VGA (640 x 480 pixels) 6.5-inch LCD
displays. The left side of the GDU is the primary flight display (PFD) and
the right side is the multi-function display (MFD). The PFD shows
primary flight information. The MFD shows navigation and flight plan
information, traffic, weather and terrain. An external configuration
module is used, so no configuration is required if the GDU 620 is replaced
for any reason.
GRS 77: The GRS 77 is an attitude, heading and reference unit, or

AHRS, that provides aircraft attitude and flight characteristics information
to the GDU 620. The unit contains advanced tilt sensors, accelerometers,
and rate sensors. In addition, the GRS 77 interfaces with both the
GDC 74A air data computer and the GMU 44 magnetometer. The GRS 77
also utilizes GPS signals sent from the GPS/WAAS navigator. Actual
attitude and heading information is sent using ARINC 429 digital
interface to the GDU 620.
GMU 44: The GMU 44 magnetometer senses magnetic field information.

Data is sent to the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and
communicates with the GRS 77 using an RS-485 digital interface.
GDC 74A: The GDC 74A air data computer receives information from
the pitot/static system and the GTP 59 outside air temperature (OAT)
sensor. The GDC 74A is responsible for providing pressure altitude,
airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information to the G600 system. The
GDC 74A provides data to the GDU 620 and GRS 77 using ARINC 429
digital interfaces. The GDC 74A also communicates maintenance and
configuration information to the GDU 620 using an RS-232 interface.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
1.3.2 Required GPS Navigator
At least one of the following WAAS/GPS navigators is required, although the G600 system will support
two independent navigators. For dual GDU 620 installations, two navigators are required (these do not
have to be the same navigators).
400W/500W Series: The 400W/500W Series unit is a panel-mount
WAAS/GPS navigator with a color moving map. Position and flight plan
data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and ARINC 429
interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the GRS 77
AHRS in order to ensure normal AHRS operation. The GNS 430W/530W
also provides LOC/GS information for display on the GDU 620 HSI via
an ARINC 429 interface.
GNS 480: The GNS 480 unit is a panel-mount WAAS/GPS navigator /

with a built-in navigation receiver and a color moving map. Position and
flight plan data are displayed on the GDU 620 MFD via RS-232 and
ARINC 429 interfaces. GPS position information is also forwarded to the
GRS 77 AHRS in order to ensure normal AHRS operation. LOC/GS
information is provided on an ARINC 429 interface and displayed on the
GDU 620 HSI.
1.3.3 Required Standby Instruments
When the G600 system is installed, an independent attitude indicator, airspeed indicator and altimeter
must be installed. In many cases the existing instruments can be retained for use as standby instruments.
1.3.4 Optional Systems
SL30 NAV/COM: The GDU 620 can receive VOR/ILS information from an SL30 transceiver. The
lateral and vertical deviations from the navigation receiver can be displayed on the GDU 620 HSI.
Traffic Sensor: The GDU 620 can receive traffic information from various traffic sensors, including the
Garmin GTX 330/330D, Goodrich SkyWatch, Honeywell TAS/IHAS and Ryan TCAD. Traffic
information is received over an ARINC 429 interface, and optional control is provided using discrete(s).
All aural traffic alerts are still generated by the traffic system.
GDL 69/69A: The GDU 620 can receive data link information from the GDL 69/69A, which is an XM
Satellite Radio data link receiver that receives broadcast weather data. The GDL 69A is the same as the
GDL 69 with the addition of XM Satellite Radio audio entertainment. Weather data and control of audio
channel and volume is displayed on the GDU 620 MFD, via a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet
connection. The GDL 69A is also interfaced to an audio panel for distribution of the audio signal.
ADF: The GDU 620 can receive bearing information from an ADF receiver. The ADF bearing
information can be displayed on the GDU 620 HSI on a pilot-selectable bearing pointer.
1.3.5 Interface Summary
A summary of the individual interface types between the LRUs in the G600 system is shown in Figure
1-3 and Figure 1-4.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
190-00601-06
ARINC 429 (GPS)
ARINC 429 (NAV)*
G600 AML STC Installation Manual

RS-232 (MapMX)
RS-232 (Crossfill) Time Mark
ARINC 429 (GPS Navigator)
ARINC 429 (GPS)
ARINC 429 (NAV)*
RS-232 (MapMX)
Time Mark
Course Error
Heading Error
ARINC 429 (Autopilot)
RS-485
Flight Director
RS-232
HSDB
Figure 1-3. G600 Interfaces – Single GDU

Analog Audio
ARINC 429
Discretes
Sin/Cos + Valid
Rev. B
Page 1-7
190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure 1-4. G600 Interfaces – Dual GDUs
ARINC 429 (GPS)
ARINC 429 (NAV)*
RS-232 (MapMX)
Time Mark
ARINC 429 (GPS)
ARINC 429 (NAV)*
RS-232 (MapMX)
Time Mark
Course Error
Heading Error
ARINC 429 (Autopilot)
RS-485
Flight Director
RS-232
HSDB
Analog Audio
ARINC 429
Discretes
Sin/Cos + Valid
Sin/Cos + Valid
Discretes
ARINC 429
HSDB
RS-232
Flight Director
ARINC 429 (GPS)
ARINC 429 (NAV)
RS-232 (MapMX)
Time Mark
ARINC 429 (GPS)
ARINC 429 (NAV)
RS-232 (MapMX)
Time Mark
1.4 G600 Installation
1.4.1 Installation Overview
The G600 system is designed to replace the standard “six pack” instruments, along with any external
CDIs and ADF indicator. Standby instruments (ADI, airspeed indicator and altimeter) are required, and
these usually go in the locations vacated by the removed instruments. A typical installation is shown in
Figure 1-5.
20
200 40
180
60
160 VOR INDICATOR
CLOCK 80
140
120 100
VAC
D.C.
ELEC.
6
3 E 10
15
5 VERTICAL
N
FUEL QTY
12
SPEED
UP 20
VOR INDICATOR
33
0
15
TURN COORDINATOR DN
100 FEET 20
30
PER MIN
S
L R 5
21 15
2 MIN
W
24 10
ELEC CURRENT
TACHOMETER ADF
TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL BEFORE MODIFICATION
Clock
Vac
20
200 40
Fuel Qty 180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Elec Current
Tachometer
TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL AFTER G600 INSTALLATION

Figure 1-5. Typical Instrument Panel Modification

190-00601-06 Rev. B
1.4.2 Installation Configurations
The G600 system can be installed with a single GDU 620 (display) or dual GDU 620s.
In a single GDU 620 installation the attitude, air data, autopilot and external sensors are connected
directly to the GDU 620. Refer to Figure 1-1.
In dual GDU 620 installations two independent attitude systems and two air data computers are required.
The primary and secondary GDU 620s share information over a cross-fill bus. The primary GDU 620 is
connected to the autopilot, although either GDU can control the course and heading inputs into the
autopilot. External systems are interfaced to each GDU as required. Refer to Figure 1-2. For installations
with dual GDU 620s, standby instruments are only required by the pilot (primary) GDU 620.
1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Environmental Qualification Forms
The latest revision of the Environmental Qualification Forms for each G600 LRU is available directly
from Garmin under the part numbers listed in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1. G600 Equipment Environmental Qualification Forms
Document Garmin Part Number
GDU 620 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00313-20
GRS 77 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00165-31
GMU 44 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00164-31
GDC 74A Environmental Qualification Form 005-00191-77
GTP 59 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00191-97
To obtain a copy of these forms, see the dealer/OEM portion of the Garmin web site (www.garmin.com).
1.5.2 Physical Characteristics
All width, height, and depth measurements are taken with unit rack (if applicable) and connectors.
Table 1-2. G600 LRU Physical Specifications
Unit Weight w/Rack

LRU Width Height Depth Unit Weight &
Connector Weight
10.0 inches 6.70 inches 5.50 inches 6.38 lbs. 7.04 lbs.
GDU 620 (25.4 cm) (17.0 cm) (14.0 cm) (2.90 kg) (3.20 kg)
GRS 77 (9.19 cm) (8.43 cm) (24.99 cm) (1.27 kg) (1.57 kg)
2.10 inches 0.35 lbs. 0.50 lbs.
GMU 44 N/A [1] N/A [1]
(5.33 cm) (0.16 kg) (0.23 kg)
GDC 74A (7.87 cm) (8.20 cm) (24.49 cm) (0.72 kg) (1.04 kg)
[1] Diameter of GMU 44 is 3.35 inches (8.51 cm), including flange.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
1.5.3 Power Requirements
All LRUs are capable of operating at either 14 or 28 VDC. See the individual LRU specific
Environmental Qualification Form for details on surge ratings and minimum/maximum operating
voltages. See Table 1-3 for current draw specifications.
Table 1-3. LRU Current Specifications
14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9 A 5.4 A 1.9 A 2.7 A
GRS 77/GMU 44 600 mA 1.0 A [1] 300 mA 1.0 A [1]
GDC 74A 410 mA 480 mA 200 mA 235 mA
[1] Maximum current draw occurs momentarily at startup or when the supply voltage drops to 9 VDC.
1.6 Certification
1.6.1 TSO Compliance
The TSO compliance for each LRU is with the software part numbers listed below:
LRU Applicable LRU SW Part Numbers
GDU 620 PFD/MFD 006-B0498-( )
GRS 77 AHRS 006-B0223-( )
GMU 44 Magnetometer 006-B0224-( )
GDC 74A ADC 006-B0261-( )
GTP 59 OAT Probe Not Applicable
1.6.1.1 GDU 620

Refer to the GDU 620 Installation Manual, P/N 190-00601-04.
1.6.1.2 GRS 77
TSO/ETSO/SAE/RTC
Function Category
A/EUROCAE
TSO-C3d
Turn and Slip Instrument ETSO-C3d
AS8004
TSO-C4c
Bank and Pitch Instruments ETSO-C4c Category A
AS8001
TSO-C6d
Direction Instrument, Magnetic (Gyroscopically
ETSO-C6d
Stabilized)
AS8013A
1.6.1.3 GMU 44
TSO/ETSO/SAE/
Function Category
RTCA/EUROCAE
TSO-C6d
Direction Instrument, Magnetic (Gyroscopically
ETSO-C6d
Stabilized)
AS8013A

190-00601-06 Rev. B
1.6.1.4 GDC 74A
Function TSO/ETSO Category
TSO-C106
Air Data Computer
ETSO-C106
1.6.1.5 GTP 59
Function TSO/ETSO Category
TSO-C106
Air Data Computer
ETSO-C106
1.7 G600 System Documentation

Table 1-4. Garmin G600 Reference Documentation
G600 System Installation Manual 190-00601-06
GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GDL 69 Activation Instructions 190-00355-04
Table 1-5. Other Reference Documentation

Document Part Number
Mid-Continent 4300-3XX and 4300-5XX Series Electric Attitude Indicator
9015692
Installation Manual
Mid-Continent 4300-4XX Series Electric Attitude Indicator Installation Manual 9015762
Mid-Continent 4200 Series Electric Attitude Indicator Installation Manual 9016182
Mid-Continent MD420 Emergency Power System Installation Manual 9016391
Table 1-6. Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation

400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
GNS 480 (CNX80) Color GPS/Nav/Com Installation Manual 560-0982-01
GTX 330 Installation Manual 190-00207-02
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02

Rev. B 190-00601-06
1.8 Databases
The GDU 620 utilizes various databases. With the exception of the Navigation database and IGRF model,
which reside internal to the GDU 620, all databases are stored on a single SD memory card that is
inserted into the bottom slot of the GDU 620. The following sections describe each database and how the
databases are updated.
CAUTION
The databases on the Supplemental Data Card are locked to specific GDU 620 displays.
The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted in a display it becomes “locked” to
that particular display and will not work in other displays.
1.8.1 Basemap Database

The basemap provides ground based references such as roads and bodies of water. The database is stored
in internal memory of the GDU 620 display. The basemap does not have a scheduled update cycle and as
such does not have an expiration date.
The basemap database is updated very infrequently. Should this database have to be updated in the
future, Garmin will provide details on how to load the updated data into the GDU 620.
1.8.2 Navigation Database
The Jeppesen Navigation Database provides the G600 system with the required information for
displaying flight plan information.
The GDU 620 utilizes a database stored on an SD memory data card for easy updating and replacement.
The Navigation database may be updated by simply inserting an updated Navigation database update card
into the top SD card slot in the front panel in the GDU 620. The actual database is downloaded into the
unit, so the card can be removed after the update. Each card will only update one system. Alternately, the
Navigation database may be updated by copying the database to the Garmin-supplied Supplemental Data
card. It will be downloaded into the GDU 620 on first use, and the file can be left on the Supplemental
Data card until the next update cycle.
The navigation database on the GDU 620 database card is generated from current Jeppesen Sanderson
data and converted to a format that is used by the GDU 620. The data conversion process is performed
using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management according to
RTCA/DO-200A, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data.
GDU 620 users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The
database card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 800-800-1020 or
fly.garmin.com for more information and instructions.
1.8.3 FliteCharts Database
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office (NACO) terminal
procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. When
viewing these charts on the MFD, the aircraft position is not depicted on the chart.
The FliteCharts database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
database on the card and reinserting the card. Each card can only be used with one system. GDU 620
users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database
card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 800-800-1020 or

190-00601-06 Rev. B
1.8.4 ChartView Database
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in
the plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams. The ChartView database is stored on an SD
memory card that remains in the GDU 620 for normal operation.
The ChartView database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
users update their ChartView data by purchasing database subscription updates from Jeppesen Sanderson.
The database card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader and Jeppesen-provided software.
Contact Jeppesen at 800-621-5377 or www.jeppesen.com for more information and instructions.
ChartView is an optional feature that must be activated. Instructions for activating the ChartView
function are found in Section 5.5.5.1.
1.8.5 SafeTaxi Database
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in
the United States. The SafeTaxi database is stored on an SD memory card that remains in the GDU 620
for normal operation.
The SafeTaxi database is updated by removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the
users update their database card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database
card is programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 800-800-1020 or
1.8.6 Terrain and Airport Terrain Databases
The Terrain database is used to provide basic Terrain awareness functionality. The Airport Terrain
database provides higher resolution terrain information near most airports. Both databases are available
for updating as needed and are available from Garmin. The terrain databases are updated by removing the
database card from the GDU 620, updating the databases on the card and reinserting the card in the lower
card slot on the GDU 620 front panel. The Terrain databases can be downloaded via the internet and the
card programmed using the supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 800-800-1020 or fly.garmin.com
for more information or instructions.
1.8.7 Obstacles Database
The obstacle database provides identification of known obstacles greater than 200 feet AGL. This
database is also used with Terrain awareness functionality. The Obstacle database is updated by
removing the database card from the GDU 620, updating the database on the card and reinserting the
card. The Obstacle database can be downloaded via the internet and the card programmed using the
supplied SD card reader. Contact Garmin at 800-800-1020 or fly.garmin.com for more information or
instructions.
1.8.8 IGRF Model
The IGRF (International Geomagnetic Reference Field) model is contained in the GRS 77 and is only
updated once every five years. The IGRF model is part of the Navigation Database. At system power-up,
the IGRF models in the GRS 77 and in the Navigation Database are compared, and if the IGRF model in
the GRS 77 is out of date, the user is prompted to update the IGRF model in the GRS 77. The prompt
will appear after the G600 splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2 INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
2.1 Introduction
The following section contains an overview of the steps required for the installation of the Garmin G600
System. This section includes requirements for selection of proper locations in the aircraft, as well as
requirements for supporting structure, mechanical alignment and electrical wiring. Any restrictions on
nearby equipment and requirements are also specified herein.
The post-installation calibration procedures required prior to flight are described in Section 5.
2.2 Pre-Installation Information
Always follow acceptable avionics installation practices in FAA Advisory Circulars (AC) 43.13-1B,
43.13-2A, or later FAA approved revisions of these documents.
Follow the installation procedure in this manual as it is presented for a successful installation. Read the
entire manual before beginning the procedure. Prior to installation, consider the structural integrity of the
G600 system installation as defined in AC 43.13-2A, Chapter 1 and Section 3.3 herein. Perform the post
installation checkout before closing the work area in case problems occur.
Complete an electrical load analysis in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11 on the aircraft prior to
starting modification to ensure aircraft has the ability to carry the additional load of the G600 equipment.
Refer to Section 3.7 for the power consumption information.
2.3 Available Equipment
The G600 system is supplied as an LRU kit and a G600 installation kit. For a description of the individual
units see Section 1.3.1.
Table 2-1. G600 LRU Kit K10-00004-00 Contents, Black
Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N Color Voltage (VDC)
GDU 620 [1] 011-01264-00 010-00482-00 BLK 14/28
GRS 77 011-00868-10 010-00295-10 - 14/28
GMU 44 011-00870-00 010-00296-00 - N/A
GDC 74A 011-00882-10 010-00336-10 - 14/28
GTP 59 011-00978-00 011-00978-00 - N/A
-- 010-00769-42 010-00769-42 - N/A
[1] A gray GDU 620 P/N 011-01264-10 (LRU Kit P/N K10-00006-00) is also available.
Contact Garmin for availability and ordering information.
Table 2-2. Options Available
Item Part Number Garmin Order
Number
GDU 6xx ChartView Activation Card – Heavy Aircraft [1] 010-00769-50 010-00770-00
GDU 6xx ChartView Activation Card – Light Aircraft [1] 010-00769-53 010-00770-10
GDU 6xx Altitude Preselect Activation Card [1] [2] 010-00769-52 010-00770-30
[1] An SD activation card is required to enable the indicated feature. Each activation card can only be
used once and, once used, the card will be only work with that particular G600 system.
[2] The Altitude Preselect option is only available for certain autopilots. Contact Garmin for availability
for a specific autopilot.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.4 Installation Materials
2.4.1 Accessories Available from Garmin
Table 2-3. G600 Installation Kit P/N K10-00005-00 Accessories
Used
Item Part Number
With
GDU 620 Connector Kit, GDU 620 [1] 011-01656-00
Mounting Screw Kit, GDU 620 [2] 011-02078-00
Trim Plate, Thin (0.032”) [3] 115-01009-00
Trim Plate, Thick (0.063”) [3] 115-01009-10
GRS 77 Connector Kit, SB, GRS 77 [1] 011-00869-01
GRS 77 Universal Mount Kit 011-01780-00
Installation Rack, GRS 77 115-00459-00
GMU 44 Connector Kit, GMU 44 [1] 011-00871-00
GMU44 Universal Mount Kit 011-01779-01
Installation Rack, GMU 44 115-00481-00
GDC 74A Connector Kit, SB, GDC 74A 011-01010-01
Mounting Rack, GDC 74A 011-01011-00
[1] Connector kit includes the unit configuration module.
[2] Mounting screw kit contains screws P/N 211-64307-14 (quantity 6).
[3] Trim plate is not painted. It must be cut to size and painted to match the installation.
The following items are available from Garmin and can be used for multiple installations:
Item Garmin P/N
GDU 620 Cutout Template [1] 115-01010-00
G600 Downloadable Software SD Card [2] [4] 010-00768-00
GDU 6xx Installer Unlock Card [3] 010-00769-60
G600 Software Loader Card [4] 010-00771-( )
[1] Cutout Template is clamped to instrument panel and used to mark the cutout required by the GDU
620. It is also used as a drill template to drill the holes for the six GDU 620 mounting screws. This
template can be used to make multiple cutouts.
[2] The G600 Downloadable Software SD Card is a blank SD card that can be used to make a G600
Software Loader card when the G600 software is downloaded from the Garmin Dealer website. Refer
to Section 2.4.3 for additional details.
[3] The Installer Unlock Card is required to access all pages in Configuration Mode when configuring the
system for a particular installation.
[4] The G600 Software Loader Card contains software for all G600 LRUs and the GDL 69/69A (an
equivalent card can be made using the G600 Downloadable Software SD Card and downloading the
software from the Garmin Dealer website). Contact Garmin to obtain the latest G600 Software Loader
Card.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.4.2 Materials Required but Not Supplied
The G600 equipment is intended for use with standard aviation accessories. The following items are
required for each installation:
• Wire (MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent)
• Shielded Wire (MIL-C-27500 or equivalent)
• Aircraft Grade Category 5 Ethernet Cable (only required for installations with the GDL 69/69A
or for dual GDU installations)
• Circuit Breakers
• Miscellaneous Nuts, screws, washers, rivets… (Standard installation hardware, including AN525-
1032R8 screws, MS20426AD4-6 rivets, MS21059L3 rivet nut plates, MS21071-06 reduced rivet
spacing nut plates)
• Pitot/Static fittings and lines (for GDC 74A installation)
• Tie wraps or lacing cord
• Ring Terminals (for grounding)
• Shield Terminators
• Silicon Fusion Tape
2.4.3 Software Loader Card
A G600 Software Loader card may be created using a G600 Downloadable Software SD Card P/N
010-00768-00 in conjunction with a G600 software application downloaded from the Dealer Resource
section of www.garmin.com.
NOTE
The downloadable application to create card only runs on Windows PC’s (Windows
2000, XP and Vista are supported). There is no Mac support at this time.
NOTE
An SD card reader is needed to create the G600 Loader Card using the application that is
downloaded from Garmin. The approved readers are SanDisk SDDR-99 and SDDR-93,
although other SD card readers will work.
Create a G600 Software Loader Card as follows:
1. Go to the Dealer Resource section of www.garmin.com.
2. Download the G600 Cockpit Display System software 006-B0942-( ).
3. Ensure that you have an SD card reader connected to the PC. Insert the G600 Downloadable
Software SD Card P/N 010-00768-00 into the card reader.
4. Run the executable file that was downloaded. The following window will appear:

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5. Click on Setup and the following window will appear to guide you through the software loader
card creation process:
6. Click on Next to get to the following window:
CAUTION
In order to create a loader card, the drive that you select will be completely erased.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
7. Ensure that the correct drive is selected. Click Next to create the card (click Next to acknowledge
any warnings that appear). The following window will appear when the card is being created:
8. After the card has been created the window below will appear. Click Finish to complete the
process.
9. Eject the card from the card reader (or stop the card reader in Windows). The G600 software
loader card is now ready to use.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5 Installation Considerations
2.5.1 Minimum System Configuration
The minimum G600 installation requires the following items:
• GDU 620 Display
• GRS 77 AHRS
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer
• External GPS Navigation sensor: 400W/500W Series (software version 3.10 or later), or
GNS 480 (software version 2.2 or later)
In addition to the G600 equipment, standby instruments must be installed as described in Section 2.5.2.
2.5.2 Standby Instruments
When installing the GDU 620 in the instrument panel, a standby attitude indicator, airspeed indicator and
altimeter must be installed. Either two-inch or three-inch standby instruments may be used, depending
upon panel space constraints. The standby instruments must be located as described in Section 2.5.11.2.
For aircraft covered by this STC, installations with dual GDU 620s only require standby instruments by
the pilot (primary) GDU 620.
CAUTION
Only pneumatic airspeed indicators and altimeters may be used for standby instruments.
The original pneumatic air-driven ADI is acceptable for the standby ADI. If it is desired
to use an electric ADI, only those ADIs listed in Section E.1 can be used due to failure
criticalities and stringent environmental requirements consequent from the G600 AML
STC System Safety Analysis.
2.5.3 Placards and Labels
All placards and labels should be readable in all lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is acceptable.
2.5.3.1 New Labels
New circuit breakers and switches installed for the G600 system must be labeled as shown in the
applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix F. These labels are summarized in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4. G600 Labels
Label Label
LRU/Item
(Single GDU Installation) (Dual GDU Installation)
GDU 620 Circuit Breaker PFD PFD 1/PFD 2
GRS 77 AHRS Circuit Breaker AHRS AHRS 1/AHRS 2
GDC 74A Circuit Breaker ADC ADC 1/ADC 2
Electric Standby ADI Circuit Breaker (If Installed) STBY ADI STBY ADI
GPSS Switch (If Installed) AP HDG DATUM AP HDG DATUM
pos’n 1: HDG pos’n 1: HDG
pos’n 2: GPSS pos’n 2: GPSS

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.3.2 Existing Placards
If an existing placard must be relocated because of the installation of the GDU 620, the new placard must
meet the requirements below:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard which it is replacing
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard which it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same)
2.5.4 Power Distribution
Circuit protection devices for the G600 LRUs must be push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers (e.g.
Klixon 7274 or 7277 Series circuit breakers).
For a single GDU 620 installation, the G600 equipment (GDU 620 display, GRS 77 AHRS and GDC 74A
air data computer) must be connected to a bus that receives power as soon as the battery master switch is
turned on. All G600 equipment must be connected to the same bus. If an electric standby ADI is used it
must also be connected to this bus (except in aircraft with multiple “essential” buses). If the aircraft has
multiple power buses, the G600 equipment and Standby ADI should be connected to the “essential” bus.
If there is more than one “essential” bus, the Standby ADI should be connected to a different “essential”
bus than the G600 equipment.
CAUTION
If there is a separate avionics power bus the G600 equipment and Standby ADI must
NOT be connected to this bus.
For a dual GDU 620 installation, the primary system (No. 1 GDU 620 display, No. 1 GRS 77 AHRS and
No. 1 GDC 74A air data computer) and electric Standby ADI must be connected as described for a single
GDU 620 installation. The secondary system (no. 2 GDU 620 display, no. 2 GRS 77 AHRS and no. 2
GDC 74A air data computer) may be connected to a “non-essential” bus or the avionics bus.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.5 Pitot-Static Plumbing
For a single GDU 620 installation, the pitot-static connections that originally went to the pilot's
instruments must go to the GDC 74A and standby instruments.
For a dual GDU 620 installation, the pitot-static connections that originally went to the pilot's instruments
must go to the GDC 74A that is connected to the pilot's GDU (i.e. ADC 1). The pitot-static connections
that originally went to the copilot's instruments must go to the GDC 74A that is connected to the copilot's
GDU (i.e. ADC 2). The standby instruments are installed near the pilot's GDU, so the pitot-static
connections that originally went to the pilot's instruments must also go to the standby instruments (i.e. the
same pitot-static plumbing that goes to ADC 1).
2.5.6 External Annunciators
The GDU 620 provides all of the necessary external annunciations for the GNS 400W/500W Series units
and the GNS 480, eliminating the need for an external annunciator panel. The GDU 620 also provides all
of the required TAWS annunciations for the 500W TAWS Series units and eliminates the need for a
TAWS annunciator panel.
2.5.7 External Course Deviation Indicators
The GDU 620 PFD is capable of displaying the lateral and vertical deviation from the GPS source(s) and
navigation receiver(s) in the aircraft. Based on the G600 System Safety Assessment, the G600 system
can be used as the sole display for all CDI information for Class I, Class II and Class III aircraft, allowing
the existing CDIs to be removed.
It is not recommended to use external CDIs in conjunction with the G600 system. If it is desired to utilize
one or more external CDIs, the CDI(s) can only be used to display VOR/ILS information. These must
be installed as specified below:
GNS 430W/530W: The VOR/ILS Indicator Output or VOR/LOC composite output (and ILS
Glideslope deviations/flags) from P4006/P5006 must be used to drive an external CDI. Both
VOR and ILS information will be available (a resolver type indicator such as the Garmin GI
106A, or a composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI 209 are supported).
GNS 480: The Composite output from P7 must be used to drive an external CDI. Only VOR and
Localizer information can be displayed on the CDI. No vertical deviation information can be
displayed (a VOR/LOC composite indicator such as the Bendix/King KI 208 is supported).
SL30: The Composite output and Glideslope deviations/flags must be used to drive an external
CDI. Both VOR and ILS information will be available (a VOR/ILS composite indicator such as
the Bendix/King KI 209 is supported).
Refer to Section 7 for associated Limitations.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.8 External Sensors
External serial data sources intended for use with the G600 system should be checked for compatibility
before installation. The list of supported devices is located in Appendix E of this manual.
When the G600 system is installed with external sensors, these sensors must be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's data. Installation of any external sensors not approved by this manual is beyond the
scope of this manual and STC.
2.5.8.1 GPS Navigator
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GPS navigator is required for proper system operation. GPS information is
used by the GDU 620 for the moving map and forwarded to the GRS 77 AHRS. The GDU 620 supports
interfacing to two independent GPS navigators, although only one is required.
If a 500W Series with TAWS is used, it must be connected as GPS 1 – only TAWS annunciations from
GPS 1 are displayed on the PFD. If two TAWS-equipped units are installed, the TAWS-equipped unit
that is connected to the audio panel must be connected as GPS 1.
2.5.8.2 Navigation Receiver
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a navigation receiver allows VOR and ILS information to be displayed on the
PFD HSI. The GDU 620 supports interfacing to two independent navigation receivers.
2.5.8.3 Weather
2.5.8.3.1 Data Link Weather
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a GDL 69/69A allows XM weather data to be displayed on a dedicated
weather page or overlaid on the moving map.
2.5.8.3.2 Weather Radar (function not currently supported)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an external weather radar system will allow weather radar information to be
displayed the GDU 620. Although the function is not currently supported, provisional wiring can be
installed at the time of G600 system installation.
2.5.8.4 Traffic
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a TIS/TAS traffic system allows traffic data to be displayed on a dedicated
traffic page or overlaid on the moving map. The GDU 620 can be configured to provide display of traffic
data only, or display and control of the traffic system.
NOTE
If the original installation has the traffic system configured to use a heading source other
than ARINC 429 (e.g. synchro), the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured to
use ARINC 429 heading from the G600 system.
NOTE
If the original installation has the traffic system configured to use an altitude source other
than ARINC 429 (e.g. Gray Code), the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured
to use ARINC 429 altitude from the G600 system.
NOTE
Only one traffic sensor may be interfaced to the G600 system (GDU 620).

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.8.5 ADF
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an ADF receiver allows ADF bearing information to be displayed on a
bearing pointer on the PFD HSI and allows the existing ADF indicator to be removed.
The GDU 620/G600 will not control the ADF receiver.
2.5.8.6 Stormscope (function not currently supported)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to a Stormscope system will allow Stormscope information to be displayed the
GDU 620. The GDU 620 can be configured to provide display of Stormscope data only, or display and
control of the Stormscope system. Although the function is not currently supported, provisional wiring
can be installed at the time of G600 system installation.
NOTE
If the original installation has the Stormscope system configured to use a heading source
other than serial, the traffic system must be rewired and reconfigured to use RS-232
heading from the G600 system.
2.5.8.7 External TAWS (function not currently supported)
Interfacing the GDU 620 to an external TAWS system will allow TAWS information to be displayed the
GDU 620.
NOTE
The GDU 620 will not display terrain data from an external source; however, if a 500W
Series unit with TAWS is connected, the GDU 620 will display all of the required TAWS
annunciations from GPS 1 and eliminate the need for a separate TAWS annunciator
panel.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.9 Autopilot/Flight Director Interface
The G600 is designed to interface with a wide variety of autopilots. Autopilots intended for use with the
G600 system should be checked for compatibility before installation. The list of tested and supported
autopilots is located in Section E.3 of this manual.
When the G600 system is interfaced to an autopilot, the autopilot must be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's data. Installation of the autopilot system is beyond the scope of this manual and STC.
The G600 (GDU 620) can provide AC or DC heading and course datum (error) outputs based on the
setting of the heading bug and course pointer on the HSI. When enabled, the GDU can drive the heading
datum output based upon GPS steering (GPSS) information from the selected navigator, acting like a roll-
steering converter. An external HDG/GPSS switch is required to utilize the roll-steering conversion
feature (refer to Section 2.5.16). The GDU 620 also provides analog deviation outputs and associated
flags based upon the navigation source currently selected on the HSI and outputs ARINC 429 GPSS
information from the currently selected navigator.
2.5.9.1 Autopilot ADIs and Gyros
ADIs that interface with the existing autopilot on the aircraft will have to be relocated if located in the
installation location for the GDU 620. Because this instrument is supplying attitude information to the
autopilot, the ADI must be retained. It can be used as a standby instrument and be relocated to an
approved location for the standby instruments (refer to Section 2.5.11.2). Alternately, this ADI may be
relocated to the copilot’s side. If the ADI is relocated to the copilot’s side and it is desired to display
flight director information on it, this ADI must be installed in the approved location for the copilot ADI
(refer to Section 2.5.11.8). If the ADI used by the autopilot is an electric-driven gyro, in order to meet the
requirements of 2.5.11.2, the electric ADI should be relocated to the copilot’s side. A vacuum-driven or
suitable electric ADI (refer to Section 2.5.11.2.4.1) must then be installed as a standby instrument on the
pilot’s side. Any gyros that are required for proper operation of the ADI (e.g. for a KCI 310 ADI) must
also be retained. Remote gyros, such as the KVG 350, must be retained in order for the autopilot to
function properly.
2.5.9.2 Autopilot Turn Coordinators
Instrument panel mounted Turn Coordinators that interface with the existing autopilot on the aircraft will
have to be retained and might have to be relocated. Due to space constraints it may be necessary to blind
mount the turn coordinator. The installer must ensure that the relocated Turn Coordinator is installed in
accordance to its installation manual for panel incline and other applicable requirements.
2.5.9.3 Altitude Pre-Selector and Remote Annunciators
The G600 may provide the altitude pre-selector function to an autopilot (For Interface requirements and
approved autopilot models for this function see Section E.3). If the G600 is configured to provide the
altitude pre-selector functions, the original altitude pre-selector must be removed. Autopilots that use
altitude pre-selectors that also function as a remote annunciator for the autopilot are not supported in the
G600 AML STC. Remote annunciators must not be removed, and if relocated must meet manufacturer
requirements for installation.
2.5.9.4 ADIs with Integral Flight Director Presentation
In some cases an ADI that must be retained to provide attitude information to the autopilot has an integral
flight director presentation (e.g. the KI 256 ADI). If this ADI is used as a standby instrument for the
G600, the flight director presentation must be disabled. If this ADI is relocated to the copilot’s side, the
flight director presentation may be left enabled provided that the location requirements in Section 2.5.11.8
are met.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.10 Part 121/Part 135 Considerations
For certain aircraft operated under Part 121 or Part 135, a third attitude source is required. Aircraft
requiring the third attitude source are described in 14 CFR § 121.2 and 14 § CFR 135.2. This third
attitude source may be a second gyroscopic attitude indicator or a second G600 system, and it must meet
the requirements of 14 CFR § 121.305(k).
Single-engine aircraft operated under Part 121 or Part 135 must have two independent electrical sources
or a standby battery or generator/alternator capable of supplying 150% of the electrical loads of all
required instruments and equipment necessary for emergency operations of the aircraft for 60 minutes in
accordance with 135.163(f). For multi-engine aircraft operated under Part 121 or Part 135 the electrical
load of all required instruments and equipment necessary for emergency operations must not be greater
then one-half of the total generated power in accordance with 135.163(g). The definition of the electrical
loads that are “required instruments and equipment necessary for emergency operations” should be
expanded to include the pilot’s GDU 620, GRS 77, and GDC 74A.
2.5.11 Mounting Considerations
2.5.11.1 GDU 620 Location and Mounting
The GDU 620 is designed to mount on the aircraft instrument panel in place of the existing primary
instruments. The location must be such that the GDU 620 is not blocked by the glare shield on top, or by
the control yoke on the bottom.
The FAA has determined that the acceptable installation location for the GDU 620’s ADI shall not
dramatically differ from the location of the original type certificated (TC’d) ADI. Consequently, the
GDU 620’s ADI, when installed, must intersect the original TC’d ADI.
The GDU 620 ADI area is defined as the top section of the left screen (PFD), as shown in Figure 2-1.
4.00 Inches
20 20
200
40
10 10 100
30 2.625 Inches
20
00
20
10 10 -100
-200
060
O
6
3 E 2
1
N
12
GPS
33
15
1
30
W 21
24
2
Figure 2-1. GDU 620 ADI Location

The original TC’d ADI area is defined as the area inside the outer perimeter of the instrument bezel, as
shown in Figure 2-2.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 2-2. Original ADI Area
When installed, the GDU 620’s ADI area must intersect the original TC’d ADI installation location, as
shown in the example in Figure 2-3.
20 2
40
10 1
30
Clock
10 10
Vac
060
O
6
3 E 2
1
N
12
20
GPS
200 40
33
15
Fuel Qty 180

1 60
30
W 21 160
24
2
80
140
120 100
Elec Current
Tachometer
Figure 2-3. GDU 620 ADI Location Requirement

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Some installations of the GDU 620 will require the use of one of the GDU 620 trim plates provided with
the GDU 620 installation kit. The trim plates are manufactured plates which can be used for cosmetic
appeasement or structural support. Refer to Section 3.2.1 for additional information on the use of the trim
plate. Due to the extent of the modifications required for some installations, it may be easier to replace the
instrument panel entirely. Refer to Section 2.5.11.3 for a list of items to consider when deciding whether
or not to replace the instrument panel.
2.5.11.2 Standby Instrument Location
The FAA has determined that the acceptable location of the standby instruments is directly adjacent to the
GDU 620 (to the right, to the left, below, diagonal, or above). In cases in which the instrument panel is
stepped, 3 1/8 inch standby instruments may be located on the stepped part of the instrument panel as
long as there are no instruments located in between the GDU 620 and the standby instrument. Standby
instruments must be located entirely within the area defined in Sections 2.5.11.2.1, 2.5.11.2.2 or
2.5.11.2.3.
If the standby instruments are arranged vertically, the preferred order is:
• Attitude Indicator (top)
• Airspeed Indicator
• Altimeter (bottom)
If it is not possible to place the attitude indicator on top due to space constraints, an alternate arrangement
for vertically arranged instruments is:
• Airspeed Indicator (top)
• Attitude Indicator
• Altimeter (bottom)
If the standby instruments are arranged horizontally, the preferred order is:
• Airspeed Indicator (left), Attitude Indicator, Altimeter (right)
If it is not possible to arrange the standby instruments vertically or horizontally, as described above, any
order for standby instruments is acceptable, provided they are located entirely within the specified area.
In most cases the previously certified ADI, Airspeed Indicator and Altimeter can be used as standby
instruments. These instruments can be installed in pre-existing mounting locations for instruments that are
no longer required because their functions are replaced by the G600 system (e.g. VORs, CDIs, ADF
bearing pointers, RMIs, etc.). If the previously certified ADI is electric powered, it must be replaced
with an ADI listed in E.1. All pneumatic ADIs are acceptable for standby instruments and do not require
replacement.
In some installations it may be desirable to locate one or more standby instruments in the bolster
immediately below the instrument panel. Refer to Section H.2 in Appendix H for information on how to
do this.
2.5.11.2.1 Acceptable Area for 3 1/8” Standby Instruments
If all three standby instruments are 3 1/8”, the instruments must be located entirely within the area
outlined in Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 2-4. Acceptable Installation Area for 3 1/8 Inch Standby Instruments
INSTRUMENT PANEL
FORWARD
GDU 620
STEPPED PANEL
SIDE VIEW
1
6.0"
STANDBY INSTRUMENT
NOTES:
1. ONLY 3.125" STANDBY INSTRUMENTS MAY BE MOUNTED ON STEPPED PORTION
OF INSTRUMENT PANEL.
Figure 2-5. Side View Stepped Panel for 3 1/8 Inch Standby Instruments

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.11.2.2 Acceptable Area for 2 1/4” Standby Instruments
If all three standby instruments are 2 1/4”, the instruments must be located entirely within the area
outlined in Figure 2-6.
3"
4"
20
200 40
180
160
60 4"
80
140
120 100
ACCEPTABLE AREA FOR LOCATION OF STANDBY

INSTRUMENTS - STANDBY INSTRUMENTS MUST BE
CONTAINED ENTIRELY IN THIS AREA.
4" 4"
4"
Figure 2-6. Acceptable Installation Area for 2 ¼ Inch Standby Instruments

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.11.2.3 Utilizing Both 2 1/4” and 3 1/8” Standby Instruments
In some installations it may be desired to use 3 1/8” standby instruments, but there is insufficient space to
accommodate such an arrangement. Consequently, some 2 1/4” instruments may be used. If both 2 1/4”
and 3 1/8” standby instruments are used, the instruments must be located entirely within the area outlined
in Figure 2-7.
3"
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
ACCEPTABLE AREA FOR

LOCATION OF STANDBY
INSTRUMENTS - STANDBY
INSTRUMENTS MUST BE
CONTAINED ENTIRELY IN
THIS AREA.
6" 6"
6" 6"
6"
Figure 2-7. Acceptable Installation Area for Mixed Standby Instruments
2.5.11.2.4 Mid-Continent Instruments Standby Instruments

2.5.11.2.4.1 Electric ADI
The model 4300-4( ) (3 1/8 inch) and 4200-( ) (2 1/4 inch) are currently the only electric standby attitude
indicators that may be installed as standby attitude instruments under the G600 AML STC; all non-
electric attitude indicators are acceptable and do not need to be replaced. The 4300-4( ) with the internal
backup battery and the 4200-( ) with the required remote mounted MD420-Emergency Power Supply
have the ability to continue to operate in excess of 30 minutes (in accordance with FAR 23.1353(h)) in
the event aircraft electrical power is lost and have been tested to meet the reliability and environmental
conditions required by the G600 AML STC.
NOTE
The Mid-Continent model 4200-( ) (2 ¼ inch) ADI requires the use of the MD420
Emergency Power System, which must be mounted separately.
2.5.11.2.4.2 2 ¼ Inch Instruments

For G600 installations that require 2 1/4 inch standby instruments, an altimeter and airspeed indicator
may be purchased as a package with the 4200-( ) ADI from Mid-Continent Instruments. Refer to
Appendix E for acceptable model numbers. Contact Mid-Continent Instruments for ordering instructions
to obtain an airspeed indicator with markings applicable to aircraft.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.11.2.4.3 Mid-Continent Contact Information
For ordering information contact:
MID-CONTINENT INST. CO., INC
9400 E 34th Street N, Wichita, KS 67226 USA
Phone: 316-630-0101
Fax: 316-630-0723
www.mcico.com
This information was current at the time of publication.
2.5.11.3 New Instrument Panel Considerations
Some installations may require deviations from the original layout that will result in a substantial amount
of panel modifications, e.g. moving the standby instruments by one-half inch in any direction would
require modification of the original cutouts and therefore modification of the original panel may not be
adequate due to cosmetic and structural issues. In such cases, a blank panel is preferred and may be
manufactured.
NOTE
Blank instrument panels may be manufactured for any aircraft on the Approved Model
List. These panels shall not be part of the primary structure of the aircraft.
A new panel, whether newly manufactured or purchased from the aircraft manufacturer, must comply
with the following requirements:
• Material shall be the same thickness and type as the original instrument panel (with a minimum
thickness of 0.063”).
• Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets…) appropriate to the material thickness and
hardness type – refer to AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 4, Section 4 (Metal Repair Procedures).
• Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine …).
• The original mounting locations, shape, form, and/or bends shall not be modified from the
original design.
• Bends in the material must conform to the minimum bend specification of the material used.
• OEM processes may allow for tighter bends (e.g. a ‘soft’ material is formed then heat treated to
increase hardness).
• Panels shall not be combined (i.e. an original two-piece panel cannot be combined to create a
single-piece panel). Likewise, panels shall not be split (e.g. creating a two-piece panel from a
single-piece panel).
NOTE
Instrument panels are often more than a single piece of aluminum: they are an assembly
with other brackets and components permanently or semi-permanently attached to the
main panel. For example, angles may have been riveted to create attach points for other
pieces of equipment (such as the radio rack) or they may be used to resist bending of the
panel due to weight and center of gravity of the instruments; brackets or channels may
exist to create additional attach points to the aircraft. The new instrument panel must not
alter the design of the instrument panel assembly features from the original design. These
features must be duplicated in the new panel structure.
NOTE
The only intended differences between the new instrument panel assembly and the old
are the cutout for the GDU 620 display unit and the location of the standby instruments.
Every other feature of the panel, including aspects of the structure invisible to the pilot,
must be duplicated. Modification of the instrument panel that will not comply with these
requirements is not approved under this STC.
Rev. B 190-00601-06
The GDU 620 must intersect the original certified ADI as specified in the GDU 620 location and
mounting (see Section 2.5.11.1). Since there is some freedom on the position of the GDU 620 in such a
case, it is preferred to have the GDU 620 PFD as close to top center as possible without compromising
the area required for the standby instruments or other indicators. Also, review the requirements for the
standby instruments prior to finalizing their location. Whenever manufacturing a new panel, verify that
all requirements in the following sections are met to ensure proper installation:
• GDU 620 Location, Section 2.5.11.1
• Standby Instrument Location, Section 2.5.11.2
When fabricating a new instrument panel, movement or consolidation of additional instruments or engine
gauges may be needed in order to achieve the desired panel layout. However, this is beyond the scope of
the G600 STC and will require additional aircraft manufacturer’s data or FAA approval.
When fabricating a new instrument panel, lighting for existing items that are retained must be considered.
However, this is beyond the scope of the G600 STC and will require additional aircraft manufacturer’s
data or FAA approval.
Compound curves and tooled bends formed into the instrument panel may not be easily replicated in the
field. The installer should consider contacting the aircraft manufacturer for a panel blank or modifying
the existing panel with a flat plate overlay conforming to the guidelines of this installation manual. Any
overlay should be secured to the original panel as if it were a structural repair in accordance with AC
43.13-1B, Chapter 4 Section 4.
2.5.11.4 GRS 77 Location and Mounting
The GRS 77 includes extremely sensitive inertial measurement sensors. It must be mounted rigidly to the
aircraft primary structure. Do not use shock mounting. Shock mounts used for other types of inertial
systems are not acceptable for the GRS 77 AHRS. The mounting system must have no resonance with the
unit installed that would amplify the aircraft natural levels. Vibrations may result in degraded accuracy.
The installation vibration levels are checked using the Engine Run-Up Vibration Test in Section 5.6.5.
Some metal structures of the GRS 77 may become magnetized if closely exposed to permanent magnets.
While this will not affect the GRS 77 itself, it may slightly affect nearby magnetic instruments in the
aircraft (e.g. whiskey compass). Ordinary use of magnetic screwdrivers to tighten the GRS 77 fasteners
will not cause problems, but non-magnetic screwdrivers are preferred. Avoid placing the GRS 77 within
one inch of magnetically mounted antennas, speaker magnets, or other strongly magnetic items. The
GRS 77 must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g. accessible through an access panel.
Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
Under baggage compartments or under the cockpit floor may be good mounting locations providing the
floor attachments meet the strength requirements. Avoid unprotected areas on or near the main cabin,
where the GRS 77 may be kicked or damaged by people or baggage placed in the aircraft. The GRS 77
must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g. accessible through an access panel).
Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
The GRS 77 must be mounted within 13 feet (4.0 meters) longitudinally and 6.5 feet (2.0 meters) laterally
of the aircraft center of gravity. The mounting location for the GRS 77 should be protected from rapid
thermal transients, in particular, large heat loads from nearby high-power equipment.
The GRS 77 must be leveled to within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference. The aircraft leveling procedure
described in Section 5.6.1 must be carried out prior to flight.
The GRS 77’s forward direction must be aligned in heading to within 1.0° of the aircraft forward
direction. (The arrow symbol on the rack points forward.)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.11.5 GMU 44 Location and Mounting
The GMU 44 is an extremely sensitive three-axis magnetic sensor. It is more sensitive to nearby magnetic
disturbances than a flux gate magnetometer. For this reason, when choosing a mounting location for the
GMU 44, it is recommended that the minimum distances specified in Table 2-5 be observed. In the event
that all of the minimum distances cannot be observed, Table 2-5 also specifies magnetic disturbances to
avoid in order of priority. The chosen location must be surveyed prior to installation of the GMU 44
to verify its acceptability (refer to Section 3.2.4.3). Section 6.1 provides guidance on troubleshooting the
GMU 44 magnetometer location. Acceptable locations are shown in Figure 2-8.
NOTE
If mounting the GMU 44 in the location used by an existing flux valve or flux gate, the
Magnetic Interference Survey (Section 3.2.4.3) MUST STILL BE SUCCESSFULLY
COMPLETED. Although the location may have been satisfactory for a flux valve or flux
gate, it may not be acceptable for the GMU 44.
NOTE
If planning to reuse the existing flux valve or flux gate wiring for the GMU 44, it must be
verified that the existing wiring meets the requirements specified for the GMU 44 (i.e.
same number of shielded conductors, minimum wire AWG, equivalent wire type, etc.). In
many cases the existing wiring will have to be replaced.
Table 2-5. Magnetic Disturbances

Recommended Min
Disturbance Source Priority Distance
Electric motors and relays, including servo motors 1 10 feet (3.0 meters)
Ferromagnetic structure greater than 1 kg total (iron, steel, or 2 8.2 feet (2.5 meters)
cobalt materials, especially landing gear structure)
Ferromagnetic materials less than 1 kg total, such as control 3 3 feet (1.0 meter)
cables
Any electrical device drawing more than 100 mA current 4 3 feet (1.0 meter)
Electrical conductors passing more than 100 mA current (may 5 3 feet (1.0 meter)
require to be twisted shielded pair if within close proximity to
GMU 44)
Electrical devices drawing less than 100 mA current 6 2 feet (0.6 meter)
Magnetic measuring device (e.g. installed flux gates, even if not 7 2 feet (0.6 meter)
powered)
Electrical conductors passing less than 100 mA current (May 8 1.3 feet (0.4 meter)
require to be twisted shielded pair if within close proximity to
GMU 44)
Ensure that any electrical conductor that comes within close proximity (approximately three feet) of the
GMU 44 is installed as a twisted shielded pair, not a single-wire conductor (if possible, the shield should
be grounded at both ends).
Use nonmagnetic materials to mount the GMU 44, and replace any magnetic fasteners within 20 inches
with nonmagnetic equivalents (e.g. replace zinc-plated steel screws used to mount wing covers or
wingtips with nonmagnetic stainless steel screws.)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
In general, wing mounting of the GMU 44 magnetometer is strongly preferred. If wing mounting is not
possible, it may be necessary to install the GMU 44 in the tail section of the aircraft. Fuselage mounting is
permitted, but NOT within two feet of the cabin area because of numerous potential disturbances that can
interfere with accurate operation. Refer to Figure 2-7. If the GMU 44 is mounted within the fuselage, a
structural validation of the GMU 44 mount is required, as described in Section 3.3.
The GMU 44 must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g. accessible through an access
panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is acceptable.
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
WING MOUNTING
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
FUSELAGE MOUNTING
(A STRUCTURAL VALIDATION OF THE GMU 44
MOUNTING IS REQUIRED IF GMU 44 IS
INSTALLED WITHIN THE FUSELAGE.)
2 FT MIN.
(GMU 44 MUST NOT BE CLOSER
THAN 2 FEET TO CABIN)
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
WING MOUNTING
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER
VERTICAL STABILIZER MOUNTING
2 FT MIN.
(GMU 44 MUST NOT BE CLOSER
THAN 2 FEET TO CABIN)
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER FUSELAGE MOUNTING
(A STRUCTURAL VALIDATION OF GMU 44
MOUNT IS REQUIRED IF GMU 44 IS
INSTALLED WITHIN THE FUSELAGE.)
Figure 2-8. Acceptable Locations for GMU 44 Magnetometer

190-00601-06 Rev. B
The GMU 44 must be leveled to within 3.0° of the aircraft level reference in pitch and roll, as shown in
Figure 2-9.
GMU 44
+/-3° MAXIMUM
Figure 2-9. Level Mounting of GMU 44 Magnetometer

The GMU 44’s forward direction should be within 0.5° in heading of the aircraft forward direction
(longitudinal axis). If it is not possible to guarantee this accuracy, installation alignment to within 2.5° is
acceptable in combination with the Post Installation Heading Compensation procedure described in
Section 5.6.4. It is strongly preferred that the GMU 44 alignment is as aligned as close as possible to the
aircraft longitudinal axis. Refer to Figure 2-10.
GMU 44
ALIGNMENT AIRCRAFT
HEADING
± 2.5° MAX.
± 0.5° PREFERRED
Figure 2-10. Heading Offset Limit GMU 44 Magnetometer

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.11.5.1 Considerations for Wing Grounded Light Fixtures
The following installation practices are recommended when installing the GMU 44 in the wing.
1. The wing tip lights should not have a power ground referenced to the chassis of the light
assembly that would then be referenced back to the airframe ground via the light assembly
mounting.
2. A dedicated power ground should be used and returned as a twisted pair with the power source
back into the fuselage for a wing mounted GMU 44.
These installation practices will prevent magnetically interfering currents from flowing in the wing skin
that encloses the GMU 44. Electrically isolating the light assembly should not be used as an alternative to
item 1 above, unless the isolated light assembly has been analyzed for adequate protection against direct
effects of lightning.
2.5.11.6 GDC 74A Location and Mounting
The GDC 74A can be installed in any section of the aircraft’s fuselage or the forward equipment bay for
multi-engine aircraft. The GDC 74A must be mounted in a serviceable location in the aircraft (e.g.
accessible through an access panel). Installation in an unpressurized area of a pressurized aircraft is
acceptable. It is recommended to install the GDC 74A as close to the pitot static lines as possible to avoid
running long pitot static lines throughout the aircraft fuselage.
The GDC 74A can be oriented in any position from horizontal to 45° past vertical. Figure C-7 and
Figure C-8 show the acceptable range of GDC 74A mounting orientation.
The GDC 74A has two ports that are connected to the aircraft’s pitot pressure source and static pressure
source. The two ports are labeled on the unit (refer to Figure 2-11). The pressure ports have 1/8-27 ANPT
female threads. The mating fitting must have 1/8-27 ANPT male threads.
PITOT AIR PORT
STATIC AIR PORT
Figure 2-11. GDC 74A Air Hose Fitting Locations
Use appropriate air hoses and fittings to connect the pitot and static lines to the unit. Avoid sharp bends
and routing near aircraft control cables. The GDC 74A should not be at the low point of the pitot or static
plumbing lines, to avoid moisture or debris collecting at or near the unit. Ensure that no deformations of
the airframe surface have been made that would affect the relationship between static air pressure and true
ambient static air pressure for any flight condition. Refer to Part 43, Appendix E for approved practices
while installing hoses and connections.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.11.7 GTP 59 Location and Mounting
In general, the GTP 59 may be mounted on any location on the aircraft skin as long as it is kept away
from heat sources, e.g. exhaust, engine cowlings, etc. The GTP 59 is designed to protrude through the
aircraft skin. Refer to Figure 2-12 and Figure 2-13 for acceptable locations for the GTP 59 temperature
probe.
The GTP 59 OAT probe has no icing protection. If ice accumulates on the GTP 59 OAT probe, its
accuracy is unknown. Consequently, air temperature measurements may be incorrect if ice accumulates
on the probe. Furthermore, computations dependent upon air temperature measurements may be affected
(e.g. true airspeed and delta-ISA)
It is recommended that the GTP 59 be mounted on the bottom of the wing near an access panel.
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT PROBE

INSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM
UNDERNEATH WING OR FUSELAGE
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT PROBE

ON ENGINE COWLING
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION ACCEPTABLE LOCATION

GTP 59 OAT PROBE GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF TAIL ON SIDEWALL OF FUSELAGE
OUTSIDE OF EXHAUST STREAM (NOT ON ENGINE COWLING)
ABOVE EXHAUST STREAM
DO NOT MOUNT GTP 59 OAT

EXHAUST PROBE ON ENGINE COWLING
DO NOT INSTALL
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF FUSELAGE
Figure 2-12. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe – Single Engine Aircraft

Rev. B 190-00601-06
EXHAUST STREAM
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
UNDERSIDE OF WING
OUTSIDE EXHAUST STREAM
DO NOT MOUNT
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
SIDEWALL OF FUSELAGE
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
ACCEPTABLE LOCATION ON FUSELAGE BENEATH THE
GTP 59 OAT PROBE HORIZONTAL STABILIZER
UNDERSIDE OF WING
DO NOT MOUNT
GTP 59 OAT PROBE
EXHAUST STREAM
Figure 2-13. Acceptable Locations for GTP 59 Temperature Probe – Twin Engine Aircraft

190-00601-06 Rev. B
2.5.11.8 Copilot ADI with Flight Director – Location
In some installations it may be desired to install an ADI with a flight director on the copilot’s side (e.g. an
ADI with a flight director that must be retained to for proper autopilot operation, such as the KI 256, is
being relocated to the copilot’s side). If it is desired to relocate this ADI to the copilot’s side and retain
the flight director presentation, this ADI must intersect the copilot’s primary view centerline as shown in
Figure 2-13A.
Copilot's Instrument Panel Glareshield
The ADI must

intersect the
Primary View
Centerline.
Primary View Centerline 1

NOTES:
1. DETERMINE THE COPILOT’S PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE AS FOLLOWS:
- AN IMAGINARY LINE EXTENDED THROUGH THE CENTER OF THE COPILOT’S
SEAT AND PROJECTED ONTO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SHOULD BE USED AS
THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE
- IF THE CONTROL YOKE OR STICK IS OFFSET FROM THE CENTER OF THE
COPILOT’S SEAT, THE CENTER OF THE CONTROL YOKE OR STICK IN THE
NEUTRAL POSITION MAY BE USED AS THE PRIMARY VIEW CENTERLINE.
Figure 2-13A. Location of Copilot ADI with Flight Director Presentation
2.5.12 Cable and Wiring Considerations

Wiring should be installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11. When wire separation cannot be
achieved, the following issues should be addressed:
• The cable harness should not be located near flight control cables, high electrical capacity lines or
fuel lines
• The cable harness should be located in a protected area of the aircraft
• Do not route cable near high-energy sources

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2.5.12.1 HIRF Considerations
In order to meet the HIRF requirements the wiring must comply with the following:
• The length of wires between the G600 LRUs must not exceed 10.8 ft (3.3 m) unless otherwise
specified in Table 2-6.
• The length of shield drain connections at the G600 LRU connectors must not exceed 3.0”.
Table 2-6. Maximum Wire Lengths
From LRU To LRU Maximum Length
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GRS 77 AHRS 21.6 ft (6.6 m)
GDC 74A ADC GTP 59 Temperature Probe 32.5 ft (9.9 m)
GRS 77 AHRS GMU 44 Magnetometer 43.3 ft (13.2 m).
GRS 77 AHRS GDC 74A ADC 21.6 ft (6.6 m)
2.5.12.2 Pressurized Aircraft Considerations

In Pressurized Aircraft, wiring that penetrates the pressure vessel must be installed in accordance with the
Type Design of the aircraft. Any wires that penetrate the pressure bulkhead must use existing provisions
such as spare pins in the existing bulkhead connectors, or existing sealed wire thoroughfares in
accordance with the aircraft maintenance manual.
Substantiation for additional holes in the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this manual and would
require additional data from the aircraft manufacturer or other FAA approved data.
2.5.13 Cooling Requirements
The GDU 620 has two cooling fans integrated into the bottom of the chassis to supply forced-air cooling
to the unit. The mounting configuration should not restrict intake airflow into the fans at the bottom of the
display, or exhaust airflow from the ducts at the top of the display.
2.5.14 Magnetic Compass Recalibration
After reconfiguring the avionics in the cockpit panel recalibrate the compass and make the necessary
changes for noting correction data.
2.5.15 RVSM Considerations
Aircraft operating at or above RVSM published altitudes will not meet the RVSM requirements with the
G600 installation as outlined in this manual. RVSM compliance may be a future enhancement of the
G600 system.
2.5.16 GPSS (Roll Steering) Considerations
The G600 system can support autopilots using ARINC 429 GPSS, or act as a roll-steering converter by
providing analog GPSS information via its heading datum/error output.
2.5.16.1 ARINC 429 GPSS
The G600 (GDU 620) has an ARINC 429 output that can be connected to autopilots that are capable of
utilizing ARINC 429 GPSS information. On the AUTOPILOT ARINC 429 output, the GDU 620
forwards GPSS information from the navigator (1 or 2) that is currently selected on the GDU 620 CDI –
there is no need to provide external switching. For installations with autopilots that accept 429 GPSS
(e.g. S-TEC 55X and Honeywell (Bendix-King) KFC 225) an external GPSS switch is NOT required.
2.5.16.2 G600 Roll Steering Converter Function
The GDU 620 can act as a roll-steering converter. It will receive the ARINC 429 GPSS information from
the selected navigator (1 or 2) and translate it to a heading error. The GPSS Enable In* discrete input
(P6201-8) may be used to control the GPS Steering (roll steering) function of the GDU 620. If GPSS

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Enable In* (P6201-8) is grounded, the GDU 620 heading datum (error) output will be driven based upon
ARINC 429 GPSS information. If this input is open, the GPSS function will be disabled and the heading
datum output will be based upon the setting of the heading bug.
For installations that utilize the GDU 620 as a roll-steering converter, an external GPSS switch is required
(refer to Figure F-19 in Appendix F). The autopilot must be in HDG mode to use the GDU 620 for
GPSS.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3 Installation Procedure
3.1 Special Tools Required
Laser Square
A laser square with a line accuracy of ± 3/32 inches end-to-end at 15 feet perpendicular distance (or
better) is optional, but recommended, for GMU 44 magnetometer installation. Stanley Laser Level
Square 77-188 S2 meets the line accuracy requirement.
Digital Level
A digital level is recommended for use when installing the GRS 77 AHRS and GMU 44
magnetometer.
Protractor Tool
A protractor tool is required to measure the angle offset during the magnetometer installation.
Plumb-bob
A plumb-bob is required for leveling and installing the magnetometer unit.
Aircraft Jack Set
A set of aircraft jacks is recommended for stabilizing the aircraft after it is leveled.
Crimp Tool
A crimp tool meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01 and a positioner/locator are required to
ensure consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. Refer to Table
3-5 for a list of recommended crimp tools.
Sight Compass
Although the use of compass rose is highly recommended, a sight compass may be used for the
GMU 44 magnetometer calibration procedures in Section 5.6 if a compass rose is not readily
available. Barfield Sight Compass SC063 (or equivalent) may be used for this purpose.
Tools Needed for Magnetic Interference Survey
Laptop or PC
A laptop or PC is required to run the magnetic interference survey software
(refer to Appendix G). This laptop or PC must meet the following minimum requirements:
Operating System Windows 2000 SP4, XP
Processor Speed 850 MHz
Hard Drive Free Memory 500 MB
RAM Memory 256 MB
Screen Resolution 1024 x 768
CD-ROM Drive
USB to RS-232 Converter Required only if the laptop or PC does not have a serial port.
DC Power Supply
A DC power supply capable of supplying 12VDC / 200 mA is required to perform the magnetic
interference survey (refer to Appendix G) prior to installing the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (not required in most cases)
A RS-485 to RS-232 converter may be required to perform the magnetic interference survey
(refer to Appendix G) prior to installing the GMU 44 Magnetometer. A suitable converter is
B&B Electronics Model 422LP9R (or equivalent).

190-00601-06 Rev. B
GMU 44 Location Survey Software P/N 006-A0240-00
GMU 44 Location Survey Software P/N 006-A0240-00 is required to perform the magnetic
interference survey (refer to Appendix G). This software can be downloaded under part
number 006-A0241-00 from the Dealers Only page on the Garmin website at
www.garmin.com.
Magnetic Interference Survey Test Cable
A test cable fabricated by the installer is required to perform the magnetic interference survey
(refer to Section G.2 in Appendix G for details on manufacturing this cable).
Stopwatch or Watch with a Second Hand
A stopwatch or watch with a second hand is required to measure the time for turning equipment
on and off during the survey test sequence.
3.2 Equipment Installation
Equipment dimensions and other physical characteristics can be found in Table 1-2 and Appendix C.
3.2.1 GDU 620 Display Location and Mounting
When installing the GDU 620 display the following steps must be performed:
• Select a general location for the GDU 620 cutout as specified in Section 3.2.1.1.
• Address any considerations specific to the installation as specified in Section 3.2.1.2.
• Remove instruments necessary to facilitate installation and temporarily install the GDU 620
cutout template. Refer to Section 3.2.1.3.
• Determine if the use of a trim plate is necessary for the installation. If necessary, determine
which type of trim plate is required. Refer to Section 3.2.1.4.
• Install the trim plate (if necessary). Refer to Section 3.2.1.5.
• Install the GDU 620. Refer to Section 3.2.1.6.
3.2.1.1 GDU 620 Display Location
Determine a suitable location for the GDU 620 (refer to Section 2.5.11.1 for placement information).
Example instrument panel layouts can be found in Section D.1.
In general, most six-pack instrument configurations usually consist of, but are not limited to, the primary
instruments - airspeed indicator, attitude indicator, altimeter, horizontal situation indicator
(HSI)/directional gyro (DG), vertical speed indicator, and turn coordinator. An ideal six-pack would have
the instruments configured so that they are aligned both vertically and horizontally with each other,
evenly spaced and adjacent to one another (Figure 3-1). Other six-pack instrument configurations consist
of the same primary instruments but with the instruments scattered and/or not aligned on the instrument
panel (Figure 3-2).

Rev. B 190-00601-06
20
200 40
180
AIRSPEED 60
160 VOR INDICATOR
CLOCK KNOTS 80
140
120 100
VAC
D.C
ELEC.
6
3 E 10
15
5 VERTICAL
N
FUEL QTY
12
SPEED
UP 20
VOR INDICATOR
33
0
15
TURN COORDINATOR DN
100 FEET 20
30
PER MIN
S
L R 5
21 15
10
W
2 MIN
24
ELEC CURRENT
TACHOMETER ADF
Figure 3-1. Example of an Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration
VOR INDICATOR
20
200 40
180
AIRSPEED 60
160
KNOTS 80
140
120 100
10
15
6 5 VERTICAL
3 E SPEED
UP 20
0 VOR INDICATOR
N
12
D.C.
ELEC.
DN
100 FEET 20
33
15
PER MIN
5
15
10
30
W 21
24
TURN COORDINATOR
L R
2 MIN
ADF INDICATOR
CLOCK
Figure 3-2. Example of a Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration

190-00601-06 Rev. B
For any instrument panel, installation of the GDU 620 is not limited to the use of cutouts for the primary
instruments. Any combination of the original cutouts for any instrument may be used as long as the
GDU 620 location satisfies the ADI intersect criteria (see Section 2.5.11.1). For example, in Figure 3-2
and Figure 3-3 , the VOR indicator cutouts are used in conjunction with the adjacent primary instruments
cut outs for the GDU 620 installation.
115-01009-XX
TRIM PLATE MAY BE
REQUIRED ON SOME
INSTALLATIONS
20
200 40
180
AIRSPEED 60
160
KNOTS 80
140
120 100
CLOCK
Figure 3-3. GDU 620 Installed, Non-Ideal Six-Pack Instrument Configuration

Using the airspeed and turn coordinator cutouts for the GDU 620 installation in this example would have
caused a challenging installation, both structurally and cosmetically.
3.2.1.2 Installation Considerations
Prior to any alteration, consideration should be given to the placement of the standby instruments (see
Section 2.5.11.2 for information regarding the location of standby instruments).
Installation of the GDU 620 requires an instrument panel with a minimum thickness of 0.063” to satisfy
structural requirements. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance for connectors and wire harness on the
GDU 620, as shown in Figure 3-4.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
7 IN.
MINIMUM
CLEARANCE
GDU 620
SIDE VIEW
Figure 3-4. GDU 620 Recommended Connector Clearance

3.2.1.3 Temporary Installation of Cutout Template
Remove all instruments required to facilitate the installation of the GDU 620. Temporarily fasten the
GDU 620 Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 on the instrument panel and transfer the GDU 620 LRU
outline using the outside edges of the cutout pattern. Also mark the location of the six GDU 620
mounting holes. Remove the template. See Appendix C for cutout template dimensions and reference
features.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.1.4 Trim Plate Considerations
A combination of nut plates and screws are used to secure the GDU 620 to the instrument panel. On most
aircraft installations with an ideal six-pack configuration, all six nut plates can be riveted to the
instrument panel itself. On other aircraft, due to pre-existing cut outs for the original instruments, lack of
material on the instrument panel may inhibit installation of nut plates to the instrument panel. Each
installation must be evaluated as follows:
1. If all nut plates can be installed to the instrument panel, use the thin trim plate P/N 115-01009-00.
2. If one or two nut plates cannot be installed on the instrument panel due to insufficient material:
a) It may be possible to install “patches” to the instrument panel. Refer to Appendix H for
information on determining whether or not it would be acceptable to use patches. If all six
nut plate locations can be accommodated with nut plates on the instrument panel or patches
(2 maximum), the thin trim plate P/N 115-01009-00 may be used. It is also acceptable to use
the thick trim plate P/N 115-01009-10 if it is not desired to use patches.
b) If (a) above cannot be met, the thick trim plate P/N 115-01009-10 must be used.
3. If three or more nut plates cannot be installed on the instrument panel due to insufficient material,
the thick trim plate P/N 115-01009-10 must be used.
NOTE
If all of the nut plates can be installed onto the instrument panel and no existing cutouts
are visible when the GDU 620 is installed, it is not necessary to install any trim plate.
3.2.1.5 Trim Plate Installation (if required)
NOTE
If installing nut plates onto the trim plate it may be necessary to cut out additional
material from the instrument panel in order to provide clearance for the attachment of the
nut plate to the trim plate.
After it is decided which trim plate is to be used (thin or thick), determine the size of the trim plate and
cut it to the required size and pattern. Refer to Appendix C for the dimensions of the trim plates that are
furnished with the G600 installation kit.
NOTE
Do not permanently install the trim plate to the instrument panel until the GDU 620
installation hardware (nutplates) has been installed on the instrument panel and/or on the
thick trim plate.
Determine locations of fasteners or rivets for securing the trim plate to the instrument panel and the GDU
620 nut plates in accordance with the requirements in Figure 3-5, Figure 3-6, and Figure 3-7.
NOTE
The thin (0.032”) trim plate can float on the instrument panel. Rivets or fasteners to
secure the thin trim plate P/N 115-01009-00 to the instrument panel are optional. The
installation of the GDU 620 will secure the trim plate in place.
If attaching the nut plates to the instrument panel, use the Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 as a guide
to drill out the holes for the nut plate position. Remove the Cutout Template and install the required nut
plates on the instrument panel and, if required, on the trim plate. Once all six of the GDU 620 nut plates
have been installed, permanently install the trim plate, if required.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
115-01009-00 TRIM PLATE
INSTRUMENT PANEL .032" THICK,
(THIN TRIM PLATE)
TO PREVENT AIR GAPS, LAY OUT THE TRIM

PLATE SO PARTIAL INSTRUMENT EDGE CUTOUTS
ON PANEL ARE HIDDEN BENEATH THE PLATE
INSTALL ALL NUTPLATES ON

THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
(FARSIDE)
EXISTING INSTRUMENT
PANEL CUTOUTS
FOR A THIN TRIM PLATE INSTALLATION:
-LOCATE AND INSTALL ALL NUTPLATES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SO
1) RIVET HEADS ARE FLUSH AND HIDDEN BY TRIM PLATE
2) NUTPLATE BODY DOES NOT INTERFERE WITH ADJACENT INSTRUMENT BODIES
3) NUTPLATE BODY DOES NOT LIE IN CUTOUT OPENING
4) ADEQUATE INSTRUMENT PANEL MATERIAL EXISTS.
-APPLY A FINISH COAT OF PAINT TO PLATE PRIOR TO FINAL INSTALL.
-TRIM PLATE OUTSIDE EDGE AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR ADJACENT INSTRUMENTS OR SWITCHES.
-FINISH CORNERS AT R.25" TYP.
Figure 3-5. Trim Plate Installation, Thin

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure 3-6. Trim Plate Installation, Thick

Rev. B 190-00601-06
> MIN. TO EDGE NUTPLATE INSTALLED
ON TO FARSIDE OF
> MIN. TO EDGE TRIM PLATE
3 RIVETS OR SCREWS
TO BE INSTALLED
WITHIN R1.25" OF
GDU620 FASTENER LOCATION
GDU620 FASTENER
HOLE LOCATION
> MIN. TO EDGE
> MIN. TO EDGE
CORRECT CORNER PLACEMENT DETAIL

OF MS20426AD4 RIVETS
OR #6-32 SCREWS
> MIN. TO EDGE

> MIN. TO EDGE
RIVET OR SCREW
LOCATIONS OF
TRIM PLATE TO PANEL
3 RIVETS OR SCREWS
TO BE INSTALLED
WITHIN R1.25" OF
GDU620 FASTENER LOCATION
GDU620 FASTENER
HOLE LOCATION
CORRECT SIDE PLACEMENT DETAIL

OR #6-32 SCREWS
CORRECT GUIDELINE TABLE:

HARDWARE DIMENSION A MIN. TO EDGE
RIVETS 0.75" ± 0.25 0.25"
SCREWS 0.75" +.25 / - .125 0.30"
Figure 3-7. Structural Trim Plate Installation, Correct Installation

190-00601-06 Rev. B
RIVET OR SCREW
LOCATIONS
TRIM PLATE
ERROR: < MIN. TO EDGE

A
ERROR: A > MAX.
EDGE OF
INSTRUMENT PANEL
ERROR: < MIN. TO EDGE NUTPLATE INSTALLED

ON TO TRIM PLATE
INCORRECT CORNER PLACEMENT

OR #6-32 SCREWS
EDGE OF TRIM
PLATE
RIVET OR SCREW
LOCATIONS
ERROR: A < MIN.
R 1.25
GDU620 FASTENER
HOLE LOCATION
INCORRECT SIDE PLACEMENT DETAIL

OR #6-32 SCREWS

RIVETS 0.75" ± 0.25 0.25"
SCREWS 0.75" +.25 / - .125 0.30"
Figure 3-8. Structural Trim Plate Installation, Incorrect Installation

Rev. B 190-00601-06
NUTPLATE INSTALLED
ON TO FARSIDE OF
TRIM PLATE
R 1.25
MODIFIED TRIM
PLATE EDGE
GDU620 FASTENER
HOLE LOCATION
> MIN.
NEIGHBORING
INSTRUMENT
> MIN.
ON PANEL
> MIN.
ACCEPTABLE MODIFICATIONS TO EDGE DETAIL

RIVETS 0.75" ± 0.25 0.25"
SCREWS 0.75" +.25 / - .125 0.30"
Figure 3-9. Acceptable Modifications to Edge Detail
3.2.1.6 GDU 620 Installation

Install the GDU 620 using six hex head screws P/N 211-64307-14 (or equivalent).

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.2 Standby Instruments Location and Mounting
Install the standby airspeed, altimeter and attitude indicator in the pre-existing mounting locations for
instruments no longer required, such as VORs, ADF bearing pointers, RMIs, CDIs, etc. If required, new
instrument cutouts may be made on the instrument panel and the stepped part of the instrument panel.
Existing cutouts may also be modified as required to fit the standby instruments (e.g. cutting a notch for
the altimeter baro-correction knob).
Example instrument panel layouts are shown in Figure 3-10, Figure 3-11, and Figure 3-12. Additional
examples can be found in Section D.1.
ORIGINAL INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION
MODIFIED INSTRUMENT PANEL CONFIGURATION
Figure 3-10. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments To the Right and Diagonal

Rev. B 190-00601-06
NOTE
Due to the distance from the desired location of a standby instrument on the stepped
panel to the GDU 620 and the standby instrument distance requirement from section
2.5.11.2, only 3 1/8” standby instruments are permitted to be installed on stepped panels.
S-TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
Clock 80
140
120 100
SANDEL SN3308
6 E
d.c.
3 elec.
N v 10
A
V
u
e
15
5
12
33 N
VERTICAL
SPEED
M UP 20
A
15 S
P
0
turn coordinator B
DN
100 FEET 20
30
R PER MIN
L R G 5
21 15
2 min 10
24 W no pitch
information
S
OB
shft sync a-b
Switches
Ignition Vent
S-TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Switches
Ignition Vent

Figure 3-11. Example of Installed GDU 620 - Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Panel

190-00601-06 Rev. B
In Figure 3-11 the instrument panel bolster was modified to accommodate two of the standby instruments.
Refer to Appendix H for details on modifying the bolster to accommodate standby instruments.
Some instrument panels may require additional modifications to address non-standard size instruments
(e.g. the KI 256 ADI). Refer to Appendix H for additional information.
Due to space constraints, some installations may require the use of 2 1/4 inch instruments for backup
instruments. Previously certified 2 1/4 inch instruments may be used as long as they are pneumatic. If
using an electric attitude indicator, the Mid-Continent 4200-( ) (2 1/4 inch display) electric attitude
indicator with the MD240-battery backup must be used. For airspeed and altitude indicators, Mid-
Continent provides a package of 2 1/4 inch instruments in combination with the specified attitude
indicator. For Mid-Continent ordering information see Section 2.5.11.2.4.3.
6 E
20 3
200 40
33 N
12
180
60
160
15
80
140
30
S
120 100 21
24 W
S
OB
HDG 060
d.c.
elec.
6 E 10
3 15
5 VERTICAL
SPEED
N
12
UP 20
0 Blank
33
15
turn coordinator DN 100 FEET 20

30
PER MIN
L R 21 5
W 15
2 min 10
24
VOR 1 VOR 2
no pitch ijav ooo ORD
information
1.2 NM
Clock
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Clock
Figure 3-12. Example of GDU 620 Installed with 2 1/4” Standby Instruments
Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.3 GRS 77 AHRS Location and Mounting
Considering the placement information contained in Section 2.5.11.4, determine a suitable location for the
GRS 77. The GRS 77 should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to
withstand additional inertial forces imposed by the GRS 77 unit and any related components. For
reference, the GRS 77 with Mounting Rack weighs 3.5 lbs and the addition of the GRS 77 Universal
Mount increases the weight to 4.55 lbs. Use of additional brackets or supplemental support structure will
also increase weight.
Table 3-1 provides an overview of possible GRS 77 mounting options for installation with and without
the GRS 77 Universal Mount. Each option references a subsequent section where further details and
considerations may be found. Furthermore, Section 3.2.3.1 identifies conditions that must be met for
every GRS 77 installation, regardless of use of the GRS 77 Universal Mount.
Table 3-1. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options with GRS 77 Universal Mount
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Typical)
Description:
The intent of the GRS 77 Universal
Mount is to allow minor adjustments
in angle of the AHRS installation FORWARD
relative to the mounting surface in

the aircraft. In some cases, the
universal mount can be attached
directly to existing structure in the
aircraft, where only the mounting
holes need to be added to structure.
Reference Section 3.2.3.2.3
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Composite Aircraft)
Description: FORWARD
Some composite aircraft have a solid

fuselage structure that with a GRS 77
Universal Mount, will meet the
requirements for the GRS 77
installation. Modification of the
fuselage involves adding points of
attachment.
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Tube and Fabric Aircraft)
Description:
The GRS 77 Universal Mount can be
assembled with an installation plate FORWARD
to existing fuselage tube structure.

The installation plate provides a
stable platform for the Universal
Mount, which allows the assembly to
be corrected for the aircraft level
reference.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Points from Previously-Installed Equipment
Description:
If the aircraft has a Bendix/King
KG 102/102A gyro, a Mid Continent
4305-128 gyro, Mid Continent 4305-
150 gyro or a Cirrus 14357-001 gyro
currently installed, and it is being
removed for this installation, the
location may provide an adequate
mounting location for the GRS 77
AHRS. The GRS 77 Universal Mount USE FOR MID-CONTINENT 4305-128 OR 4305-150 USE FOR BENDIX KING KG 102 / 102A
will allow for installation to an USE FOR CIRRUS 14357-001
existing hole pattern for the KG

102/102A
Table 3-2. Overview of Possible GRS 77 Mounting Options without GRS 77 Universal Mount
Mounting Bracket – Attachment to Stringers or Longerons
Description:
FORWARD
Closely spaced stringers or longerons extending
fore/aft along the bottom of the fuselage may provide
adequate structure to support a mounting bracket.
Look for an area that will provide ample space
forward of the GRS 77 for the connector and wire
harness. Additionally, ensure that the location is not
shared by equipment capable of inducing vibration in
the structure which can be transmitted back to the
GRS 77, such as a location near the engine or landing
gear.
Modify Existing Floor Panel or Add Mounting Surface to Attach GRS 77 Mounting Plate
Description:
A false floor may exist over airframe structure to
make room for avionics or baggage. If the false floor
surface is level and meets structural requirements, it
may provide an adequate surface for mounting the
GRS 77 directly.
Alternately, existing frame structure may provide a
level plane to which a plate may be attached for
mounting the GRS 77. An example would be multiple
frames with flanges at the same water line (WL).
FORWARD

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Plate, Angle Bracket Assembly – Attachment to Existing Frame and Bulkhead Structure
Description:
Angle brackets may be fabricated to attach to existing
frame and bulkhead structure, to which a plate may be
attached. Although multiple frames and bulkhead
structure may be available for the AHRS location,
they may not be at the same water line (WL). One or
more brackets may be needed to create a level plane.
The intent is to ensure the plate remains parallel to the
aircraft level reference and firmly supported across its
span.
3.2.3.1 Considerations for all GRS 77 Installations

In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GRS 77 the following conditions
shall be met:
1. If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached
to the aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2A Chapter 2 and
the following requirements:
a) Material shall be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum
b) Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
c) Material shall be a minimum of 0.063” for single-sheet aluminum. Aluminum honeycomb
core panels are also acceptable, and have no minimum thickness requirements.
d) Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness and
type.
2. Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through
strong structural members capable of supporting substantial loads. Avoid areas that are prone to
severe vibration (e.g., areas close to engine mounts and landing gear).
3. If a new mounting plate is fabricated for the GRS 77, the plate shall not span greater than 12” in
width or length without direct attachment to primary structure. If the mounting plate must span
more than 12”, stiffeners and/or flange reinforcements will be necessary to provide adequate
support.
4. Final installation shall be resistant to visual deflection during the validation of structures test per
Section 3.3.
5. Maintain a minimum of 3” between the forward edge of the mounting rack and any object to
ensure clearance for connector and wire harness.
6. For all installations, level and heading alignment of the GRS 77 will require the use of one of the
following:
a) GRS 77 Universal Mount P/N 011-01780-00,
b) Fabricated mounting equipment, e.g. brackets, shelves, mounting platform, etc., or
c) A combination of both.
For the installation of the GRS 77 level the aircraft in both the longitudinal and lateral axes. Refer to the
aircraft’s maintenance manual for leveling instructions. The aircraft should be placed on jacks while in a
level state to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non-level position when entering, exiting, or
working in the aircraft.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
If the intent is to use the GRS 77 Universal Mount, refer to details found in Section 3.2.3.2. If the intent is
to use or modify existing structure without the GRS 77 Universal Mount, refer to details found in Section
3.2.3.3.
3.2.3.2 Preparation for Installation with GRS 77 Universal Mount
3.2.3.2.1 GRS 77 Universal Mount Description
The GRS 77 Universal Mount P/N 011-01780-00 allows for aircraft level installation of the GRS 77
AHRS on mounting structures with inclines up to ±6° in 2° increments. Depending on the installation, the
Angle Brackets contained within the GRS 77 Universal Mount kit can be assembled and installed facing
in or out, as shown in Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14. The use of the GRS 77 Universal Mount is optional.
115-00922-00
BRACKET TOP AHRS UNIV
(PART OF 011-01780-00 KIT
GRS 77 UNIVERSAL MOUNT)
115-00909-00
ANGLE AHRS BRKT MOUNTING (2X)
(PART OF 011-01780-00 KIT
Figure 3-13. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Inward Facing Angle Brackets)
115-00922-00
(PART OF 011-01780-00
KIT GRS 77 UNIVERSAL MOUNT)
115-00909-00
ANGLE AHRS BRKT MOUNTING (2X)
(PART OF 011-01780-00 KIT
Figure 3-14. GRS 77 Universal Mount (Outward Facing Angle Brackets)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.3.2.2 Assembly of the Universal Mount
Cleco the pivot hole of the top bracket to the angle bracket on both sides as shown in Figure 3-15.
115-00922-00
BRACKET TOP
AHRS UNIV (REF)
CLECO PIVOT
HOLE BOTH
SIDES OF
6°
4°
BRACKET
2°
0°
CLECO SECOND PAIR OF HOLES

BOTH SIDES OF BRACKET TO SET
ANGLE SUCH THAT TOP BRACKET
IS LEVEL WITH AIRCRAFT LEVEL
115-00909-00
WITHIN 3°.
ANGLE AHRS BRKT
MOUNTING (REF)
Figure 3-15. GRS 77 Universal Mount Assembly
NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be determined by using a level meter such as
the PRO 360 or equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself
as reference for a more accurate installation.
Determine and set the incline offset required for level installation. Cleco the second pair of holes of the
top bracket to the angle bracket as shown in Figure 3-16. Drill hole-pattern from top bracket to angle
bracket (0.1285” diameter holes – #30 drill bit), 5 places each side.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
CLECO PIVOT
HOLE BOTH
SIDES OF
BRACKET
MATCH DRILL HOLE

PATTERN FROM TOP
BRACKET TO ANGLE
115-00922-00 BRACKET, TO Ø.128,
BRACKET TOP AHRS UNIV 5 PLACES EACH SIDE
(PART OF 011-01780-00
KIT GRS 77 UNIVERSAL
MOUNT) CLECO SECOND PAIR OF HOLES
BOTH SIDES OF BRACKET TO SET
115-00909-00 ANGLE SUCH THAT TOP BRACKET
ANGLE AHRS BRKT MOUNTING (2X) IS LEVEL WITH AIRCRAFT LEVEL.
(PART OF 011-01780-00
KIT GRS 77 UNIVERSAL MOUNT)
Figure 3-16. Hole-Pattern Configuration to Set Incline in Assembly for Aircraft Level
As shown in Figure 3-17, rivet top bracket to angled brackets with MS20470AD4-6 rivets (alternate
CR3213-4-4 blind rivets) and remove Clecos.
115-00922-00
(REF) MS20470AD4-6 RIVET
(ALTERNATE, CR3213-4-4
115-00909-00 CHERRYMAX RIVET)
ANGLE AHRS BRKT MOUNTING (5X EACH SIDE)
(2X REF)
Figure 3-17. Top Bracket to Angle Bracket Assembly
NOTE
If the GRS 77 Universal Mount has been assembled with the angle brackets facing in,
installing the GRS 77 mounting rack on the universal mount will prevent access to
tighten the universal mount screws to the mounting plate. It is recommended to install the
universal mount to the mounting plate before mounting the GRS 77 mounting rack on the
universal mount for this situation.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Install the GRS 77 Mounting Rack P/N 115-00459-00 to the GRS 77 Universal Mount using 5 AN525-
1032R8 Screws, as shown in Figure 3-18. The recommended torque is 20-25 inch lbs. Ensure correct
orientation of mounting rack on universal bracket (the arrow on the GRS 77 Mounting Rack must point
forward).
1 AN525-1032R8
SCREW (5X)
FORWARD
115-00459-00
GRS 77 MOUNTING RACK
115-00922-00
(REF)
115-00909-00
ANGLE AHRS BRKT MOUNTING
(2X REF) NOTES:
1. RECOMMENDED TORQUE 20-25 INCH-LBS.
Figure 3-18. Assembling GRS 77 Mounting Rack to GRS 77 Universal Mount
3.2.3.2.3 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Typical)
NOTE
Aircraft structures such as the firewall, bulkhead and support frames are usually
perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for determining the
relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.
Position the GRS 77 Universal Mount assembly on the mounting platform so that it is aligned to the
aircraft heading. Transfer the hole-pattern from the Angle Brackets to the mounting platform, 4 places
each side. Ensure that the arrow on the mounting rack is facing the forward direction.
Remove the GRS 77 Universal Mount assembly from the mounting platform and drill the marked hole-
pattern for #10 hardware (0.189” diameter holes – #12 drill bit) into the mounting platform. The preferred
method of assembly utilizes nutplates installed to the mounting platform: rivet nut plates (MS21059L3)
with MS20426AD3-X rivets to the mounting platform. Ensure that installed rivets are flush with the
installation panel. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads.
Install the GRS 77 Universal Mount to the mounting plate using AN525-1032R8 screws (8 total, 4 on
each side for the Universal Mount). See Figure 3-19. Alternate hardware includes other screws, bolts,
washers, nuts, and nutplates; these are noted in the table within Figure 3-19. The recommended torque is
20-25 inch lbs. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
NOTE
It is acceptable to install the Universal AHRS Mounting Bracket assembly to the aircraft
structure with four pieces of hardware (bolts or screws at opposite ends of each angle) as
long as the installation allows the GRS 77 AHRS to pass the Engine Run-up Vibration
Test outlined in Section 5.6.5. Use of eight fasteners is strongly recommended.
1 2
SCREW (8X)
FORWARD
115-00459-00
GRS 77 MOUNTING RACK
115-00922-00
BRACKET TOP
AHRS UNIV
3 INSTALLATION
PANEL
115-00909-00
ANGLE AHRS
BRKT MOUNTING
(2X)
NUTPLATE
RIVET (2X)
(8 REQ'D)
NOTES:
1. RECOMMENDED HARDWARE OPTIONS FOR ASSEMBLY:
HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS
SCREWS MS35207 (#10-32 LENGTH A/R); OR NAS603 (#10-32 LENGTH A/R)
BOLTS AN3-XA (#10-32, LENGTH A/R)
WASHERS AN960-10; AN960-10L; NAS1149F0332P; NUTPLATES (M)F5000-3; (M)K1000-3;
OR NAS1149F0363P (M)K2000-3; OR F2000-3
OR
NUTS AN364-1032A (MS21083N3); RIVETS MS20426AD3-X
OR MS21042L3

3. MINIMUM THICKNESS .063", UNLESS ALUMINUM HONEYCOMB CORE PANEL (NO
MINIMUM THICKNESS REQUIREMENT).
Figure 3-19. Installation of Universal Mount to Mounting Plate

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.3.2.4 Installation of the GRS 77 Universal Mount (Composite Aircraft)
CAUTION
This procedure only applies to secondary aircraft structures. It is not acceptable to use
this procedure for primary structure or structural load carrying members. This procedure
applies to honeycomb composite material used in areas such as false floors or avionics
shelves. After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5 for system configuration,
calibration and checkout.
NOTE
The GRS 77 AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the post installation calibration
procedures are completed.
Assemble the GRS 77 Universal mount per section 3.2.3.2.2. Place the GRS 77 Universal Mount
assembly on the mounting surface ensuring that the forward direction is aligned with the aircraft heading.
Mark holes (4 on each side, 8 total) and edges of angle brackets for future reference. See Figure 3-20.
LOCATE SECOND 4.60

HOLE APPROXIMATELY
AS SHOWN
5.64
115-00909-00 1.88 TYP.

FOOTPRINT
(2X)
LOCATE FIRST
HOLE APPROXIMATELY
AS SHOWN
Figure 3-20. Mounting Location (Composite Aircraft)
At each bolt location, drill a hole in the mounting surface large enough to accommodate an AN3 bolt head
(approximately 0.50 inches in diameter). Remove core between the inside and outside mounting surface
layers as shown (Approximately 1.00 inches in diameter). See Figure 3-21. Do not penetrate the opposite
side of honeycomb core.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Ø0.50 THROUGH
MOUNTING SURFACE
TOP LAYER ONLY
MOUNTING SURFACE
AN3 BOLT
MOUNTING SURFACE
TOP LAYER HONEYCOMB CORE
1.0" MIN.
Ø1.00
CORE REMOVAL
BOTTOM LAYER HONEYCOMB CORE
Figure 3-21. Mounting Bolt Preparation (Composite Aircraft)
Tape the underside of the angle brackets with packaging tape to keep the brackets clean of the epoxy/flox
mixture. Poke holes in the tape at all bolt hole locations. Fill each bolt cavity with epoxy and flox mix.
Insert each bolt head into cavity; epoxy and flox should just barely flow over the hole in the inner layer.
Align bolts with the angle brackets by laying taped angle brackets on the mounting surface, taped side
down against epoxy/flox mixture, with bolts sticking through the brackets. Ensure bolts remain
perpendicular to the angles and mounting surface as shown in Figure 3-22. The angle bracket taped faces
should remain flush with the mounting surface.
Ensure brackets remain aligned with the reference marks on the fuselage. Once epoxy/flox mix has set,
remove angles from mounting surface and remove tape from angle brackets.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
TAPE UNDERSIDE OF
115-00909-00 BRACKETS
WITH PACKAGING TAPE
AN3 BOLT
MOUNTING SURFACE
EPOXY WITH FLOX
ENSURE BOLT REMAINS PERPENDICULAR

TO FACE OF BRACKET WHEN
BRACKET IS FLUSH WITH MOUNTING SURFACE
Figure 3-22. Mounting Bolt Installation and Alignment (Composite Aircraft)
After bolts have been installed in the mounting surface, lay two layers of cloth over the mounting
location. Dimensions and location of the first sheet are shown, overlap the mounting location by 0.5
inches. See Figure 3-23.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
9.5
1.9
1.3
7.5
Figure 3-23. First Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)
After laying up the first sheet of cloth, lay up a second sheet oriented 45° from first sheet as shown in
Figure 3-24.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
11.5
1.0
9.5
Figure 3-24. 2nd Cloth Installation for Mounting Bolts (Composite Aircraft)
Allow for the material to set and perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
Install the GRS77 universal mount onto bolts and secure with AN365-1032A Nuts and AN960-10
washers (8 places). The recommended torque is 20-25 inch lbs. Perform a structural validation test per
Section 3.3.
3.2.3.2.5 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount (Tube and Fabric Aircraft)

For tube and fabric aircraft, it is possible to use the tube structure as the support structure for an assembly
that includes an installation plate as well as a GRS 77 Universal Mount to set the AHRS to aircraft level.
The concept involves the assembly of the installation plate with a GRS 77 Universal Mount. The
installation plate offers a surface for attaching the GRS 77 Universal Mount, and the Universal Mount
allows the assembly to accommodate an aircraft level, forward orientation for the GRS 77 AHRS unit.
Two options are presented: tabs welded to airframe or alternately, MS21919 clamps attached to airframe.
Welded Tabs:
1. The preferred method of installation allows for tabs to be welded to the tube structure for attaching
the installation plate.
2. A minimum of four tabs are required and the material must be appropriate to the tube structure of the
airframe.
3. An installation plate uses the four mounting points to secure the plate to the airframe. Countersunk
screws are used to attach the Universal Mount to the installation plate, to minimize possibility of
interference between hardware and the airframe.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
4. The installation plate must be at least .125” thickness, 2024-T3. A stiffener may be required
depending on plate length.
5. Reference Figure 3-25 and Figure 3-26 for details and illustration.
6. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.
7. Welded tabs must be treated with corrosion protection appropriate to the materials used and the
existing protection on the airframe. The installation plate requires corrosion protection (example: zinc
primer, alodine etc.) on all surfaces of fabricated parts.
3 INSTALLATION PLATE
ATTACH TO STRUCTURE IN A
MINIMUM OF 4 PLACES
AIRCRAFT TUBULAR
STRUCTURE
FORWARD
1 3 (4X)
1 (4X)
2 MS24693-XXX
SCREW #10-32 LENGTH A/R
8X
AIRCRAFT TUBULAR
STRUCTURE
GRS 77 AIRCRAFT TUBULAR

STRUCTURE
115-00922-00
BRACKET TOP AHRS UNIV 115-00909-00
2X
FORWARD
AN365-1032A NUT, 8X AN3-XA BOLT

AN960-10 WASHER, 8X AN960-10 WASHERS, A/R
MS21083N3 NUT (OR EQUIV.)
4X, MINIMUM
NOTES:
1. WELD TABS TO EXISTING STRUCTURE TO SUPPORT GRS 77 INSTALLATION PANEL.

USE MATERIAL APPROPRIATE TO AIRCRAFT CONSTRUCTION.
2. USE #10-32 COUNTERSUNK HARDWARE TO AVOID INTERFERENCE BETWEEN HARDWARE
AND STRUCTURES.
3. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC PRIMER; ALODINE; ETC. ON ALL
SURFACES OF FABRICATED PARTS.
Figure 3-25. Installation of GRS 77 AHRS Universal Mount in Tube and Fabric Aircraft Using
Welded Tabs

Rev. B 190-00601-06
MS21919 Clamps:
1. An alternative method of installation allows for clamps to be assembled to the tube structure for
attaching the installation plate.
2. A minimum of four sets of clamps (two clamps per set in offset pattern) are required.
3. An installation plate uses the eight mounting points (four clamp sets) to secure the plate to the
airframe. Countersunk screws are used to attach the Universal Mount to the installation plate, to
minimize possibility of interference between hardware and the airframe.
4. The installation plate must be at least .125” thickness, 2024-T3. A stiffener may be required
dependent on plate length. Reference Figure 3-26.
5. Reference Figure 3-26 for details and illustration.
6. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5 INSTALLATION PLATE
ATTACH TO STRUCTURE IN A
MINIMUM OF 8 PLACES
(SEE STIFFENER
LAYOUT FOR
2
LONGER
DISTANCES)
FORWARD
2 MINIMIZE LENGTH OF
TOP VIEW
UNSUPPORTED MATERIAL
ASSEMBLE 4 PAIRS (MINIMUM)

AT EDGES OF ASSEMBLY IN
OFFSET PATTERN AS SHOWN.
MS24693-XXX
#10-32 SCREW
LENGTH A/R, 8X
FORWARD
BOTTOM VIEW
FORWARD
115-00922-00
BRACKET TOP AHRS UNIV 115-00909-00
2X
SIDE VIEW
NOTES:
1. USE JAM NUTS IN ASSEMBLY TO SET LOCATION OF CLAMPS PRIOR TO ASSEMBLING
INSTALLATION PANEL TO STRUCTURE.
2. IF DISTANCE BETWEEN CLAMP ATTACHMENTS IS GREATER THAN 12", A STIFFENER IS
REQUIRED ON THIS EDGE. AN UNSUPPORTED DISTANCE GREATER THAN 16" IS NOT ACCEPTABLE.
3. RECOMMENDED TORQUE IS 20-25 INCH-LBS.
4. RECOMMENDED HARDWARE IS AS NOTED.
5. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC PRIMER; ALODINE; ETC.) ON ALL
SURFACES OF FABRICATED PARTS.
MS21919 Clamps
Sheet 1 of 2
Rev. B 190-00601-06
GRS 77
INSTALLATION
PANEL
MS21083N3 NUT, LOCKING 3
AN960-10 WASHER (OR EQUIV.)
(OR EQUIV.) A/R
AN315-3 PLAIN HEX NUT

1
(OR EQUIV.)
AN3-XA BOLT
FORWARD
MS21919 WDG DETAIL A
CLAMP ORIENTATION ADJUSTED
1 MS21919 WDG CLAMPS WITH

HARDWARE TO ATTACH INSTALLATION
PANEL TO STRUCTURE
ISO VIEW
8X
DIM. A
DIM. B
DIM. A
HARDWARE DIM. A DIM. B

MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
MS20470AD4-X RIVET
A/R, SEE TABLE FOR
RECOMMENDED SPACING
TOP VIEW
STIFFENER LAYOUT
5 AN365-1032A NUT, 8X
STIFFENER AT EDGE
AN960-10 WASHER, 8X
0.75 X 0.75 X 0.063 ANGLE
(2024-T3 OR 6061-T6 ALUMINUM)
END VIEW
STIFFENER LAYOUT
MS21919 Clamps
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.3.2.6 Installation of GRS 77 Universal Mount Using Existing Points from Previously
Installed Equipment
For aircraft that have the Bendix/King KG 102/102A unit, Mid-Continent 4305-128 or 4305-150, or
Cirrus 14357-001 installed, the mounting pattern is accommodated in the design of the GRS 77 Universal
Mount. See Figure 3-27 for detail on how the angles assemble to the main bracket to accommodate the
previously-installed equipment locations. These locations may be used for the GRS 77 AHRS installation
if they meet the requirements defined in Section 3.2.3.1.
TURN ANGLES INWARD FOR TURN ANGLES OUTWARD FOR

MID CONTINENT 4305-128 OR 4305-150 BENDIX/KING KG 102 / 102A
OR CIRRUS 14357-001 MOUNTING LOCATION
MOUNTING LOCATION
Figure 3-27. Using the GRS 77 Universal Mount in Locations of Previously-Installed Equipment
3.2.3.3 Preparation for Installation without GRS 77 Universal Mount
NOTE
Aircraft structures such as the firewall, bulkhead and support frames are usually
perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for determining the
relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.
Position the GRS 77 Mounting Rack to the mounting or installation panel so that it is aligned to the
aircraft heading and transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting plate from the angle bracket 5 places.
Ensure that the arrow on the mounting rack is facing the forward direction.
Drill the marked hole-pattern (0.210 diameter holes) and rivet nut plates (MS21059L3 or equivalent) with
MS20426AD3-X rivets (Countersunk rivets). Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and are flush
with the installation panel. Remove any burrs or excess rivet heads. See Figure 3-28 for illustration and
alternate hardware options.
Perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
Install the Mounting Rack, whichever applies, to the mounting plate using AN525-1032R8 (5 total). The
recommended torque is 20-25 inch lbs. Perform a structural validation test per Section 3.3.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
SCREW 1 2
(5X)
115-00459-00
REMOTE INSTALL RACK
GRS 77
3 MOUNTING
PLATE
NUTPLATE
1 RIVET (2X)
(5 REQ'D)
NOTES:
SCREWS AN525-X (#10-32 LENGTH A/R); MS35206-X (#10-32 LENGTH A/R; OR NAS603 (#10-32 LENGTH A/R
WASHERS AN960-10; AN960-10L; NAS1149F0332P; NUTPLATES (M)F5000-3; (M)K1000-3;
OR NAS1149F0363P (M)K2000-3; OR F2000-3
OR
OR MS21042L3

3. MINIMUM THICKNESS .063", UNLESS ALUMINUM HONEYCOMB CORE PANEL.
Figure 3-28. Installation of the Mounting Rack to the Mounting Plate

3.2.3.3.1 Mounting Bracket – Attachment to Stringers or Longerons
The option of creating a mounting bracket that attaches to stringers or longerons is shown in Figure 3-29.
The following items should be considered when creating the mounting bracket:
• Mounting bracket requirements should follow conditions noted in Section 3.2.3.1, unless
otherwise indicated.
• Distance between stringers or longerons should be less than 16.0 inches. For a distance between
12.0 and 16.0 inches, use a stiffener down the centerline of the mounting hole pattern (see Figure
3-29). At a minimum, the stiffener should be made of 0.75 x 0.50 x 0.063” angle, with the 0.75”
leg used for attachment to the mounting bracket, and should run the length of the bracket. A
nutplate for the GRS 77 Mounting Plate (center hole in the 5-hole pattern) may be attached
directly to the stiffener. Use MS20426AD3 or MS20426AD4 rivets to secure the stiffener to the
mounting bracket. The vertical leg of the stiffener must be at least 0.25” from the skin of the
aircraft.
• Ensure at least 3 inches forward of AHRS remains clear for connector and wire harness.
• Fabricate a U-shaped mounting bracket keeping edge flanges as short as possible. The flange
should be no more than 0.5 inches higher than the stringers (see Figure 3-29).
• Minimal access to underside of bracket requires use of blind fasteners for the bracket to structure
and for the GRS 77 to the bracket.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
ISOMETRIC VIEW
FORWARD
GRS 77 AHRS
AIRFRAME
STRINGER
MOUNTING
1 2
BRACKET
FASTENING
HARDWARE 3
VIEW LOOKING AFT
MOUNTING SURFACE
PARALLEL TO
AIRCRAFT LEVEL
NOTES:
1. USE 2024-T3 SHEET ALUMINIUM, 0.063" THICKNESS OR GREATER. USE A BEND

RADIUS APPROPRIATE TO THE MATERIAL TYPE AND THICKNESS. (EXAMPLE: USE BEND
RADIUS 0.24" FOR 0.063" THICKNESS 2024-T3 ALUMINUM)
2. APPLY CORROSION PROTECTION (EXAMPLE: ZINC PRIMER; ALODINE; ETC.) ON ALL

SURFACES OF PART.
3. A RIGID CONNECTION TO AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE IS REQUIRED. RECOMMENDED

HARDWARE OPTIONS ARE:
RIVETS PREFERRED: CR3213-4-X (CHERRY MAX); OR ALTERNATE: MS20470AD4-X
WASHERS AN960-6; AN960-6L; NUTPLATES (M)F5000-06; (M)K1000-06;
NAS1149FN632P; (M)K2000-06; OR F2000-06
OR
OR NAS1149FN616P RIVETS MS20426AD3-X
NUTS AN364-632A (MS21083N06);
OR MS21042L06
Figure 3-29. Installation of GRS 77 on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter riveted to Aircraft Skin)
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
WIDTH DETAIL
UP TO 8"
UP TO 8",
NO EXTRA FLANGES
8 - 12"
8" UP TO 12",
FORWARD AND AFT
FLANGES
12-16"
12" UP TO 16"
FORWARD AND AFT
FLANGES AND
FORE-AFT STIFFENER
0.25" MIN. DEFLECTION GAP
MAX. HEIGHT DETAIL
MOUNTING
BRACKET
MAX. 0.5"
AIRCRAFT FLOOR AIRFRAME STRINGER
FASTENER SPACING
MOUNTING AIRFRAME
BRACKET STRINGER
DIM A
DIM A DIM B AIRCRAFT

FLOOR

MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
Figure 3-29. Installation of GRS 77 on Aircraft Stringers (Adapter riveted to Aircraft Skin)
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.3.3.2 Modify Existing Floor Panel or Add Mounting Surface to Attach GRS 77
Mounting Plate
Some aircraft may have an existing floor panel, such as in an avionics bay or in the baggage
compartment, that is suitable for AHRS installation. Alternately, a simple panel may be installed where
existing structure creates a level plane, creating a mounting surface for the GRS 77 AHRS. The following
items should be considered when modifying a floor panel or adding a mounting surface:
• The panel to which the GRS 77 is mounted must be rigid enough to not transmit vibrations into
the GRS 77. The minimum thickness for sheet metal structure is 0.063 inches. It is acceptable to
install the AHRS to honeycomb structure used in some avionics bays.
• If the GRS 77 is installed in an area used for baggage, extra care must be taken to ensure the GRS
77 is protected from damage. This may require fabrication of a protective cover for the GRS 77.
At least 0.25” space must exist between the surfaces of the AHRS and associated brackets, and
the fabricated cover must not deflect enough to touch the unit when impacted by baggage.
• The GRS 77 Universal Mount is not required when the mounting surface (existing or added) is
level with the aircraft level reference.
FORWARD GRS 77 AHRS
3 IN
CLEARANCE
MOUNTING SURFACE
PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT
LEVEL
FASTENING
HARDWARE
EXISTING FLOOR PANEL
OR NEW SUPPORT PANEL
(SEE REQUIREMENTS SECTION
FOR RECOMMENDED THICKNESS
SUPPORT PANEL SHOULD BE AND DESIGN FEATURES)
FASTENED TO EACH AIRFRAME EXISTING
MEMBER ACROSS THE SPAN SKIN
AIRFRAME
MEMBER
Figure 3-30. Installation of GRS 77 on Existing Floor Panel or Installed Support Panel

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.3.3.3 Plate – Attachment to Existing Frame Structure
Some aircraft will have frame members with flanges that face forward or aft, where the flanges for each
frame member are at different water lines. This presents several possibilities for the AHRS installation. If
the flanges are long enough to install hardware Figure 3-31.
BULKHEAD
FORWARD
3 IN. GRS 77 AHRS FASTENING
CLEARANCE HARDWARE
NEW SUPPORT PANEL FOR AHRS

MOUNTING PLATE (SEE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION FOR RECOMMENDED THICKNESS
AND DESIGN FEATURES)
MOUNTING SURFACE PARALLEL

SUPPORT PANEL SHOULD BE
TO AIRCRAFT LEVEL
FASTENED ACROSS THE SPAN
ANGLES TO CREATE
LEVEL PLANE FOR
SUPPORT PANEL
SKIN
EXISTING
AIRFRAME
MEMBER
Figure 3-31. Installation of GRS 77 with Installed Support Plate

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.3.4 GRS 77 Rack to Unit Flatness Check
NOTE
Place the unit on its rack, and tighten the screw fasteners on one end of the unit to the
rack (recommended torque is 22-25 inch pounds), but leave the screw fasteners on the
other end of the unit unfastened.
At the unfastened end of the unit, there should now be a gap between the unit baseplate and the rails of
the mounting rack. Measure the gap to determine if it is within tolerances. See Figure 3-32. Using feeler
gauges, check to ensure that the gap between the unit and each rack rail is at least 0.010 inch, but less
than 0.070 inch. See Figure 3-32.
If the gaps between the unit and each rack rail are within tolerance (0.010 inch, but less than 0.070 inch)
tighten the remaining two screw fasteners to hold the GRS 77 unit firmly to its rack (recommended torque
is 22-25 inch pounds).
If the gap is less than 0.010 inch, or greater than 0.070 inch, then the proper amount of preload will not be
exerted on the unit baseplate when the unit is fastened down, and the installation is not acceptable.
Possible causes for a failure of this check include the following:
1. The rack is fastened down to a surface that is not sufficiently flat
2. The rack is warped or damaged
3. The GRS 77 has a center baseplate external shim that is damaged or has been removed
4. The GRS 77 baseplate has been warped or damaged
In the event of a failed test (gap on unfastened end of unit not within the range of 0.010 inch to 0.070
inch), these possibilities must be examined, and any deficiencies corrected to pass this check before the
installation is acceptable.
GRS 77 AHRS
FASTENED END
MEASURE GAP AT
UNFASTENED END
(0.010"- 0.070" ACCEPTABLE)
Figure 3-32. Measuring GRS 77 to Mounting Rack with Feeler Gauge
NOTE
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the GRS 77 to the rack, rather than hand
tightening the knurled screws. The recommended torque is 22-25 inch pounds.
While installing the GRS 77 unit on its rack, a flatness check is required to ensure that the unit’s base is
properly preloaded after installation. Perform a flatness check.
After completion and satisfactorily passing the flatness check, tighten the four mounting screws securing
the GRS 77 unit to the rack.
Refer to Section 5.5 for system configuration, calibration and checkout.
Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.3.5 Installation of the GRS 77 AHRS
The GRS 77 AHRS may be installed after the mounting rack has been assembled to the Universal Mount
or equivalent support structure and the flatness check is complete. While installing the GRS 77 unit on its
rack, a flatness check is required to ensure that the unit’s base is properly preloaded after installation.
Perform a flatness check per Section 3.2.3.4.
NOTE
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the GRS 77 to the rack, rather than hand
tightening the knurled screws. The recommended torque is 22-25 inch pounds.
After completion and satisfactorily passing the flatness check, tighten the four mounting screws securing
the GRS 77 unit to the rack. See Figure 3-33.
GRS 77 AHRS
USE A #2 PHILLIPS SCREWDRIVER TO

TIGHTEN FOUR KNURLED SCREWS
ON UNIT TO RACK. TORQUE SCREWS
TO 22-25 IN-LBS.
115-00922-00
TOP AHRS BRACKET
(REF)
INSTALLATION PLATE
115-00909-00 (REF)
ANGLE BRACKET
(REF)
Figure 3-33. GRS 77 Final Installation Example
After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5.5 for system configuration, calibration and checkout.
NOTE
The GRS 77 AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the post installation calibration
procedures are completed.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.4 GMU 44 Magnetometer Location and Mounting
Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (refer to Section 2.5.11.5 for placement information).
Example GMU 44 installations can be found in Section D.2.
The GMU 44 mounting rack must be installed within 3° of the aircraft level reference for pitch and roll. It
is preferred that the forward direction of the GMU 44 mounting rack is aligned to within 0.5° in heading
of the aircraft forward direction (longitudinal axis). If it is not possible to guarantee this accuracy,
installation alignment to within 2.5° in heading is acceptable, in combination with a post-installation
heading alignment of the aircraft to a precise heading to determine and set a heading offset. The heading
offset procedure is described in Section 5.6.4. For all installations, level and heading alignment will
require the use of one of the following:
1. GMU 44 Universal Mount P/N 011-01779-01
2. Fabricated mounting equipment, e.g. brackets, shelves, mounting platform, etc.
3. Or a combination of both.
For the installation of the GMU 44 level the aircraft in both the longitudinal and lateral axes. Refer to the
aircraft’s maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed on jacks
while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non level position when entering, exiting or
working the aircraft.
CAUTION
After a location has been selected and a GMU 44 mounting method chosen, a magnetic
interference survey must be performed at that location prior to fabricating or assembling
any parts for the GMU 44 mounting. It is possible that the location will fail the survey
and the installation will require a new location, with different installation requirements.
3.2.4.1 GMU 44 Universal Mount (Optional)
GMU 44 Installation may require the use of the GMU 44 Universal Mount P/N 011-01779-01. The
GMU 44 Universal Mount allows for level installation and aircraft heading alignment.
The GMU 44 Universal Mount Allows for aircraft level installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer on
mounting structures with inclines up to ±6° in 2° increments and 360° of forward direction offset.
Depending on installation, the GMU 44 may be installed in the following configurations:
1. Installed inside of the GMU 44 Universal Mount
a) Side Plate Mounted, Figure 3-34
b) Bottom Plate Mounted, Figure 3-35
2. Installed suspended from the GMU 44 Universal Mount
a) Side Plate Mounted, Figure 3-36
b) Bottom Plate Mounted, Figure 3-37

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 3-34. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted
Figure 3-35. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure 3-36. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Plate Mounted - Suspended
Figure 3-37. GMU 44 Universal Mount, Bottom Plate Mounted – Suspended

For side plate installations (Figure 3-38 and Figure 3-39), Lateral and longitudinal (2 axis) level
installation can be accomplished through the level placement of the mounting holes and the incline setting
(±2°, ±4° ±6°) of the GMU 44 Universal Mount.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GMU 44
UNIVERSAL
INSTALLATION BRACKET
PANEL
FORWARD
MOUNTING OF GMU 44
PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT
LEVEL
SET BRACKET MOUNTING AIRCRAFT
HOLES IN PANEL LEVEL REFERENCE
FOR AIRCRAFT LEVEL
Figure 3-38. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 1
ANGLE OF
INCLINE
GMU 44
UNIVERSAL
BRACKET
AIRCRAFT
LEVEL
REFERENCE
SET INCLINE ON
UNIVERSAL BRACKET
FOR LEVEL
INSTALLATION
Figure 3-39. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Axis 2

For bottom mounted installations requiring incline offset on both the lateral and longitudinal axis, level
installation can be accomplished through level placement of support equipment, such as mounting
brackets, shelves, panels on one axis and setting the incline on the GMU 44 Universal Mount (±2°, ±4°,
±6°) for the other axis. An example is shown in Figure 3-40.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
VERTICAL
STABILIZER
GMU 44
LEVEL TO
LATERAL AXIS
LEVEL TO
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
AIRCRAFT
REFERENCE
LINE
LEVEL TO
LATERAL AXIS
LEVEL TO
LONGITUDINAL AXIS
UNIVERSAL ADAPTER SET AT

+6° FOR LEVEL INSTALLATION
TO LONGITUDINAL AXIS
Figure 3-40. GMU 44 Universal Mount Level Installation Using Support Equipment, Examples.
Heading alignment is accomplished by installing the GMU 44 Universal Mount’s top plate to the top
bracket so that the forward direction is aligned with the aircraft heading.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.4.2 Installation of GMU 44 Magnetometer with GMU 44 Universal Mount
3.2.4.2.1 Assembling the GMU 44 Universal Mount
Use the offset angle calculated from Section 3.2.4.4 to align the top plate to the universal bracket (Figure
3-41) and mark the drill hole-pattern to the bracket; diameter of 0.128 inches, 3 places.
HOLE MARKS FOR PARALLEL LINE

TO MATCH TOP MOUNTING HOLE MARKS FOR PARALLEL LINE
OF BRACKET TO MATCH SIDE MOUNTING OF
BRACKET
ALIGN GMU 44 MOUNTING

RING PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT
CENTERLINE. MATCH DRILL BRACKET
TO RING AND RIVET IN PLACE.
AIRCRAFT FORWARD INDICATOR
ALIGN GMU 44 MOUNTING

RING PARALLEL TO AIRCRAFT
CENTERLINE. MATCH DRILL BRACKET
TO RING AND RIVET IN PLACE.
Figure 3-41. Top Plate Alignment to Aircraft Heading

Rivet the installation plate to the top bracket using MS20426AD5-6 rivets (3 Places). See Figure 3-42 and
Figure 3-43.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
115-01017-01
BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER,
TOP, UNIV 115-00481-00
INSTALL RACK, GMU 44
DO NOT RIVET. THESE

ARE FOR SECURING
THE GMU TO THIS
ALIGNMENT PINS
ASSEMBLED UNIT.
RIVET HOLES ARE

COUNTERSUNK.
Figure 3-42. Installation Rack Rivet Through Holes

MS20426AD5-6 RIVET
(3X)
NOTE FORWARD
RELATION TO
BRACKET
115-00481-00
INSTALL RACK GMU 44
115-01017-01 SMP, BRACKET,

MAGNETOMETER, TOP, UNIV
Figure 3-43. Installation Rack to Top Bracket Installation
Assemble the top bracket to the bottom bracket and rivet using MS20426AD3-4 rivets (3 places). See
Figure 3-44. Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and flush. Remove any burrs or excess rivet
heads.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GUIDE HOLES PROVIDED TO
MOUNT TO AIRCRAFT
RIVET TOP AND BOTTOM

BRACKETS WITH MS20426AD3-4
RIVETS
MS20426AD3-4 RIVET
(3X)
115-00939-01
SMP, BRACKET,
MAGNETOMETER, UNIV
Figure 3-44. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Bracket Assembly
NOTE
The incline of the mounting location may be determined by using a level meter such as
the PRO 360 or equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself
as reference for a more accurate installation.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Determine and set the incline offset required for level installation. Move the top bracket forward or aft
relative to the bottom bracket to achieve desired angle setting for side plate installations or move the top
bracket up or down relative to the bottom bracket to achieve the desired angle setting for bottom plate
installations. Ensure alignment of holes for desired setting (0°, 2°, 4° or 6°). See Figure 3-45 through
Figure 3-49 for details on achieving desired angle settings.
HOLE PATTERN FOR

LATERAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
115-01017-01
BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER,
TOP, UNIV
HOLE PATTERN FOR

ROTATIONAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
HOLE PATTERN FOR

LATERAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
115-00939-01
BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER, UNIV
HOLE PATTERN FOR

ROTATIONAL MOTION
ANGULAR ADJUSTMENT
Figure 3-45. GMU 44 Universal Mount Top and Bottom Hole-Patterns

Rev. B 190-00601-06
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
VALUE 0, 2, 4 OR 6°
ANGLE ADJUSTED
2, 4 OR 6°
RIVETS
+2° +2°
INSTALLED
+4° +4°
+6° +6°
MOUNTING
0° 0° PLATE
MOVEMENT OF PLATES TO
ALIGN HOLES LATERALLY
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE
Figure 3-46. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method (Side Plate Mounted)
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
ANGLE ADJUSTED
VALUE 0, -2, -4 OR -6°
-2, -4 OR -6°
-6° -6° RIVETS

-4° -4° INSTALLED
-2° -2°
0° 0°
MOUNTING
PLATE
ALIGN HOLES LATERALLY
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE
Figure 3-47. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Lateral Method (Side Plate Mounted)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT RIVETS
VALUES 2, 4 OR 6° INSTALLED
ALIGN HOLES IN ROTATION
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE +2° +2°+4°
+4° +6°
+6°
MOUNTING
ANGLE PLATE
REQUIRED
Figure 3-48. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method

(Bottom Plate Mounted)
MOUNTING
PLATE
ANGLE
REQUIRED
PLATE MOVEMENTS TO RIVETS

ALIGN HOLES IN ROTATION - 2° - 2°
- 4° - 4° INSTALLED
FOR DEGREES OF INCLINE - 6° - 6°
ANGLE ADJUSTMENT
VALUE -2, -4 OR -6°
Figure 3-49. GMU 44 Universal Mount Hole Alignment, Rotational Method

(Bottom Plate Mounted)
Cleco the desired angle and rivet the top bracket to the bottom bracket on both sides (2 each side) using
MS20470AD3-4 rivets as shown in Figure 3-50 and Figure 3-51. Examples are shown in Figure 3-52 and
Figure 3-53.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
MS20470AD3-4 RIVET
(2X)
NOTE: RIVETS ARE MOUNTED IN SHOWN SET OF

HOLES FOR -6° DIHEDRAL ADJUSTMENT.
CLECO (2X)
Figure 3-50. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure
MS20470AD3-4 RIVET
(2X)
NOTE: RIVETS ARE MOUNTED IN SHOWN SET OF

HOLES FOR -6° DIHEDRAL ADJUSTMENT.
Figure 3-51. GMU 44 Universal Mount Incline Offset Procedure

190-00601-06 Rev. B
MOUNTING PLANE
TOP MOVEMENT TOP MOVEMENT
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
BOTTOM MOVEMENT BOTTOM MOVEMENT
EXAMPLE OF +4° INCLINE DUE TO LATERAL MOVEMENT

RIVETED WITH MS20470AD3-3
Figure 3-52. Example of a 4° Lateral Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount
RECOMMENDED MOUNTING
PLANE
GMU 44
6°
6°
GMU 44
RIVET LOCATION
FOR + 6 ° INCLINE RECOMMENDED MOUNTING
PLANE
Figure 3-53. Example of a 6° Rotated Incline GMU 44 Universal Mount
Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using three screws P/N 211-60037-08, taking care
to tighten the mounting screws firmly. See Figure 3-54.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
211-60037-08 SCREW
6-32 X .25 BRASS
(3X)
GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER
Figure 3-54. Installation of the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.4.2.2 GMU 44 Universal Mount Installation
Determine a suitable location for the GMU 44 (refer to Section 2.5.11.5 for placement information).
Example GMU 44 installations can be found in Appendix D.
Installation of the GRS 77 requires the aircraft to be leveled both in the longitudinal and lateral axis.
Refer to the aircraft maintenance manual for leveling instructions. It is preferred that the aircraft is placed
on jacks while leveled to avoid inadvertently placing the aircraft in a non level position when entering,
exiting or working in the aircraft.
NOTE
Prior to installing any equipment necessary for the installation of the GMU 44, a
Magnetic Interference Survey must be completed to determine if the desired location is
acceptable for the installation of the GMU 44 Magnetometer.
Complete the Magnetic Interference Survey per Section 3.2.4.3
NOTE
In most cases support components for the installation of the GMU 44 Universal Mount is
not required. For some aircraft that require installing the magnetometer in the vertical
stabilizer, support brackets may be required to compensate for the extreme inclines
and/or awkward positioning. In such cases it is recommended to provide a level
installation using the manufactured brackets or other support equipment, especially if the
GMU 44 Universal Mount is secured through the bottom bracket.
If required, install the support components (e.g. manufactured brackets or other equipment used to
support the GMU 44 Universal Mount) required for the installation of the GMU 44 Universal Mount in
accordance with the aircraft maintenance manual and AC43.13-2A Chapter 2. Verify clearances and
requirements per Figure 3-55.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GMU 44 the following conditions
shall be met:
If support racks, brackets or shelves need to be fabricated, they should be fabricated and attached to the
aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in the aircraft maintenance manual, AC43.13-
2A Chapter 2 and the following requirements:
• Material shall be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum
• Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
• Material shall be a minimum of 0.040” thickness
• Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness and
type.
Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.
Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12” in width or length without direct attachment to primary
structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12”, add necessary stringers, doublers, bulkhead
flange reinforcements, etc., to provide adequate support.
Maintain a minimum of 1 1/4” between the top of the GMU 44 unit and any object to ensure clearance for
connector and wire harness. Refer to Figure 3-55.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GMU 44
1.25"
Figure 3-55. GMU 44 Installation Clearance

Determine the angle offset for level installation and heading angle offset for aircraft heading alignment.
The incline of the mounting location may be measured using a level meter such as the PRO 360 or
equivalent. It is recommended to use a level surface on the aircraft itself as reference for a more accurate
installation.
NOTE
For vertical stabilizer installation, aircraft structures such as the bulkheads and support
frames are usually perpendicular to the aircraft heading and may be used as reference for
determining the relative position of the installation to the aircraft heading.
For wing installations it may require the transferring of both the aircraft heading reference line and the
mounting panel’s line to the shop floor for comparison and angle measurement. Refer to Section 3.2.4.4
for typical methods to determine the heading angle offset.
Assemble the GMU 44 Universal Mount per Section 3.2.4.2.1.
NOTE
For GMU 44 Mounting examples see Section D.2.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
For side plate installations, position the GMU 44 Universal Mount on the aircraft mounting structure.
Transfer the hole-pattern from the side-plate of the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the mounting structure
(0.144” diameter drill holes, two places). See Figure 3-56, left side.
For bottom plate installations, drill four holes (0.128” diameter) on the bottom plate (two on each side) of
the GMU 44 Universal Mount. Position the GMU 44 Universal Mount on the mounting platform.
Transfer the hole-pattern from the bottom plate of the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the mounting plate
(0.144” inch diameter, four places). See Figure 3-56, right side.
Ø0.144 HOLE FOR #6-32 FASTENER Ø0.144 HOLE FOR #6-32 FASTENER
MATCH DRILL TO MOUNTING SURFACE MATCH DRILL TO MOUNTING SURFACE
2 PLACES 4 PLACES
SIDE PLATE INSTALLATION BOTTOM PLATE INSTALLATION
Figure 3-56. Possible Hole-Patterns on the GMU 44 Universal Mount
NOTE
For installations that have the clearance and access to install and remove the GMU 44
without disturbing the GMU 44 Universal Mount, the GMU 44 Universal Mount may be
installed on the mounting platform prior to installing the GMU 44 on it. In this case,
rivets may be used to secure the GMU 44 Universal Mount to the mounting platform
since removal of the GMU for maintenance or replacement will not require the removal
of the GMU 44 Universal Mount. When using rivets, use CR3242-4 (Length A/R) Cherry
Max rivets or MS20470AD5 Solid Universal Head rivets. It is acceptable to oversize the
holes in the Universal Mount brackets to a #21 drill size (0.159”) for installation of
MS20470AD5 rivets.
NOTE
Installation hardware for the GMU 44 Universal Mount should be non-magnetic.
Acceptable nutplates include #6-32 variations of the following: MS21048, MS21050,
MS21052, MS21054, MS21056, MS21058, MS21060, MS21070, MS21072, and
MS21074. Do not use floating nutplates. Acceptable nuts include #6-32 variations of the
following: AN363C, AN364C, or AN365C. Acceptable screws include MS5197, #6-32,
length as appropriate. Acceptable washers include AN960C-6, AN960C-6L,
AN960PD-6, AN960-PD-6L, or their NAS equivalents.
Rivet nut plates (MS21059L3) with MS20426AD4-6 rivets (Countersunk rivets) onto mounting platform.
Ensure that installed rivets are countersunk and are flush with the installation panel. Remove any burrs or
excess rivet heads. In some cases, such as with composite aircraft, self locking nuts may be used instead
of rivet nuts.
Install the GMU 44 into the GMU 44 Universal Mount using hardware included in the GMU 44
Installation Kit. The recommended torque is 12-15 inch lbs.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
The metal components in the GMU 44’s connector may slightly affect the magnetic field sensed by the
GMU 44. Place the connector at least 2 inches from the body of the GMU 44 to minimize this effect.
After attaching the GMU 44’s connector to its mate in the aircraft wiring, secure the connector in place
using good installation practices. This will ensure that any remaining magnetic effect can be compensated
for using the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in Section 5.6.
After the installation is complete, refer to Section 5 for system configuration, calibration and checkout.
NOTE
The GMU will not provide valid outputs until the post installation calibration procedures
are completed.
3.2.4.3 Magnetic Interference Survey
CAUTION
Do not permanently rivet the GMU 44 Universal Mount together. Use rivets held in place
with tape to hold GMU 44 Universal Mount together temporarily. Clecos, clamps or
other devices that are metal or magnetic should not be used. It is possible that the
location will fail the survey and the installation will require a new location, with a
different incline.
Temporarily assemble the GMU 44 Universal Mount per section 3.2.4.2.1 for level installation using tape
to hold rivets in place. Set the GMU and installation rack onto the GMU 44 Universal Mount. It is
preferable to have the GMU 44 forward direction aligned to the aircraft heading, but not required. Place
the GMU 44 and GMU 44 Universal Mount on the desired installation location and secure in place using
tape. Do not use clamps or other devices that are ferrous or magnetic.
Prepare a detailed test sequence and conduct a survey of the chosen location in accordance with
Section G.4.
Run the magnetic interference survey using the magnetic interference software – refer to Appendix G for
details.
If the test passes, the location is considered reliable for the installation of the GMU 44.
If the test fails, the location should be considered unreliable until the source of the magnetic interference
is identified, remedied and the location is retested and passes the test. Refer to Section 6.1 for additional
information on troubleshooting and correcting the GMU 44 magnetometer installation. If the magnetic
interference cannot be remedied, another location should be chosen and tested.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.4.4 Method for Determining Heading Angle Offset for Wing Installation
One method of determining the heading angle offset for wing mounted installations is as follows:
1. First, transfer the mounting plate alignment to the underside of the wing.
NOTE
For some metal aircraft, it may be possible to use the rivets that secure the plate to the
aircraft skin to translate the plate line. See Figure 3-57. For aircraft that do not have
rivets for reference, such as composite aircraft, dividers may be used.
RIVET LINE FOR

INSTALLATION
OF PANEL
ACCESS PANEL
Figure 3-57. Rivet Line Method to Determine Mounting Panel Alignment
NOTE
Up/down movement of the dividers may offset the location of the mark on the underside
of the wing relative to other marks. It is important to note the holding position of the
dividers and ensure the same holding technique is used for all markings.
2. Using a pair of dividers (similar to those shown in Figure 3-58), transfer the installation plate line
to the skin of the aircraft. Place packing tape on the underside of the wing for marking.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
OR
Figure 3-58. Dividers Used to Transfer Panel alignment

Place one side of the divider inside the aircraft wing with the point making contact with the mounting
plate surface, as shown in Figure 3-59.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
INSTALLATION PANEL
ACCESS HOLE
DIVIDER
AIRCRAFT SKIN
Figure 3-59. Using Dividers to Transfer the Panel Alignment

to the Underside of the Aircraft Wing
Place the other side of the divider outside the aircraft wing and mark the point on the tape holding the
divider as flush to the wing as possible, as shown in Figure 3-60.
MARK-UP LINE
FOR PANEL LOCATION
UNDERSIDE OF (ON TAPE)
WING
WING ACCESS
PANEL HOLE
DIVIDER
Figure 3-60. Transferring The Mounting Plate Alignment

To The Underside Of The Wing
NOTE
To verify that a measurement error did not occur due to the holding position of the
dividers, ensure that a straight line intersects all marks.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Mark at least three points along the mounting plate and draw a straight line through the points. Verify that
the line intersects all points marked.
Using a plumb bob transfer the mounting panel line from the underside of the wing to the shop floor.
Mark at least 3 points and draw a straight line. Verify that the line intersects all points. See Figure 3-61.
FORWARD EDGE
OF WING
x
x
x LINE SCRIBED ON TO
UNDERSIDE OF WING
FROM MOUNTING PANEL
PLUMB BOB
x
TRANSFERRED LINE
ON TO TAPE ON
HANGAR FLOOR
Figure 3-61. Transferring the Mounting Panel Line

from the Underside of the Wing to the Shop Floor Using a Plumb Bob
Next find the aircraft centerline:
Drop a plumb bob along each side of the fuselage to the left and right at the cowl line or skin line near the
front of the fuselage. Make a mark for the two plumbs on the floor, as shown in Figure 3-62.
PLUMB BOB LINES
Figure 3-62. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Forward Fuselage

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Strike a line between the two marks using a chalk line. Measure the distance between the two marks and
mark the half way point. This will be the centerline mark for the forward fuselage. See Figure 3-63.
PLUMB BOB MARK

CL ON FLOOR
CENTER MARK
ON FLOOR
Figure 3-63. Center Mark for the Forward Fuselage (Plumb Bob Method)
Perform the same procedure to find the center point for the aft end of the fuselage, as shown in Figure
3-64.
PLUMB BOB
FLOOR
CENTERLINE
Figure 3-64. Centerline Plumb Bob Method for the Aft Fuselage

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Strike a line between the centerline mark of the forward fuselage and the centerline mark at the aft end
using a chalk line, as shown in Figure 3-65. This will be the aircraft heading reference line.
PLUMB BOB
CL AFT MARKS
CENTER MARK
ON FLOOR
DRAWN AIRCRAFT
HEADING
REFERENCE LINE
PLUMB BOB
CL FORWARD
FUSELAGE MARKS
CENTER MARK
ON FLOOR
Figure 3-65. Center Line (Plumb Bob Method)
The heading angle offset is determined by comparing the aircraft reference center line to the mounting
plate alignment.
Transfer the aircraft center line to the mounting plate line for heading angle offset measurement.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Align the laser square to the aircraft reference line so that the other laser line is perpendicular to it and
intersects the mounting plate line drawn on the floor, as shown in Figure 3-66.
Mark the point of intersection of the plate line and the laser line. Strike a line on the laser line (between
the center reference line and the mounting plate line) using a chalk line.
X
DRAWN HEADING
INTERSECTION POINT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
90°
LASER SQUARE
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE (WING)
FORWARD
Figure 3-66. Transferring Center Line Step 1 (Laser Square Method)
Position the laser square at the intersection point and align one of the lasers to the chalk line from the
previous step. Strike a line on the laser line parallel to the center reference line using a chalk line. This
chalk line will be the transferred aircraft heading reference line and is used to determine the heading angle
offset. See Figure 3-67.
LINE PARALLEL TO
AIRCRAFT HEADING
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE (WING)
DRAWN HEADING
90° 90° REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
LASER SQUARE INTERSECTION POINT
FORWARD
Figure 3-67. Transferring Center Line Step 2 (Laser Square Method)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Use a protractor to determine the angle difference between the aircraft heading reference line and the
plate line. See Figure 3-68. This is the heading angle offset that will be used for the magnetometer top
plate installation.
Y°
Figure 3-68. Measuring the Heading Angle Offset
An alternate method to the Laser Square is the use of the “3-4-5” Triangle:
Mark a point (A) on the aircraft heading reference line that is just aft of the installation location.
Measure three feet forward on the aircraft heading reference line and mark it (B). See Figure 3-69.
B
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE
3 FT
A
DRAWN HEADING
REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
FORWARD
Figure 3-69. 3-4-5 Triangle Method Step 1
From point A measure 4 feet, as perpendicular as possible and draw an arc. See Figure 3-70.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
B
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE
3 FT
A
DRAWN HEADING
4 FT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
FORWARD
From Point B measure 5 feet and draw an arc which intersects the other, this will be point C.
Draw a straight line from point C to Point A. This line is perpendicular to the aircraft heading reference
line.
Extend the A-C line to intersect with the Panel Line. See Figure 3-71.
DRAWN MOUNTING B
PANEL LINE
5 FT
3 FT
90°
C A
DRAWN HEADING
4 FT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
PERPENDICULAR
LINE
INTERSECTION POINT FORWARD

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Perform the Same procedure to find a perpendicular line to the A-C line. Ensure the base of the 3-4-5
triangle lies on the intersection point of the A-C line and the Panel line. See Figure 3-72.
DRAWN MOUNTING
PANEL LINE
B-2 B
5 FT
3 FT
90°
A-2 C A
C-2
DRAWN HEADING
4 FT REFERENCE LINE
(AIRCRAFT)
INTERSECTION POINT
FORWARD
Measure the heading angle offset.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.5 GDC 74A ADC Mounting
Determine a suitable location for the GDC 74A (refer to Section 2.5.11.6 for placement information).
Sample GDC 74A installations can be found in Section D.3.
The GDC 74A should be mounted to a surface known to have sufficient structural integrity to withstand
additional inertial forces imposed by a 2.04 pound unit (weight of GDC 74A and Mounting Rack). If it is
necessary to build a shelf or bracket to mount the GDC 74A or if it is not certain that the chosen location
is of sufficient structural integrity, refer to Section 3.3.
In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the operation of the GDC 74A the following conditions
shall be met:
aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2A Chapter 2, AC43.13-1B
Chapter 4, and the following requirements:
• Material shall be 2024-T3 sheet aluminum
• Material shall have some type of corrosion protection (primer, alodine, etc.)
• Material shall be a minimum of 0.040”
• Use sheet metal techniques (bend radius, fillets, etc) appropriate to the material thickness and
type.
Any supporting structure must be rigidly connected to the aircraft primary structure through strong
structural members capable of supporting substantial loads.
Mounting platform shall not span greater than 12” in width or length without direct attachment to primary
structure. If mounting platform does span greater than 12”, add necessary stringers, doublers, bulkhead
flange reinforcements, etc., to provide adequate support.
Maintain a minimum of 3” between the forward edge of the mounting rack and any object to ensure
clearance for connector, wire harness and pitot static lines, as shown in Figure 3-73.
GDC 74A
3" UP
AFT
12" MAXIMUM W/O STIFFENER

LONGITUDINALLY
Figure 3-73. GDC 74A Recommended Clearance

Rev. B 190-00601-06
There are two ways to install the GDC 74A. Refer to the outline and installation drawings shown below:
1. Mounting Option I - Remote mounted rack with connector and fittings opposite the screw down
mounting hardware.
CONNECTOR KIT
(PART OF 011-01010-00)
011-00882-00
GDC74A UNIT
011-01011-00
SUB-ASSY, MOUNTING RACK
4 MINIMUM FASTENERS REQUIRED,

HARDWARE NOT SUPPLIED
2. Mounting Option II - Remote mounted rack with connector and fittings on the same end as the
screw down mounting hardware.
011-00882-00
GDC74A UNIT
CONNECTOR KIT
(PART OF 011-01010-00)
011-01011-00
SUB-ASSY, MOUNTING RACK
4 MINIMUM FASTENERS REQUIRED,

HARDWARE NOT SUPPLIED

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Position the GDC 74A mounting rack to the mounting panel and transfer the hole-pattern to the mounting
plate from the angle bracket 6 places (4 required, 2 optional). Ensure installation requirements per
Section 2.5.11.6 are met.
Remove mounting plate, drill the marked hole-pattern (0.144 inch diameter holes) and rivet nut plates
(MS21047 or noted equivalent) with rivets (countersunk rivets). Acceptable hardware is identified in
Figure 3-74. Ensure that installed rivets are flush with the installation panel. Remove any burrs or excess
rivet heads. See Figure 3-74.
Perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
Install the mounting rack to the mounting plate using MS35206 or NAS601 screws (4 required,
2 optional).
1 2 SCREW
(4 REQ'D, 2 OPTIONAL)
115-00573-00 115-00574-00
REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A HOLD-DOWN CLAMP, GDC 74A
(PART OF 011-01011-00) (PART OF 011-01011-00)
MOUNTING SURFACE
1 2 NUTPLATE
RIVET (2X)
(4 REQ'D, 2 OPTIONAL)
NOTES:
WASHERS AN960-6; AN960-6L; NAS1149FN632P; NUTPLATES (M)F5000-06; (M)K1000-06;
OR NAS1149FN616P (M)K2000-06; OR F2000-06
OR
OR MS21042L06
2. IN THE HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION THE TWO CENTER HOLE FASTENERS ARE NOT
REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING.
Figure 3-74. Installation of the Mounting Rack to the Mounting Plate
NOTE
Use a #2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the GDC 74A to the rack, rather than hand
tightening the knurled screws.
Place the GDC 74A into its mounting rack and tighten the mounting screws firmly.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.5.1 Pitot-Static Connections to GDC 74A
The installer is required to fabricate pitot-static hose connections and attach the aircraft pitot pressure
source and aircraft static pressure source to the GDC 74A.
CAUTION
Check pitot-static connections for errors before operating the GDC 74A. Incorrect
plumbing could cause internal component damage. Observe the following cautions when
connecting pneumatic lines.
1. Make sure the aircraft static pressure port is plumbed directly to the unit static pressure input port
and the aircraft pitot pressure port is plumbed directly to the unit pitot pressure input port. Refer
to Figure 3-75 and Figure 3-76 (refer to Figure 2-11 for the location of the pitot and static ports
on the GDC 74A).
2. Seal the threads of pneumatic fittings at the connector ports. Use caution to ensure there are no
pneumatic leaks.
3. Use care to avoid getting fluids or particles into the pitot and static lines connected to the
GDC 74A).
Refer to Section 5 for system configuration, calibration and checkout.
TO PILOT'S PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
STATIC
PITOT
20
200 40
180
60
160
GDC 74A
80
140
120 100
Figure 3-75. Pitot-Static Connections for Single GDU Installation

190-00601-06 Rev. B
TO PILOT'S PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
STATIC
PITOT
20
200 40
180
60
160
GDC 74A #1
80
140
120 100
TO COPILOT'S PITOT-STATIC SYSTEM
STATIC
PITOT
GDC 74A #2
Figure 3-76. Pitot-Static Connections for Dual GDU Installation

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.2.5.2 Composite Aircraft GDC 74A ADC Installations
It is recommended to use an offset bracket to install the GDC 74A on composite aircraft. Brackets may be
manufactured in accordance with the requirements outlined in section 3.2.5 for manufactured custom
equipment and recommendations in this section.
Flange should be a minimum of 1 inch wide. Flange should have 0.159 inch diameter through holes 0.5
inches apart to provide flow through for the composite flox/epoxy and better adherence to the aircraft’s
inside skin surface, as shown in Figure 3-77.
0.5" PREFERRED
Figure 3-77. Drilling Hole-Pattern on Mounting Rack for Composite Aircraft

Scuff the flange, top and bottom, with 80 grit sand paper to provide better adherence to the epoxy/flox.
Place epoxy/flox mix onto the mounting location and press the support bracket flanges into it so that the
epoxy/flox mix flows through and over the flange holes. See Figure 3-78.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
FLOX / EPOXY MIX
Figure 3-78. Pressing Mounting Rack Into Flox/Epoxy Mix (Composite Aircraft)
Lay a sheet of fiberglass cloth on top of each flange, overlapping the flange by 0.5 inches. Lay up a
second sheet oriented 45° from the first sheet. Spread the epoxy/flox mix over the installation area so that
it is fairly smooth and even. See Figure 3-79
FIBERGLASS
CLOTH
Figure 3-79. Cloth lay-up for Mounting Rack (Composite Aircraft)

Allow the material to set and perform a structural validation per Section 3.3.
Install the mounting rack to the mounting plate using MS35206 or NAS601 (#6-32) screws (6 total). The
recommended torque is 12-15 inch lbs.
Place the GDC 74A into its mounting rack and tighten the mounting screws firmly. See Figure 3-80.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GDC 74 ADC
INSTALLATION
Figure 3-80. GDC 74A Final Installation Example (Composite Aircraft)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.2.6 GTP 59 Temperature Probe Mounting
The GTP 59 OAT Probe Kit (P/N 011-00978-00) contains the items listed in Table 3-3.
Table 3-3. OAT Probe Kit P/N 011-00978-00
Figure
Description Garmin P/N Qty Notes
3-81 Ref
1 Washer, Lock, Self-Sealing, 5/16 212-00026-00 1
2 Nut, 5/16”, Hex, Skirt 210-00055-00 1
3 Outside Air Temperature Sensor 494-00022-xx 1
- Screw, 4-40 x .250, PHP, SS/P, 211-60234-08 2 [1]
w/NYL
- Contact, Pin, Mil Crimp, Size 22D 336-00021-00 5 [1]
4 Ring Terminal 336-00021-00 0 [2]
[1] This item is not used for installation of the probe. It is used for termination of the wiring at the GDC
74A connector P741. Refer to Section 3.4 for additional details.
[2] Ring terminal is part of OAT sensor assembly.
Install the GTP 59 probe as shown in Figure 3-81 and as follows:
1. Determine a suitable location for the GTP 59 (refer to Section 2.5.11.7 for placement
information).
2. Drill a 5/16 inch hole through the aircraft skin at the desired location and install the GTP 59.
3. Prepare the surface. The metal body of the OAT probe should be grounded to the aircraft. The
installation requirements vary depending on the airframe material composition.
a. Aluminum airframe: When a mounting location has been found, prepare the inside surface of
the aircraft. Remove all paint from the contracting area and clean with degreaser.
b. Composite airframe: If possible, mount the OAT probe through a grounded metal strap or
band. Otherwise, mount the OAT probe in an area of the airframe that has a significant
amount of underlying metal foil or mesh. To ensure adequate conductivity, it may be
necessary to mount the OAT probe through a metal doubler. Use fasteners that allow a
conductive path to the airframe.
4. Mount the OAT probe on the prepared surface. Place the ring terminal (4) over the end of the
OAT probe (3). Insert the probe and ring terminal into the hole in the skin of the aircraft. Place
the washer (1) over the end of the end of the OAT probe on outside skin of the aircraft. Thread
the nut (2) onto the OAT probe. Holding the OAT probe on the inside, tighten the nut (2) to 100
inch lbs. ± 20 inch-lbs.
NOTE
The GTP 59 probe comes with a 10 ft cable. On some installation the wiring
provided with the GTP 59 may not be long enough and it may be necessary to
extend the wiring. Splicing or installing in-line connectors are acceptable
methods to extend the wiring.
5. Route the OAT probe cable to the GDC 74A.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
2 Ø0.312 IN. THRU
3 2
1
1
1 CABLE: M27500-22TE3V14
2 MATERIAL THICKNESS:
- 0.032 INCHES MINIMUM IF GTP 59 IS MOUNTED ON ALUMINUM AIRCRAFT SKIN.
- 0.020 INCHES MINIMUM IF GTP 59 IS MOUNTED ON ACCESS PANEL.
Figure 3-81. GTP 59 OAT Probe Installation

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.3 Construction and Validation of Structures
This section includes information necessary for testing load-carrying capabilities of equipment mounting
structures (such as shelves, mounting plates and mounting brackets) used to mount the GRS 77,
GDC 74A and GMU 44 (if required).
aircraft structure in accordance with the methods outlined in AC43.13-2A Chapter 2. After the structure is
installed, it should be tested as outlined in AC43.13-2A chapter 1 to verify that it is capable of supporting
the required loads.
The GRS 77, GDC 74A and GMU 44 (if mounted within the fuselage) installations must be capable of
withstanding the Static Test Load Factors listed in the corresponding tables below for at least three
seconds in each direction specified direction without damage or permanent deformation. In addition, there
should not be noticeable deflection of the GRS 77 mounting structure. Note that these required loads
differ somewhat from those normally required for equipment installations. The following tables show the
static test loads for the GRS 77, GDC 74A and GMU 44.
3.3.1 GRS 77 Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GRS 77, connector and mounting rack is 3.50 lbs. The static loads which
must be applied (Load Factor x 3.50 lbs.) will be the following:
Direction of Static Test Load

Load Factor (Load Factor x (GRS 77 + Mounting
Force Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 3.5) = 23.10 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 3.5) = 21.00 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 3.5) = 15.75 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 3.5) = 63.00 lbs
The combined weight of the GRS 77, connector, mounting rack and GRS 77 Universal Mount is 4.55 lbs.
The static loads which must be applied (Load Factor x 4.55 lbs.) will be the following:
Static Test Load
Direction of Force Load Factor (Load Factor x (GRS 77 + Mounting rack
and Universal Bracket Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 4.55 ) = 30.03 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 4.55) = 27.30 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 4.55) = 20.48 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 4.55) = 81.90 lbs
3.3.2 GDC 74A Static Test Loads

The combined weight of the GDC 74A, connector and mounting rack is 2.30 lbs. The static loads which
Static Test Load
Direction of Force Load Factor (Load Factor x (GDC 74A + Mounting
Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 2.3) = 15.18 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 2.3) = 13.80 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 2.3) = 10.35 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 2.3) = 41.40 lbs

Rev. B 190-00601-06
NOTE
Structural validation for the GMU 44 mounting structure is only required if the GMU 44
is mounted within the fuselage, and not if mounted in the wing or vertical stabilizer.
3.3.3 GMU 44 Static Test Loads
The combined weight of the GMU 44, connector and mounting rack is 0.50 lbs. The static loads which
Static Test Load
Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 0.50) = 3.30 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 0.50) = 3.00 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 0.50) = 2.25 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 0.50) = 9.00 lbs
The combined weight of the GMU 44, connector, mounting rack and GMU 44 Universal Mount is 0.72
lbs. The static loads which must be applied (Load Factor x 0.72 lbs.) will be the following:
Static Test Load
Rack Weight))
Downward 6.6 g (6.6 x 0.72) = 4.75 lbs
Upward 6.0 g (6.0 x 0.72) = 4.32 lbs
Sideward 4.5 g (4.5 x 0.72) = 3.24 lbs
Forward 18.0 g (18.0 x 0.72) = 12.96 lbs
3.3.4 Test Procedures

One method of determining the static load capability is as follows:
NOTE
Previously installed nut plates for mounting the GRS 77, GDC 74A or GMU 44 may be
used for testing. For installation on an existing aircraft panel (which will require no
removal) testing may be accomplished prior to installing nut plates using the method
below.
Mark and drill the holes where the mounting rack or Universal Mount will be installed, whichever is
applicable to the installation.
For a GRS 77 installation, install four #10-32 machine screws (see Figure 3-19 for Universal Mount and
Figure 3-28 for the Mounting Rack) in the corner holes used to attach the Universal Mount or Mounting
Rack to structure. For a GDC 74A installation, install four 6-32 machine screws (See Figure 3-74) in the
four corner holes, when attaching the GDC 74A mounting rack to existing structure. If special brackets
are used between the mounting rack and existing structure, the bracket attachment to structure must be
tested. For the GMU 44 installation, install two, three, or four pieces of hardware. If using the Universal
Mount in a side mount installation configuration, use two #6-32 machine screws, (stainless), as
demonstrated in Figure 3-56 (left side) and supported by a subsequent hardware discussion. If using the
Universal Mount in a bottom mount installation configuration, use four #6-32 machine screws (stainless),
as demonstrated in Figure 3-56 (right side) and supported by a subsequent hardware discussion. If
installing the GMU 44 Installation Rack directly to existing structure, use the three pan head screws that
arrive with the GMU 44 installation kit.
For testing downward loading, place shot bags or other suitable weights totaling the static test load weight
of the equipment plus the rack within the footprint outlined by the four screw holes.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Verify that there is no damage, permanent deformation or noticeable deflection of the structure during and
after three seconds.
Fasten a 36 inch loop of suitable material such as fishing line, braided wire, or other similar material
having a breaking strength of at least 150lbs, diagonally between two of the screws. Fasten another loop
diagonally between the other two screws, adjusting the length of the loop so it exactly matches the first.
Hook a calibrated force gauge through both loops and apply a sustained pull for at least three seconds in
each of the other three directions (upward, sideward and forward). Figure 3-82 illustrates the upward
static load test and Figure 3-83 illustrates the forward static load test. The sideward static load test is
similar to the forward load test, in a direction perpendicular to the forward load. The force applied must
correspond to the static test load calculated for unit and rack configuration being installed (the static test
load values are found in the tables above).
Examine the support structure carefully. If there has been damage, permanent deformation or noticeable
deflection, the structure is not suitable and must be replaced with one which is strong enough to withstand
the test loads. Examine all aircraft stringers, bulkheads and skin surfaces, which may have direct or
indirect contact with the fabricated parts. If it is determined that no damage or permanent deformation has
occurred, the structure is of sufficient strength and the GRS 77, GDC 74A or GMU 44 equipment may be
used to permanently mount the equipment.
Figure 3-82. Upward Static Load Test
Figure 3-83. Forward Static Load Test

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.4 Cabling and Wiring
The installation kits for the G600 system LRUs include connectors and crimp contacts. Use wire specified
in Section 2.4.2 for all G600 connections. Make the crimp connections with a crimp tool as specified in
Table 3-5.
Refer to the interconnection diagrams in Appendix F for the appropriate interconnections. Use 22 or 24
AWG wire for all connections except for power. Use 20 AWG for power/ground. Install the configuration
modules as described in Section 3.4.2.2. Once the cable assemblies have been made, attach the
backshell/connector to the rear of the mounting unit. Route the wiring bundle as appropriate. Avoid sharp
bends.
3.4.1 Wiring Harness
Allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and fabricates all of
the cables. All electrical connections to the G600 equipment are made through the following connectors
provided by Garmin:
• GDU 620 - a 37-pin D-Subminiature connector (female), a 50-pin D-subminiature connector
(female) and a 62-pin D-subminiature connector (male)
• GRS 77 – a 44-pin D-Subminiature connector (male)
• GMU 44 – a 9-pin circular connector (female)
• GDC 74A – a 78-pin D-Subminiature connector (male)
Construct the wiring harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections.
Cable lengths will vary depending upon installation. Strip all wires going to the connectors 1/8”. Insert
the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools. Insert the pin
into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawing in Appendix F. Verify that
the pin is properly engaged into the connector by gently tugging on the wire. Route and secure the cable
runs from the G600 LRUs away from sources of electrical noise.
Appendix B provides the pin-out information for all G600 LRUs. Required connectors and associated
hardware are supplied with the connector kits. See Appendix F for interconnect wiring diagrams.
CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before connecting the cables to the LRUs. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.
Table 3-4. Socket Contact Part Numbers

37-pin connector (P6201) 62-pin connector (P6203)
Configuration Module
Wire Gauge 50-pin connector (P6202)
20-24 AWG [1] 28 AWG [3] 22-28 AWG
Garmin P/N 336-00022-00 336-00022-01 336-00021-00
Military P/N M39029/63-368 N/A M39029/58-360
AMP N/A N/A 204370-2
Positronic N/A N/A MC8522D
ITT Cannon N/A N/A 030-2042-000

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Table 3-5. Recommended Crimp Tools
Hand 20-24 AWG (P6201/P6202) [3] 22-28 AWG (P741, P771, P6203)
Manufacturer Crimping Insertion/ Insertion/
Tool Positioner Positioner
Extract Tool Extract Tool
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M81969/14-02 M22520/2-09 M81969/14-01
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507 9502-11 N/A 9502-3 M81969/1-04
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 N/A N/A 995-0001-739 N/A
AMP 601966-1 N/A N/A 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K13-1 N/A K42 N/A
Astro 615717 615724 N/A 615725 N/A
Notes:
[1] Contacts listed are not to be used for configuration module wiring. Use the contacts supplied with the
configuration module when installing configuration module wires in P6202.
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to change without
notice.
[3] For configuration module pins, ensure that the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.
3.4.2 Backshell Assembly and D-Subminiature Connectors

The G600 LRU connector kits (P/N 011-01656-00 [GDU 620], P/N 011-00869-01 [GRS 77] and P/N
011-01010-01 [GDC 74A]) include Garmin backshell assemblies and Garmin ground adapter assemblies.
Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing
using the shield block ground kit. Table 3-6 lists Garmin part numbers for the D-sub connectors and the
backshell assemblies.
Table 3-6. Backshell Assembly
Figure 3-84
thru Figure Description Garmin P/N Notes
3-86 Ref
1 Backshell (P771) 125-00083-00 [2]
Backshell (P6201, P6203) 125-00084-00
Backshell (P741, P6202) 125-00085-00
2 Shield block (P771) 117-00147-00 [3]
Shield block (P741, P6201, P6202, P6203) 117-00147-01
3 Screw, 4-40 x.250, FLHP100°, SS/P, Nylon 211-63234-08 [3]
4 Slide Lock Spring N/A [4]
5 Slide Lock Lever N/A [4]
6 Screw,4-40x.375,PHP,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-60234-10 [2], [5]
7 Strain Relief (P771) 115-00499-02 [2]
Strain Relief (P741, P6201, P6202, P6203) 115-00499-03
8 Cover (P771) 115-00500-02 [2]
Cover (P6201, P6203) 115-00500-03
Cover (P741, P6202) 115-00500-04
9 Screw,4-40x.187,FLHP100,SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [2]
10 Connector, D-Sub, HD, 78 Pin (P741) 330-00366-78 [5]
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 44 Pin (P771) 330-00366-44
Connector, D-Sub, 37 Socket (P6201) 330-00502-37
Connector, D-Sub, 50 Socket (P6202) 330-00502-50
Connector, D-Sub, HD, 62 Pin (P6203) 330-00366-62

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 3-84
thru Figure Description Garmin P/N Notes
3-86 Ref
11 Multiple Conductor Shielded Cable As Required [6]
(See Interconnect Diagrams, Appendix F)
12 Shield Terminator As Required [6], [7]
13 Wire, Insulated (20-22 AWG), 3” max length As Required [6], [7]
14 Socket Contacts, #20 (P6201, P6202) 336-00022-00
Pin Contacts, #22D (P741, P771, P6203) 336-00021-00
15 Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG, 14-16 MS25036-149, [6], [8]
AWG MS25036-153,
MS25036-156
16 Screw, PHP, 8-32x.312", Stainless or Cad Plated MS51957-42, [6], [8]
Steel MS35206-242
17 Split Washer, #8, (.045" compressed thickness) MS35338-137, [6], [8]
Stainless or Cad-plated steel MS35338-42
18 Flat Washer, #8, .032" thick, .174"ID, .375" OD, NAS1149CN832R, [6], [8]
Stainless or Cad Plated Steel NAS1149FN832P
19 Silicon Fusion Tape 249-00114-00 [6]
[1] All items are applicable to P741, P771, P6201, P6202 and P6203 unless otherwise specified.
[2] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/N 011-00950-02 (P771), P/N 011-00950-03 (P6201, P6203)
and P/N 011-00950-04(P741, P6202).
[3] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kits P/N 011-01169-00 (P771) and P/N 011-01169-01 (P741,
P6201, P6202, P6203).
[4] Supplied as part of Slide Lock Kit P/N 330-90006-02 (P771), P/N 330-90006-03 (P6201, P6203)
and P/N 330-90006-04 (P741, P6202).
[5] Supplied as part of LRU Connector Kit P/N 011-01010-01 (GDC 74A), P/N 011-00869-01 (GRS
77) and P/N 011-01656-00 (GDU 620).
[6] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[7] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used instead of items 12 and 13.
[8] Not a Garmin part number.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.4.2.1 Shield Block Assembly Procedure
The parts for the connector and backshell assemblies for the GDC 74A, GRS 77 and GDU 620
installations are listed in Table 3-6. Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield
grounds at the backshell housing using the Shield Block ground kit. Table 3-6 lists Garmin part numbers
for the GDC 74A, GRS 77 and GDU 620 D-sub connectors and the backshell assemblies.
CAUTION
When mounting the slide lock, use only the specified screws (6). Do not attempt to use
the self-tapping screws supplied in the slide lock kit, as these will damage the backshell
housing.
Figure 3-84. Connector and Backshell Assembly

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure 3-85. Shielded Cable Preparation
Figure 3-86. Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Prepare all of the shielded cables as shown in Figure 3-85. Refer to Figure 3-86 for details of the shield
termination to the connector backshell.
1. At the end of the shielded cable (11), strip back a 2” maximum length of the jacket to expose the
braid. Remove this exposed braid. Carefully score the jacket 1/4” to 5/16” from the end and
remove the jacket to leave the braid exposed.
NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.
2. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (13) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. (See
Figure 3-85). AC 43.13 maybe a helpful reference for termination techniques.
NOTE
Solder Sleeves with pre-installed lead: A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03
Series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items 12 and 13. For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to Raychem installation procedure.
3. Slide a shield terminator (12) onto the prepared cable assembly (11) and connect the wire (13) to
the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The chosen size of solder sleeve
must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable and the wire (13) to be
attached.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
5. Crimp pins/sockets (14) onto the wires and terminate in the connector (10) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
6. For P6202, install the configuration module wires into the connector. Refer to Section 3.4.2.2,
steps 1 and 2 for instructions on installing the configuration module.
Assemble the backshell onto the connector:
10. Attach the Shield Block (2) to the backshell (1) by inserting the flathead screws (3) through the
holes on the Shield Block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (1). (See Figure
3-84).
CAUTION
When mounting the slide lock, use only the specified screws (6). Do not attempt to use
the self-tapping screws supplied in the slide lock kit, as these will damage the backshell
housing.
11. Place the slide lock (5) over the connector (10). While holding the slide lock in place, attach the
connector / slide lock to the backshell (1) by inserting two screws (6) through the holes on the
connector and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (1). (See Figure 3-84)
12. Wrap the cable bundle with Silicone Fusion Tape (19 or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
CAUTION
Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle may damage wires.
13. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief (7) across the cable bundle and secure using
the three screws (6).
Rev. B 190-00601-06
14. For P6202, install the configuration module into the connector backshell. Refer to Section 3.4.2.2
steps 3 through 6 for instructions on installing the configuration module into the backshell.
15. Insert the slide lock spring (4) into the backshell (1). Attach the cover (8) to the backshell using
two screws (9).
NOTE
Each tapped hole on the shield block (2) may accommodate only two ring terminals (15).
It is preferred that a maximum of two wires (13) be terminated per ring terminal. Two
wires per ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16
AWG (MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single wire is need for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.
16. Install ring terminals (15) onto the wires (13), grouping wires as appropriate for the connector.
17. Terminate the ring terminals to the shield block (2) by placing items on the pan head screw (16)
in the following order: split washer (17), flat washer (18), first ring terminal, second ring terminal
if needed, before finally inserting the screw into the tapped holes on the shield block.
3.4.2.2 Configuration Module Installation (P741, P771 and P6202 Only)
Table 3-7 and Table 3-8 list part numbers for the Configuration Module Kits, which are used with P741,
P771 and P6202 only.
Table 3-7. Configuration Module Kit – 011-00979-00 (for P741 and P771)
Figure 3-87 Ref Description Garmin P/N

1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
Table 3-8. Configuration Module Kit – 011-00979-02 (for P6202)
Figure 3-87 Ref Description Garmin P/N

1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Socket Contact, Crimp, #20 336-00022-01
Table 3-9. Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart
Color Function P741 Contact P771 Contact P6202 Contact

Black Ground 1 1 50
Red Vcc 21 17 49
Yellow Data 40 16 32
White Clock 60 31 33

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Assemble the configuration module:
1. Crimp socket contacts (4) onto each wire of the four-conductor wire harness (3). Strip 1/8” of
insulation from each wire prior to crimping.
2. Insert newly crimped socket contacts and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing
location as shown in Figure 3-87, Figure F-1, Figure F-2, and Figure F-3.
3. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the PCB board (1) making sure to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole provided in the spacer.
4. Plug the four-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB board (1).
5. With pad (2) in position, insert PCB board (1) into the backshell recess.
6. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted four conductor wire harness (3) is on the same
side of the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1), as shown in Figure 3-87.
Figure 3-87. Configuration Module Installation

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.5 Unit Replacement
Whenever removing or replacing units, remove power from the LRU by removing aircraft power or
opening the LRU circuit breaker.
3.5.1 GDU 620 Unit Replacement
3.5.1.1 Removal
1. Remove the six mounting screws from the bezel of the GDU 620.
2. Pull the GDU 620 far enough out from the instrument panel to access the three rear connectors.
3. Disconnect the rear connectors.
4. Remove the GDU 620.
3.5.1.2 Replacement
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure that there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any
damage.
2. Connect the rear connectors, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
3. Set the GDU 620 into place.
4. Install the six mounting screws into the bezel of the GDU 620.
NOTE
The installation configuration settings are stored in the configuration module and will be
retained when the GDU 620 is replaced with a new unit. User settings, such as map
orientation preferences, are stored internally and will be lost when the GDU 620 is
replaced with a new unit.
Original GDU 620 is Reinstalled
If the original GDU 620 is reinstalled, then no software loading is required. No configuration is
required. Verify that the configuration is correct using the previously completed checkout log in
Section 5.11.3.
New GDU 620 is Installed
If the GDU 620 is replaced with a new unit (new serial number) then software must be loaded. No
configuration is required.
NOTE
Upon first power-up after installing a new GDU 620, it is normal to see a series of
“LOADING…” messages appear on the screen. These messages indicate that the
GDU 620 is updating its configuration settings from the configuration module.
Continue to the GDU 620 Software Loading procedure in Section 5.4.1 followed by the Manifest
Configuration in Section 5.5.4, and the Configuration Module Update in Section 5.5.11.
GDU 620 Configuration Module is Replaced
If the GDU 620 Configuration Module is replaced, the GDU 620 will update the configuration
module from its internally-stored settings when the UPDT CFG soft key is pressed as described in
Section 5.5.11. Verify that the configuration is correct using the previously completed checkout log
in Section 5.11.3. If the GDU 620 is replaced at the same time as the Configuration Module, then the
System Setup will need to be performed per Section 5.5. To replace the configuration module,
reference Section 3.4.2.2.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.5.1.3 Return to Service
After removing and reinstalling the GDU 620 per the instructions above, a simple return-to-service check
should be performed.
1. Power up the GDU 620 in configuration mode. Verify that the configuration settings match those
recorded in the checkout log in Section 5.11.3.
2. Power up the GDU 620 in normal mode. Verify that there are no red-Xs and that no alerts are
present. If red Xs or alerts are present, troubleshoot using Sections 6.2 and 0.
3.5.2 GRS 77 Unit Replacement
3.5.2.1 Removal
1. Disconnect the GRS 77 connector.
2. Loosen the four Phillips thumbscrews with a screwdriver.
3. Gently lift the GRS 77 from the mounting plate (if the supports for the mounting plate are
removed, the GRS 77 must be recalibrated. See Section 5.6)
3.5.2.2 Replacement
1. Place the GRS 77 on the mounting plate, ensuring the orientation is correct.
2. Fasten the unit to the plate using the Phillips thumbscrews. Recommended torque is 22-25 inch
pounds.
3. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
4. Connect the connector to the GRS 77, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
Original GRS 77 is Reinstalled
If the original GRS 77 is reinstalled, then no software loading is required. Reference Table 3-10 to
determine whether recalibration is required.
New GRS 77 is Installed
If the GRS 77 is replaced with a new unit (new serial number) then software must be loaded per
Section 5.4.2. Reference Table 3-10 to determine whether re-calibration is required.
GRS 77 Configuration Module is Replaced
If the GRS 77 Configuration Module is replaced, the GRS 77 must be re-calibrated. Reference Table
3-10. To replace the configuration module, reference Section 3.4.2.2.
After removing and reinstalling the GRS 77, the following return-to-service checks should be performed.
1. Power up the G600 system with the GDU 620 in normal mode.
2. Verify that the GDU displays valid heading and attitude within approximately one minute. Note
that heading can remain invalid if the magnetometer is near a large metal structure such as a
hangar wall or if the magnetometer is close to a large ground power cart.
3. Verify that no unexpected alerts are present. If alerts are present, troubleshoot using Sections 6.2
and 0.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Table 3-10. GRS 77 Calibration Criteria
Calibrations Required
GRS 77 GRS/GMU Engine Run-up
Condition Pitch/Roll Magnetic Vibration
Offset Calibration Test
Section 5.6.1 Section 5.6.2 Section 5.6.5
GRS 77 AHRS was removed and/or
replaced. The mounting tray was NOT
None Required.
removed and the mounting tray bolts
were NOT loosened.
GRS 77 AHRS was removed and/or
replaced. The mounting tray WAS
removed and/or mounting tray bolts X X X
WERE loosened.
GRS 77 AHRS Configuration Module
X X X
was replaced.
3.5.3 GMU 44 Unit Replacement

3.5.3.1 Removal
1. Gain access to the GMU 44 magnetometer.
2. Unscrew the three screws that hold the GMU 44 to its mounting rack.
3. Carefully lift the GMU 44 from the rack.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness.
3.5.3.2 Replacement
1. Visually inspect the connectors to ensure there are no bent or damaged pins. Repair any damage.
2. Connect the wiring harness to the GMU 44.
3. Lower the GMU 44 into the rack and secure the plate with the three Phillips screws.
Original GMU 44 is Reinstalled
If the original GMU 44 was reinstalled, then software loading is not required. Recalibration is
required only if the mount for the magnetometer was changed. If the magnetometer mount was
changed, continue to Section 5.6.2 for the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration. After the
GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration is performed, the criteria in Sections 5.6.3 and 5.6.4 should
be used to determine whether the Heading Offset Compensation is necessary.
New GMU 44 is Installed
If the GMU 44 was replaced with a new unit (new serial number) then software must be loaded and
the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration must be performed. Continue to Section 5.4.3 for
software loading and Section 5.6.2 for the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration. After the
GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration is performed, the criteria in Sections 5.6.3 and 5.6.4 should
be used to determine whether the Heading Offset Compensation is necessary.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
After removing and reinstalling the GMU 44, the following return-to-service checks should be performed.
2. Verify that the GDU displays valid heading within approximately one minute. Note that heading
can remain invalid if the magnetometer is near a large metal structure such as a hangar wall or if
the magnetometer is close to a large ground power cart.
and 0.
3.5.4 GDC 74A Unit Replacement
3.5.4.1 Removal
1. Disconnect the pitot/static plumbing from the rear of the unit. Disconnect the single connector.
2. Loosen each thumbscrew on the hold-down clamp and remove the clamp.
3. Carefully remove the unit from its mount.
3.5.4.2 Replacement
1. Place the unit in the mounting tray.
2. Position the locking clamp and fasten using the thumbscrews.
3. Connect the pitot/static plumbing.
4. Inspect the connector and pins for damage. Repair any damage.
5. Connect the connector to the unit, ensuring that each slidelock is secured on both sides.
Original GDC 74A is Reinstalled
If the original GDC 74A is re-installed, then no software loading is required.
New GDC 74A is Installed
If a new GDC 74A (new serial number) is installed, then software must be loaded to the unit.
Continue to the GDC 74A Software Loading procedure in Section 5.4.4.
GDC 74A Configuration Module is Replaced
If the GDC 74A Configuration Module is replaced, the GDC 74A must be configured. Continue to
Section 5.5.7. To replace the configuration module, reference Section 3.4.2.2.
After removing and reinstalling the GDC 74A, the following return-to-service checks should be
performed.
2. Verify that the GDU displays valid air data within approximately one minute.
and 0.
4. Perform a leak check of the pitot-static system and observe the airspeed, altitude, and vertical
speed for proper operation.
3.5.5 Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI System Replacement (if installed)
The Mid-Continent electric ADI and associated LRUs must be replaced with the same P/N (including
panel tilt and lighting voltage) as the unit(s) being replaced. Except for the MD420 emergency power
supply, these units require no configuration when removed or replaced. On the MD420 battery module,
the Lighting Voltage Select switch must be set to match the lighting voltage of the unit that was removed.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
After removing and reinstalling the Mid-Continent electric ADI or associated LRUs, the following return-
to-service checks should be performed.
1. Power up the standby ADI system from aircraft power.
2. Verify that the power indicator flag is out of view.
3. After approximately three minutes verify that the attitude presentation is correct (the ADI may
need to be caged).
4. Remove aircraft power from the standby ADI system and press the STBY PWR button on the
standby ADI system. Verify that the power indicator flag remains out of view and the ADI
continues to run on battery power.
5. Verify that lighting is still provided to the ADI.
6. Restore aircraft power to the standby ADI.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.6 Weight and Balance
Weight and balance computation is required after the installation of the G600 system. Follow the
guidelines as established in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 10, Section 2. Make appropriate entries in the
equipment list indicating items added, removed, or relocated along with the date accomplished. Include
your name and certificate number in the aircraft records. Refer to the Table 3-11 below for unit
dimensions and center of gravity. A sample calculation is shown in Figure 3-88.
Table 3-11. Unit Weight and Balance Data
Item Weight Dimensions and CG
GDU 620 6.38 lbs (2.90 kg) See Figure C-2
GRS 77 2.80 lbs (1.27 kg) See Figure C-4
GRS 77 and Mounting Rack 3.50 lbs (1.59 kg) See Figure C-4
GRS 77, Mounting Rack and Universal Mount 4.55 lbs (2.07 kg) See Figure C-4and Figure C-11
GDC 74A 1.69 lbs (0.77 kg) See Figure C-5and Figure C-6
GDC 74A and Mounting Rack 2.04 lbs (0.93 kg) See Figure C-5and Figure C-6
GMU 44 0.35 lbs (0.16 kg) See Figure C-3
GMU 44 and Mounting Rack 0.50 lbs (0.23 kg) See Figure C-3
GMU 44, Mounting Rack and Universal Mount 0.72 lbs (0.33 kg) See Figure C-3 and Figure C-
Previous Aircraft Weight and Balance Useful Load Empty Weight C.G. Moment
Calculated 03/10/06 1093.3 2306.70 138.83 320233.96
Description of items removed from aircraft Weight Arm Moment

VSI 0.85 116.90 99.37
CDI 1.30 116.60 151.58
Clock and OAT 0.30 117.40 35.22
Sandel HSI 3.60 114.10 410.76
HSI Gyro Remote 4.90 181.00 886.90
Magnetometer (Old) 0.40 151.00 60.40
Attitude Indicator 2.20 114.50 251.90
Altimeter 1.10 116.10 127.71
Total removed 14.65 2023.84
Description of items added to aircraft Weight Arm Moment

GDU 620 6.38 114.10 727.96
GRS 77, mounting rack, and universal mount 4.55 181.00 823.55
GDC 74A and mounting rack 2.04 113.30 231.13
GMU 44, mounting rack, and universal mount 0.72 146.00 105.12
Standby attitude indicator 3.70 121.00 447.70
Standby altimeter 1.10 121.00 133.10
Total added 18.49 2468.56
Change 3.84 444.73
New Aircraft Weight and Balance Useful Load Weight C.G. Moment
6/21/2008 1089.46 2310.54 138.79 320678.69
Figure 3-88. Sample Weight and Balance Calculation

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.7 Electrical Load Analysis
An electrical load analysis should be completed on each aircraft prior to installation in accordance with
AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11 and recorded on FAA Form 337. Use the following values for computation:
Table 3-12. LRU Current Requirements
14 Volt Current Draw 28 Volt Current Draw
LRU
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GDU 620 3.9 A 5.4 A 1.9 A 2.7 A
GRS 77/GMU 44 600 mA 1.0 A [1] 300 mA 1.0 A [1]
GDC 74A/GTP 59 410 mA 480 mA 200 mA 235 mA
[1] Maximum current draw occurs momentarily at startup or when the supply voltage drops to
9 VDC
NOTE
Circuits should be protected in accordance with the approved data in this document (see
Appendix F for recommended G600 LRU circuit breaker ratings) and the guidelines in
AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11, Section 4.

190-00601-06 Rev. B

Rev. B 190-00601-06
4 System Interconnect
For pin out information for each G600 LRU, refer to Appendix B. For G600 interconnect information
refer to Appendix F.

190-00601-06 Rev. B

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5 System Configuration/Checkout
5.1 System Configuration Overview
Once the G600 system has been installed, the system must be configured for the particular installation. In
order to access all of the configuration pages an Installer Unlock Card (P/N 010-00769-60) must be
inserted into the GDU at the time the system is powered up. A summary of the steps for system
configuration and calibration follows:
• Gather the airframe-specific information as specified in Section 5.2.
• Perform the installation checks specified in Section 5.3.
• Load software into the G600 LRUs as specified in Section 5.4.
• Configure the G600 system for the particular installation, as specified in Section 5.5. This
includes setting the airframe-specific parameters and enabling interfaces to external systems.
• Enable optional features (this can be done at a later time).
• Perform an alignment and calibration of the GRS 77 AHRS as specified in Section 5.6. An engine
run-up test is also conducted to verify the mounting of the GRS 77.
• Perform a check of the pitot-static system to verify the installation of the GDC 74A air data
computer and standby instruments. The correct settings of the airspeed tape are also verified
during this check. Refer to Section 5.8.
• Perform the ground checks to verify the interfaces to external settings, as specified in Section 5.8.
• Verify all placards have been relocated, as specified in Section 5.9
• Perform the flight checks specified in Section 5.10.
• Update the aircraft documentation as specified in Section 5.11.
5.2 Required Airframe-Specific Information
This section only provides guidance for gathering the required information particular to each installation.
This information will be used for entering data on the Airframe Configuration page. Record the
information below in the configuration and checkout log sheet in Section 5.11.3.
5.2.1 PFD
The distance/speed (DIS.SPD) and altitude/vertical speed (ALT.VS) units can be configured to match a
particular installation. These units MUST be set to those currently used in the airplane.
The vertical speed tape range can be configured for several ranges. It is recommended that the ±2000 fpm
range be used; however, this is left to the installer’s discretion (e.g. a larger range may be desired if the
VSI being removed has a larger range).
The attitude indicator on the PFD has two pointers on the roll scale. When banking, one pointer indicates
the aircraft bank angle and the other pointer remains stationary. The pointer that indicates bank angle can
either point up (Sky Pointer) or down (Ground Pointer). This pointer must be configured to match the
Standby ADI being installed in the aircraft.
5.2.2 MFD
The default distance/speed (DIS.SPD) and altitude/vertical speed (ALT.VS) units can be configured to
match a particular installation. It is recommended that the same units as the PFD be used; however, this is
left to the installer’s discretion. The pilot will be able to change these units on the first AUX page on the
MFD.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.2.3 GDL 69 Audio Mute Speed
If a GDL 69A is connected to the GDU 620, the GDL 69A audio output will become muted whenever the
airspeed is below the MUTE SPEED value. If this is set to OFF, the GDL 69A will never be muted based
upon airspeed.
5.2.4 Airspeeds (PFD)
The information listed in Table 5-1 must be obtained for every installation. The POH/AFM column lists a
suggested location for obtaining this information. This information must be taken from the AFM or
POH for the airplane being modified.
NOTE
If the airspeed values are listed in the POH/AFM for both indicated airspeed (IAS) and
calibrated airspeed (CAS) use the values for IAS.
Table 5-1. Airframe Specific Configuration Data

POH/AFM
Item Description Note
Section
stall speed in landing Bottom of white arc on ASI
Vs0 2-Limitations
configuration
Vs1 stall speed in a specific flight Bottom of green arc on ASI
2-Limitations
configuration
Vfe maximum flap extended speed Top of white arc on ASI
2-Limitations - if more than one flap speed is given, use
the lowest speed
Vno normal operating speed Top of green arc/bottom of yellow arc on ASI
- if the aircraft has no yellow arc but has a
2-Limitations
green arc that extends to the red radial, set
Vno to the same value as Vne.
Vne never exceed speed 2-Limitations Red radial on ASI
GLIDE glide speed 3-Emergency Optional
Procedures - set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Vr reference airspeed Optional
4-Normal
- typically set to rotation speed
Procedures
- set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Vx best angle of climb speed Optional
4-Normal - set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Procedures (if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear down)
Vy best rate of climb speed Optional
4-Normal - set to 0 Kt (off) if not listed in the AFM/POH
Procedures (if there are two speeds listed (gear up/gear
down), use the speed listed for gear up)
Vle maximum landing gear set to 0 Kt (off) for fixed gear aircraft
2-Limitations
extended speed
Vmca minimum controllable airspeed Lower red radial on ASI of light twins
for twin engine aircraft with only 2-Limitations - set to 0 Kt (off) for single engine aircraft
one engine operational
Vyse single engine best rate of climb 3-Emergency Blue radial on ASI of light twins
speed for a twin engine aircraft Procedures - set to 0 Kt (off) for single engine aircraft
or 4-Normal
Procedures

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.3 Mounting, Wiring and Power Checks
Verify that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to the shield block of the connectors.
Check the movement of the flight and engine controls to verify that there is no interference. Ensure
wiring is installed in accordance with AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11.
Prior to installing any LRUs, the wiring harness should be checked for proper connections to the aircraft
systems and other avionics systems. Point to point continuity should be checked to expose any faults such
as shorting to ground. Any faults or discrepancies found should be corrected before proceeding.
After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify proper power
distribution to the LRUs. Any faults or discrepancies should be corrected at this time. Remove power to
the aircraft upon completion of harness checkout.
Upon completion of continuity and power checks, the LRUs can be installed. Each LRU must be installed
into its respective rack and secured. The units and accessories must be connected to the wiring harness.
Any additional connections, such as pitot/static plumbing, must also be accomplished at this time.
NOTE
Throughout the next section of this document, many screen shots and examples are used
to illustrate the software and checkout loading process. Although every effort has been
made to ensure accuracy of such examples, changes may occur. Always refer to the
Master Data List for the correct software versions and part numbers.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.4 Software Loading
The G600 LRUs come pre-loaded with software. However, to ensure that the latest software is loaded it is
recommended that software from a current G600 Software Loader Card P/N 010-00771-( ) be loaded into
each LRU. For dual GDU 620 installations the software loading procedures below must be carried out on
each GDU.
NOTE
A G600 Software Loader Card can also be created. Refer to Section 2.4.3 for additional
information.
Apply power to the aircraft and the G600 system.

5.4.1 GDU 620 Software Loading
1. Pull the PFD circuit breaker.
2. Insert the correct G600 Loader Card into the top card slot and Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) into the bottom slot.
3. While holding the ENT key, restore power by closing the PFD circuit breaker.
4. When the words appear in the upper center of the PFD/MFD, release
the ENT key.
5. Press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt:
6. The following item is displayed:
7. New software is loaded to the GDU. When complete, the following screen is displayed.
NOTE
The screen shown is for reference only. The actual number of files updated may vary.
8. Press any soft key to acknowledge the prompt, and the GDU starts in configuration mode.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.4.2 GRS 77 Software Loading
Go to the SOFTWARE UPLOAD page.
1. Highlight the GRS 77 software file. Ensure that GRS is shown in the LRU window as shown.
2. Press the LOAD soft key.

3. Select OK and press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt:
4. The software for the GRS 77 AHRS begins to load. Monitor the upload status as it progresses:
5. After the files finish loading, press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt:
6. Check the SUMMARY window to ensure the load is ‘COMPLETE’.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.4.3 GMU 44 Software Loading
1. Highlight the GMU44 software file. Ensure that the GMU appears in the LRU window as shown.

4. The software for the GMU 44 Magnetometer begins to load. Monitor the upload status as it
progresses:
5. After the files finish loading, press the ENT key to acknowledge the following prompt:

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.4.4 GDC 74A Software Loading
1. Highlight the GDC74 software file. Ensure that the GDC appears in the LRU window as shown.

4. The software for the GDC 74A Air Data Computer begins to load. Monitor the upload status as it
progresses:
5. After the files finish loading, press ENT to acknowledge the following prompt:

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.4.5 GDL 69/69A Software Loading (Optional)
1. Highlight the GDL69 software file. Ensure that the GDL appears in the LRU window as shown.

4. The software for the GDL 69/69A begins to load. Monitor the upload status as it progresses:
5. After the files finish loading, press ENT to acknowledge the following prompt:

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.4.6 Software Load Confirmation
1. Activate the cursor on the System Status page on the PFD.

2. Highlight the following items in the LRU window, and verify that the software part number and
version matches the information in found in the STC Master Data List 005-C0313-00 :
LRU SW OK LRU SW OK LRU SW OK

GDC _____ GDU [1] _____ GRS _____
GDC FPGA _____ GMU _____ GRS FPGA _____
GDL 69 _____ GMU FPGA _____
[1] For a dual GDU 620 installation GDU1 and GDU2 are shown. The software P/N for each GDU must
be verified.
3. De-activate the cursor.
NOTE
For dual GDU 620 installations, remove the G600 loader card from the top slot of the
first GDU 620 and repeat sections 5.4.1 through 5.4.6 using the second GDU 620. The
GDL 69/69A software does not need to be reloaded.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.5 System Setup
The GDU 620 configuration mode allows the G600 system to be configured for a particular installation.
Refer to Section 5 of the GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04 for details on using the
configuration mode. Record all of the settings in the checkout log sheet provided in Section 5.11.3. For
dual GDU 620 installations each GDU 620 must be set up as described herein.
Any required configuration settings for approved interfacing systems can be found in Appendix E. Any
required configuration settings for the G600 are found in this section.
If not already in configuration mode with the Installer Unlock Card, ensure that the Installer Unlock Card
P/N 010-00769-60 is installed in the GDU and cycle power to the GDU while holding the ENT key.
NOTE
After configuring all necessary items, ensure the configuration module is updated. Refer
to Section 5.5.11.
5.5.1 System Configuration

Go to the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. For each external data source that
is connected to the GDU 620, set the corresponding interfacing system PRESENT and select the type
accordingly.
5.5.2 Airframe Configuration
Go to the AIRFRAME CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Set the parameters to the values
determined in Section 5.2.
5.5.3 Lighting Configuration
The following guidance is recommended to help the installer determine a suitable setup. A test flight is
recommended upon completion of the setup.
NOTE
A description of the available adjustments can by found in Section 5 of the GDU 620
Installation Manual 190-00601-04.
NOTE
To accurately configure the lighting, the ability to adjust ambient light conditions is
required. The installer should be prepared to simulate complete darkness in the cockpit.
Simply covering the photocells may not allow the installer’s eye to properly judge
whether the display brightness is too bright or too dim for night use.
Go to the LIGHTING CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group and proceed according to
the Photocell Configuration or Dimmer Bus Configuration as appropriate for the installation:

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Photocell Configuration:
1. Set the RESPONSE TIME to a low level (such as 2) to allow the display to adjust more quickly
to light conditions.
2. It is recommended to start configuration with a SLOPE of 50%.
3. Minimize photocell input levels by simulating night conditions in the cockpit. Any other
instrument panel or cockpit lighting should be turned on for this adjustment. Seek uniform
consistency between display lighting, bezel/key lighting, and any other illuminated objects.
a) If a display/keypad is too bright, lower the minimum level and/or adjust the lighting slope to
achieve the desired brightness.
b) If the display is not bright enough, raise the minimum level to the desired brightness.
4. Simulate direct maximum sunlight in the cockpit (best if done outside).
a) Verify that the display produces maximum brightness on the backlight output level.
(~10,000).
5. Simulate average sunlight conditions in the cockpit (between 5000-7500 input level).
a) If the display is too bright or too dim, vary the SLOPE and/or OFFSET to achieve desired
brightness at mid-range lighting input levels.
b) Ensure that the lighting SLOPE, OFFSET and MINIMUM LEVEL still maintain the low-
light configuration achieved in Step 2. Repeat Step 2 if necessary to re-adjust night lighting
settings.
6. Adjust the RESPONSE TIME to smooth changes to brightness as required.
7. Adjust the KEY BACKLIGHT CUTOFF PERCENTAGE so that the key backlighting is
switched off in bright light.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Dimmer Bus Configuration:
1. Select the appropriate source voltage for the dimmer bus. Set the PHOTO TRANSITION % to 0
for initial dimmer knob calibration.
2. Set the RESPONSE TIME to a low level (such as 2) to allow the display to adjust more quickly
to dimmer bus input changes.
3. Simulate night conditions in the cockpit. Turn the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting and
observe the SOURCE INPUT LEVEL for corresponding change to the input level. Seek uniform
consistency between display lighting, bezel key lighting, and any other cockpit illuminated
information.
a) If a display/keypad is too bright, lower the minimum level and/or adjust the lighting slope to
achieve the desired brightness.
b) If the display is too dim, increase the minimum level to achieve desired levels.
c) Slowly adjust the dimmer bus knob to its maximum setting. Adjust the SLOPE and OFFSET
to obtain uniform consistency between display lighting, bezel key lighting, and any other
cockpit illuminated information over the full range of the dimmer bus.
d) Set the PHOTO TRANSITION % such that the photocell is used when the dimmer bus is
switched off (OVERRIDE will appear in the PHOTO TRANSITION % setting in the KEY
column).
e) With the dimmer bus OFF, adjust the PHOTO OFFSET to a value so that the display and
bezel keys remain readable.
4. With the dimmer bus OFF, simulate direct sunlight conditions in the cockpit (best if done
outside).
a) If the brightness is below maximum level, adjust the PHOTO SLOPE setting to
achieve maximum brightness (~10,000).
5. Adjust the RESPONSE TIME to smooth changes to brightness as required.
NOTE
The display and key lighting can independently be set to track the photocell or dimmer
bus.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.5.4 Manifest Configuration
Go to the MANIFEST CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. The manifest will be empty on
first use.
1. Wait for the GRS 77, GMU 44, GDC 74A and GDL 69/69A (if installed) to power up.
2. Press the MANIFEST soft key to automatically populate the manifest.
3. Ensure that the manifest contains the correct software part numbers and version numbers. Refer
to the Master Data List 005-C0313-00 for a list of approved version numbers.
CAUTION
If using the MANIFEST soft key to automatically enter the manifest information, ensure
that each LRU has the correct software loaded prior to pressing the MANIFEST soft key.
Failure to do so will result in an incomplete list of software part numbers and version
numbers being stored in the manifest. If an incomplete list of software part numbers or
version numbers is stored in the manifest, the MANIFEST soft key can be pressed again
to reflect the current information.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.5.5 Optional G600 Feature Activation
NOTE
In order to enable/disable features, an Installer Unlock Card (P/N 010-00769-60) is
required. However, it is possible to view the status of optional features without using an
Installer Unlock Card.
Ensure that any optional features are enabled. All optional features are activated using the FEATURE
CONFIGURATION page of the GDU 620.
5.5.5.1 ChartView
The GDU 620 can display Jeppesen charts using the optional ChartView feature, which must be activated.
This section describes how to activate the ChartView feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off.
NOTE
The ChartView Activation Card only can only be used on one GDU 620 display (for dual
GDU 620 installations a separate ChartView Activation Card must be used on each
GDU 620). A new ChartView Activation card must be used for each GDU 620 that has
the ChartView feature activated.
2. Remove the database SD card from the front SD card slot and insert a ChartView Activation Card
P/N 010-00769-50 (heavy aircraft) or P/N 010-00769-53 (light aircraft).
3. Enter configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for CHARTS to ChartView. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate ChartView.
6. When the ChartView feature is activated, “ChartView” will appear in the ACTIVE column.
NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be programmed on the ChartView Activation Card.
5.5.5.2 Altitude Preselect

When the optional Altitude Preselect feature is enabled, the GDU 620 can provide selected altitude
information to certain autopilots, allowing the autopilot to capture the selected altitude. This section
describes how to activate the Altitude Preselect feature in the GDU 620.
1. Turn the GDU 620 off.
2. Remove the database SD card from the front SD card slot and insert an Altitude Preselect
Activation Card P/N 010-00769-52.
3. Enter configuration mode on the GDU 620 by applying power to GDU 620 while holding the
ENT key.
Rev. B 190-00601-06
4. Go to the FEATURE CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group. Activate the cursor and
change the set value for Altitude Preselect to Enabled. Press ENT to confirm your selection.
5. Press ENT to acknowledge the prompt and activate the Altitude Preselect feature.
6. When the Altitude Preselect feature is activated, “Enabled” will appear in the ACTIVE column.
5.5.6 Audio Alert Configuration
The alert volume level has an initial default of 0 dB (maximum volume value). The volume of the
GDU 620 audio output must be set so as to ensure that aural messages are audible under all anticipated
noise environmental conditions.
1. Go to the AUDIO ALERT CONFIGURATION page in the SYS page group.

2. Activate the cursor and select the Audio Message type and then select the PLAY field. Press
ENT to play the message.
3. Using the VOLUME ADJUST field, adjust the volume so the alert message is audible under all
anticipated noise environmental conditions.
• Evaluate the audio messages for acceptable volume and intelligibility during both low and
high cockpit noise levels.
• Adjust the audio volume by moving the cursor to the VOLUME ADJUST field and rotating
small right knob. Turn the knob to the right to increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume.
5.5.7 GDC Configuration
The OAT probe type must be set for the GDC 74A.
1. Go to the GDC CONFIGURATION page in the GDC page group.
2. Activate the cursor and select the GTP 59 OAT probe type.
3. Deactivate the cursor.
5.5.8 GDL 69/69A Configuration
If installed, the GDL 69/69A must be configured to match the installation.
1. Go to the GDL 69 CONFIGURATION page in the GDL page group.
2. Activate the cursor and adjust the Antenna Gain and Cable Loss to match the installation. Refer
to the GDL 69/69A Installation Manual (190-00355-02) to determine the correct values.
3. Enable any Ethernet ports as required by the installation.
4. Deactivate the cursor.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
NOTE
The GDL 69/69A XM must be activated before use. If the XM activation has not already
been done, see the GDL 69/69A Installation Manual (190-00355-02) and the
GDL 69/69A XM Activation Instructions (190-00355-04).
5.5.9 Autopilot Configuration

If an autopilot is connected to the G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to provide the correct heading
and course datum information to the autopilot.
1. Go to the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION page in the FCS page group.
2. Press ENT to set the autopilot to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value according to Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. GDU 620 Autopilot Type Settings
Autopilot Model Autopilot TYPE Setting Notes
Century 2000 Century 2000
Century 21 / 31 / 41 Century 21/31/41
Century IV (AC) Century NSD 360 AC
Century IV (DC) Century IV
All Century A/Ps with Radio Couplers Century NSD 360 AC
Cessna 300 IFCS/400 IFCS/800 IFCS Cessna 400B AC
Cessna 400B Cessna 400B AC or DC [1]
Cessna 400B IFCS/800B IFCS Cessna 400B DC
Collins AP-106/107 Collins PN 101
Collins APS-65 APS-65
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KAP-100 King KI 525
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC-150 King KI 525
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC-250 King KFC 250 [2]
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KFC-325 King KFC 325 [2]
Sperry SPZ-500 Sperry SPZ-500
S-TEC 20/30/40/50/55/55X/60/65/60-2 King KI 525 [3]
[1] Select “Cessna 400B AC” or “Cessna 400B DC” based upon whether the autopilot is strapped for
AC or DC course/heading error inputs.
[2] If the King autopilot is installed with a KA 52 or KA 57 autopilot adapter, the TYPE must be set
to “King KI 525” and not the indicated setting.
[3] If the autopilot has been previously configured to operate with the "NSD-360”, the TYPE must be
set to “Century NSD 360 DC” and not “KI-525”. If the autopilot is configured to operate with any
other heading system it must be reconfigured to either NSD-360 or KI-525 (KCS-55) in order to
be compatible with the G600.
NOTE
Selecting the Autopilot TYPE will set default values for the autopilot. These values may
require adjustment based upon the flight check. Refer to Section 5.10.2 for additional
details.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.5.10 Flight Director Configuration
If an external flight director input is connected to the G600, the GDU 620 must be configured to enable
the display of the flight director. This section describes how to configure the GDU 620 to enable the
flight director.
1. Go to the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page in the FCS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and press ENT to set the flight director to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field and set the value according to Table 5-3.
Table 5-3. GDU 620 Flight Director Type Settings
Flight Director Flight Director
Manufacturer (Autopilot) Model TYPE Setting Notes
Cessna 400B IFCS/800B IFCS Manual Entry See 5.5.10.1 for settings
APS-65 Collins APS-65
Collins
AP-106/107 Manual Entry See 5.5.10.1 for settings
Honeywell KFC 150/200/225/275 King KI 256
(Bendix/King) KFC 250/325 Manual Entry See 5.5.10.1 for settings
55X S-TEC 55X
S-TEC
60-2/65 Manual Entry See 5.5.10.1 for settings
NOTE
Selecting the Flight Director TYPE will set default values for the flight director. These
values may require adjustment based upon the flight director check. Refer to Sections
5.8.5.3 and 5.10.2.1 for additional details.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.5.10.1 Flight Director Settings Using Manual Entry
If the current version of GDU 620 software does not have a configuration setting for the flight director,
the flight director may be set up manually. Specific configurations for the settings below will be included
in future revisions of the software.
NOTE
The values shown in the figure are for reference only. Refer to Table 5-3A for the correct
settings.
1. Go to the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page in the FCS page group.
2. Activate the cursor and press ENT to set the flight director to PRESENT.
3. Move the cursor to the TYPE field, select Manual Entry and press ENT.
4. Using the cursor, set the ACTIVE values according to Table 5-3A.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Table 5-3A. GDU 620 Manual Flight Director ACTIVE Settings
Flight Director /
Autopilot Model Parameter ACTIVE Setting [1] Notes
PITCH FILTER ABSOLUTE
PITCH FILTER TIME 0.2
PITCH + UP
PITCH V/DEG 0.040
Cessna PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
400B IFCS PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
800B IFCS PITCH Vref 0.000
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
ROLL FILTER TIME 0.1
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.030
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 0.150
Collins PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
AP-106 PITCH ANGLE MIN -15.0
AP-107 PITCH Vref 0.000
ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.150
ROLL ANGLE MAX 30.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
PITCH + DOWN
PITCH V/DEG 1.200
S-TEC PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
60-2 PITCH ANGLE MIN -10.0
65 PITCH Vref 0.000
with ST-670 ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
ROLL + LEFT
ROLL V/DEG 0.175
ROLL ANGLE MAX 20.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
PITCH + UP
Honeywell PITCH V/DEG 1.000
(Bendix/King) PITCH ANGLE MAX 15.0
KFC 250 PITCH ANGLE MIN -15.0
KFC 325 PITCH Vref 0.000
with KCI 310 ROLL FILTER ABSOLUTE
ROLL + RIGHT
ROLL V/DEG 0.750
ROLL ANGLE MAX 21.0
ROLL Vref 0.000
Notes:
[1] ACTIVE setting values were evaluated via flight test in a specific installation. If you are
experiencing performance problems with the settings listed above, please contact Garmin technical
support before making adjustments.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.5.11 Updating the Configuration Module
When all of the items have been configured as described in this section, go to the Software Upload page
and press the UPDT CFG soft key. Press ENT to confirm and update the configuration module.
NOTE
The softkeys shown below are only displayed if an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in
the GDU.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.6 GRS 77 AHRS Calibration and Check
The GRS 77 AHRS will not provide valid outputs until the following calibration procedures are
completed. The Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be carried out at a site that is determined to be
free of magnetic disturbances. If it is unsure whether the site is ‘clean’ the technician should verify that
the site is ‘clean’ by following the guidance provided in Section 5.7. The technician may skip Section 5.7
if the site condition is acceptable.
5.6.1 GRS 77 Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation
NOTE
In order to run the Pitch/Roll Offset Compensation Procedure, an Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required.
This procedure must be carried out with the engine off. Select the GRS page group on the MFD and go to
the GRS/GMU calibration page.
1. Level the aircraft to within ±0.25° of zero pitch and zero roll using the procedures in the Airplane
Maintenance Manual.
2. Initiate the AHRS Ground Pitch/Roll Aircraft Level compensation mode by performing the
following steps:
a) Select PITCH/ROLL OFFSET, then press the ENT key.
b) Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD and press the ENT key as each one is
completed or confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to
begin the procedure.
c) After several seconds, a new checklist appears in the lower half of the MFD. Press the ENT
key as each item is confirmed. When the CONFIRM AIRCRAFT IS LEVEL field is
blinking, press the ENT key to continue.
3. The result of the pitch/roll offset compensation is displayed on the MFD. If successful, the AHRS
records the required pitch and roll offsets, informs the operator of a successful conclusion and
returns to normal operation.
4. Press the ENT key to conclude this procedure.
5. For dual GDU 620 installations, repeat steps 2 through 4 with the other GDU.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.6.2 GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetometer Calibration
CAUTION
This Magnetometer Calibration Procedure should be carried out on a compass rose in
order to guarantee measurements free of environmental magnetic disturbances. However,
if a compass rose is not readily available a sight compass may be used. Attempting to
carry out this procedure on a typical ramp area may not yield a successful calibration.
The accuracy of the AHRS cannot be guaranteed if this calibration is not performed on a
magnetically clean and level surface. If the magnetic cleanliness of the proposed surface
is not known, it is recommended that the technician follow the guidance in Section 5.7.
NOTE
In order to run the Magnetometer Calibration procedure, an Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required.
NOTE
Performing the Magnetometer Calibration removes any stored heading offset values.
1. Start the aircraft engine in accordance with the aircraft Airplane Flight Manual or Pilot’s
Operating Handbook.
2. After aircraft engine startup, taxi the aircraft to a properly calibrated compass rose.
3. At the compass rose, align the aircraft to a heading of magnetic north (±5°).
NOTE
For dual GDU 620 installations, the following procedure must be performed on each
GDU 620. The calibration on each GDU can be done simultaneously. When performing
the steps below, follow the turn prompts on GDU1.
4. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
5. Restart the GDU in configuration mode.
6. Go to the GRS Page Group on the MFD and select the GRS/GMU Calibration page.
7. Activate the cursor and highlight the SELECT PROCEDURE window and select
MAGNETOMETER.
8. Press the ENT button.
9. Use the cursor to highlight the BEFORE CALIBRATION window.
10. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD and press the ENT key as each one is
completed or confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin
the procedure.
Rev. B 190-00601-06
11. The MFD display advises the operator when to turn the aircraft, when to stop, and when to turn
again.
12. Upon instruction to turn, taxi the aircraft in a right turn. After approximately 25° to 30° of turn
from the last heading, the MFD display advises the operator to stop the aircraft.
NOTE
Due to the difficulties in executing smooth, accurate turns the MFD may incorrectly
interpret a station and instruct to “HOLD POSITION” prior to full completion of a 30°
turn. If this scenario is encountered, it is best for the operator to ignore the “HOLD
POSITION” command and instead use outside references to complete the approximate
30° turn. Instead of using the MFD instruction to turn as a real-time indication of when to
turn, simply judge the 30° (±5°) turn increments of the aircraft by using the compass rose
radials. Dwelling at these 30° increments for the time recommended by the MFD should
result in successful calibration.
13. The MFD guides the operator to dwell at multiple headings around a complete circle.
NOTE
Due to high winds or excessive airframe vibration, the operator may encounter a
condition where the MFD restarts the 18-second countdown without full completion of
the previous countdown. If this is encountered more than once for a given station, the
operator should begin turning to the next station (approximately 30°). A minimum of 2
successful stations per quadrant is required, where a successful station is a full 18-second
countdown followed by instruction to move. Ensure that at least 2 stations per quadrant
are completed. Thus, it may sometimes be required to dwell at a station after a
countdown restart. A maximum of 20 stations is allowed for the entire calibration
procedure. If too many countdown restarts are encountered, the calibration will fail with
the message, “TOO MANY STATIONS.”
14. Repeat the turn-and-stop process until the MFD advises that a successful calibration is complete.
The GRS 77 AHRS then enters its normal operational mode. Press the ENT key on the GDU to
conclude this procedure.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.6.3 Compass Swing
After the Magnetic Calibration Procedure is completed, a compass swing must be performed to verify the
GRS 77/GMU 44 heading accuracy. If each heading displayed on the PFD (or PFD 1 and PFD 2) is
within ±3° of the actual heading no further adjustments are necessary. Otherwise, additional adjustments
are required, as described below the procedure in Section 5.6.4 must be performed.
1. With all of the aircraft and avionics systems powered and operating normally, position the aircraft
on a known compass rose at a heading 360° (North), or select a level and magnetically clean
location and use a sight compass to position the aircraft to a heading of 360° (North).
2. Record the heading displayed on the PFD (or PFD1 and PFD2 for a dual GDU installation) in
Table 5-4. Also record the heading displayed on the standby compass (these values can be used
to complete the standby compass calibration card).
3. Repeat step 2 for each of the headings listed in Table 5-4.
Table 5-4. Heading Verification
PFD or PFD1 (for dual GDU installations)
Displayed PFD
Heading Heading Error Stby Compass
or PFD1 Heading
(A) (A-B) Heading
(B)
360° (North)
30°
60°
90° (East)
120°
150°
180° (South)
210°
240°
270° (West)
300°
330°
PFD2 (for dual GDU installations only)

Displayed PFD2
Heading Heading Error
Heading
(A) (A-B)
(B)
360° (North)
30°
60°
90° (East)
120°
150°
180° (South)
210°
240°
270° (West)
300°
330°
4. Calculate the heading errors by subtracting the displayed (B) value from the actual (A) value for
each of the headings in Table 5-4.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
FOR SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS:
1. If all calculated heading errors for the PFD are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation is
acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 installation. Proceed to Section
5.6.5.
2. If all calculated heading errors are between -5° and +5° inclusive, the heading offset procedure
can be used to correct the GMU 44 installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.4.
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than –5°, DO NOT perform
the heading offset procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 installation has been
physically corrected.
3. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which the GMU 44 must be physically
rotated to correct the installation.
4. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 by the amount calculated in the previous step. When
looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values, and counterclockwise for
negative values.
5. After physically correcting the GMU 44 installation, repeat the procedures in Sections 5.6.2 and
5.6.3.
FOR DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS:
The installation of both GMU 44s must be verified individually using GDU1 for GMU 44 No. 1, and
GDU2 for GMU 44 No. 2.
1. If all calculated heading errors for PFD1 are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation of the
No. 1 system is acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 No. 1
installation. Go to step 6 for No. 2 system checks, and proceed to Section 5.6.5 for further tests to
be performed on GDU1.
can be used to correct the GMU 44 No. 1 installation. Go to step 6 for No. 2 system checks, and
proceed to Section 5.6.4 for further tests to be performed on GDU1.
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than –5°, DO NOT perform
the heading offset procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 No. 1 installation has
been physically corrected.
3. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5° / less than -5°, calculate the average error by
adding all PFD1 heading errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which GMU 44 No. 1
must be physically rotated to correct the installation.
4. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 No. 1 by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values, and counterclockwise
for negative values.
5. After physically correcting the GMU 44 No. 1 installation, repeat the procedures in Sections 5.6.2
and 5.6.3 on PFD 1 only.
6. If all calculated heading errors for PFD2 are between -3° and +3° inclusive, the installation of the
No. 2 system is acceptable and no further work is required to correct the GMU 44 No. 2
installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.5 for further tests to be performed on GDU2.
can be used to correct the GMU 44 No. 2 installation. Proceed to Section 5.6.4 for further tests to
be performed on GDU2.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
NOTE
If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5 degrees / less than –5 degrees, DO
NOT perform the heading offset procedure in Section 5.6.4 until the GMU 44 No. 2
installation has been physically corrected.
8. If at least one Heading Error (A-B) is greater than 5 degrees / less than -5 degrees, calculate the
average error by adding all PFD2 heading errors and dividing by 12. This is the angle by which
GMU 44 No. 2 must be physically rotated to correct the installation.
9. Modify the installation to rotate the GMU 44 No. 2 by the amount calculated in the previous step.
When looking down at the GMU 44, rotate clockwise for positive values, and counterclockwise
for negative values.
10. After physically correcting the GMU 44 No. 2 installation, repeat the procedures in Sections 5.6.2
and 5.6.3 on PFD 2 only.
5.6.4 Heading Offset Compensation
NOTE
The heading offset compensation procedure is not required if it was determined in
Section 5.6.3 that all calculated heading errors are between -3° and +3° inclusive.
If at least one heading error was greater than 3° or less than -3°, but all heading errors
were between -5° and +5° inclusive, use the heading offset compensation procedure to
correct the errors. Otherwise, physically correct the appropriate GMU 44 installation
BEFORE performing the heading offset compensation procedure.
NOTE
If heading offset compensation procedure must be performed on both GDU1 and GDU2
it is permitted to run the procedure below simultaneously on each GDU.
NOTE
In order to run the Heading Offset Compensation procedure an Installer Unlock Card
(P/N 010-00769-60) is required.
NOTE
Magnetometer Calibration procedure must be performed BEFORE the Heading Offset
Compensation procedure. Performing the Magnetometer Calibration removes any stored
heading offset values.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
1. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
2. Restart the appropriate GDU in configuration mode.
3. Go to the GRS Page Group on the MFD and select the GRS/GMU Calibration page.
4. Select the HEADING OFFSET procedure and press the ENT key.
5. Follow the checklist items displayed on the MFD, and press the ENT key as each one is
completed or confirmed (press ENT on each GDU if the procedure is being run simultaneously
on both GDUs). When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the
procedure.
6. The MFD display instructs the operator to turn to headings of 360°, 90°, 180° and 270°. Press the
ENT key to confirm each heading.
7. When the operator has successfully completed the heading offset procedure, CALIBRATION
SUCCESSFUL will flash. Press the ENT key on the GDU to conclude this procedure.
5.6.5 Engine Run-Up Vibration Test
NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card is not required to run the Engine Run-Up Test.
NOTE
The calibration procedures in Sections 5.6.1 through 5.6.4 do not have to be completed
prior to performing this procedure.
Initiate the AHRS engine run-up vibration test procedure by performing the following steps:
1. Select the ENGINE RUN-UP TEST procedure and press the ENT key.
completed or confirmed. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin
the procedure.
190-00601-06 Rev. B
3. The MFD display instructs the operator to gradually increase power from idle to full throttle and
back to idle over a period of 1-2 minutes.
4. When the operator has completed the engine run-up and the engine is back to an idle setting,
press the ENT key to indicate that the process is complete. When this is done, the TEST
COMPLETE field stops blinking.
5. The MFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the vibration test. If the test
fails, the specific measurements causing the failure are identified and numeric values are
displayed on the MFD.
6. Press the ENT key on the MFD to conclude this procedure.
NOTE
If failures are indicated, the engine run-up test may be repeated at most two more times.
If the test does not pass after three attempts, then the installation should not be considered
reliable until the source of the vibration problem is identified and remedied. In the event
of repeated failure of the engine run-up test, record the values that are reported to be out
of range for future reference.
The following are potential causes for failure of the engine run-up test:
1. Vibration motion of GRS 77 and/or GMU 44 caused by neighboring equipment and/or supports.
2. Mounting screws and other hardware for GRS 77 and/or GMU 44 not firmly attached.
3. GRS 77 connector not firmly attached to unit.
4. Cabling leading to GRS 77 or GMU 44 not firmly secured to supporting structure.
5. An engine / propeller that is significantly out of balance.
The aircraft can now be taxied back and the engine can be shut down for final testing. Following a
successful AHRS calibration, when the PFD powers up in normal mode, the AHRS attitude and heading
information displayed should become valid within 1 minute of power-up.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.6.6 Magnetometer Interference Test
NOTE
An Installer Unlock Card is not required to run the Magnetometer Interference Test.
With the GDU 620 in configuration mode, initiate the GRS 77 AHRS magnetometer interference test
procedure by performing the following steps:
1. Select the GRS page group on the MFD, go to the GRS/GMU calibration page, select the MAG
INTERFERENCE TEST procedure and press the ENT key.
completed or confirmed.
NOTE
The third item on the checklist instructs the operator to prepare a detailed test sequence
list with precise start and stop times for exercising all electronic devices. Only the
electronic devices that are likely to affect the operation of the GMU 44 magnetometer
need be included in the test sequence. The list of relevant electronic devices varies from
aircraft to aircraft. This sequence is the same sequence developed for the magnetometer
interference survey in Section 3.2.4.3.
3. When the CALIBRATE field is blinking, press the ENT key to begin the procedure (as soon as
the ENT key is pressed this time, a CALIBRATION PROCEDURE window will appear). Have a
stopwatch ready to begin recording the elapsed time.
4. The operator should carry out the actions called for in the prepared test sequence.
NOTE
It is important that all actions are carried out in the order and at the precise elapsed time
as specified in the prepared test sequence.
5. After the “Begin test sequence” white text appears, wait approximately five seconds and perform
each of the actions listed in the test sequence table (refer to Table G-1 in Appendix G for an
example of a test sequence).
6. When the test sequence is completed, wait approximately five seconds and then press the ENT
key to complete the test. When this is done, the TEST COMPLETE field stops blinking.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
7. The MFD informs the operator if the installation has passed or failed the magnetometer
interference test.
a) If the test passes, no further action is required.
b) If the test fails, the installation should be considered unreliable until the source of magnetic
interference is identified and remedied. The magnetometer interference test must be repeated
until passed. When the magnetometer interference test fails, record the three magnetometer
maximum deviation values and their corresponding timestamps. A maximum deviation value
greater than 5.0 milligauss in either the X or Y axes, or greater than 8.0 milligauss in the Z
axis indicates a problem that must be resolved. Compare the corresponding timestamps with
the prepared test sequence to identify which action produced the problem. Contact Garmin
for assistance in resolving the problem.
NOTE
Two common reasons for a failed magnetometer interference test are:
• New equipment is installed in close proximity to the GMU 44 magnetometer.
• An existing or new electronic device has become grounded through the aircraft structure
instead of via the proper ground wire in a twisted shielded pair, especially if the ground return
path through the aircraft structure passes near the GMU 44.
8. Press the ENT key on the MFD to conclude this procedure.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.7 Site Evaluation of Magnetic Disturbances (Optional)
NOTE
Typically, a compass rose is an acceptable location to perform the magnetometer
calibration procedure. However, because not all compass roses are well maintained, even
an existing compass rose should be regularly evaluated using the method described here
to determine if it is free of magnetic disturbances. If evaluation of an existing compass
rose indicates that magnetic disturbances are present, then an alternative location must be
found to perform the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure.
NOTE
In order to perform the Site Evaluation for Magnetic Disturbances, an Installer Unlock
Card (P/N 010-00769-60) is required.
A G600-equipped airplane can be used to evaluate a candidate site for magnetic disturbances and
determine whether it is a suitable location to perform the magnetometer calibration procedure. The
magnetometer calibration procedure itself contains the logic to simultaneously survey the location for
magnetic cleanliness while it is computing the magnetometer calibration parameters.
The G600-equipped airplane used to evaluate the site must have already completed the Pitch/Roll offset
compensation procedure (Section 5.6.1). However, prior completion of the Magnetometer Calibration
Procedure (Section 5.6.2) is not required.
In order to evaluate a candidate site, the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure must be performed twice:
once turning clockwise around the site, and once turning counter-clockwise. Both times, the procedure
should be conducted as described in Section 5.6.2 of this document, with the exception of the direction of
turns around the site.
NOTE
Although Section 5.6.2 indicates that the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure should be
performed by making a series of clockwise turns around the site, the procedure can also
be performed by making counter-clockwise turns for the purpose of evaluating the site
for magnetic disturbances.
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in each clockwise and counter-clockwise
direction, the PFD displays the “CALIBRATION SUCCESSFUL / SITE IS CLEAN” message, then the
candidate site is sufficiently free of magnetic disturbances and is acceptable for performing the
Magnetometer Calibration Procedure. It is important to obtain successful results in both the clockwise and
counter-clockwise directions to ensure that the magnetometer sweeps over a large enough area at the
candidate site.
If, upon completion of the Magnetometer Calibration Procedure in either of the two directions, the PFD
displays either the “MAG FIELD AT SITE NOT UNIFORM”, or “MAG FIELD AT SITE DIFFERS
FROM IGRF MODEL” message, then the site contains magnetic disturbances that are too large and an
alternate site should be used for the GRS 77/GMU 44 Magnetic Calibration procedure.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8 Ground Checks
The steps that are not applicable to a particular installation may be skipped.
NOTE
Throughout the checkout section references are made to particular GDU 620 functions. If
the function is not available, ensure that the GDU 620 has been configured correctly as
described in Section 5.5.
5.8.1 Database Check
1. Ensure a G600 database card is inserted in the bottom slot of the GDU 620.
2. Turn on power to the G600 system.
3. Verify all self-tests pass on the main startup screen.
NOTE
Databases that have expired will be displayed in yellow text on the MFD startup screen.
Databases will also be yellow until a valid GPS Position has been acquired.
4. Verify the expiration on the Jeppesen NavData Database.

5. If activated, verify the expiration of the Electronic Charts Database.
5.8.2 Pitot-Static, ADC and Airspeed Tape Settings Checks
Verify correct operation of the GDU 620 altitude and airspeed tapes, standby altimeter and standby
airspeed indicator using a pitot/static ramp tester. The static port and airspeed tape / altimeter must be
verified in accordance with Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) § 91.411 and Part 43
Appendix E.
NOTE
When conducting air data tests it is possible to induce attitude and/or heading errors on
the GDU 620 – this is normal system behavior. Refer to Section 6.2 for additional
details.
NOTE
The airspeeds referenced in the following steps are those determined in Section 5.2.4.
NOTE
For a dual GDU 620 installation, this check must be completed for each GDU 620 – both
may be verified at the same time.
Verify correct operation of the GDC 74A ADC as follows:
1. Turn on power to the G600 system.
2. Verify all self-tests pass on the main startup screen.
3. Check the outside air temperature (OAT) measurement shown on the PFD to ensure it reads
ambient temperature.
4. Using a pitot/static ramp tester increase the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at
the bottom of the white band (VS0). Verify that the bottom of the white arc/band on the ASI
and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
5. Only applicable to twin engine aircraft: Increase the airspeed to the lower red radial (Vmca).
Verify that the red radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
6. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the bottom of the green band
(VS1). Verify that the bottom of the green arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at
the same airspeed value.
7. Only applicable to twin engine aircraft: Increase the airspeed to the blue radial (Vyse) Verify
that the blue radial on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
8. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the white band (Vfe).
Verify that the top of the white arc/band on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same
airspeed value.
9. Change the airspeed until the PFD airspeed tape pointer is at the top of the green band /
bottom of the yellow band (Vno). Verify that the top of the green arc/band on the ASI and
PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
10. Increase the airspeed to the upper red radial/top of yellow arc (Vne). Verify that the red radial
on the ASI and PFD airspeed tape are at the same airspeed value.
11. Decrease the airspeed to zero, stopping at all of the airspeeds listed in the Table 5-5
(airspeeds above Vne should not be checked). Verify that the PFD and standby airspeed
indicator display the values within the tolerances indicated:
Table 5-5. Airspeed Test Points

Test Set air speed PFD Allowed Tolerance Standby ASI and PFD
(knots) (knots) Tolerance (knots) [1]
50 ±5.0 ±5.0
80 ±3.5 ±5.0
100 ±2.0 ±5.0
120 ±2.0 ±5.0
150 ±2.0 ±5.0
180 ±2.0 ±5.0
210 ±2.0 ±5.0
250 ±2.0 ±5.0
290 ±3.0 ±5.0
[1] This is the maximum allowable difference between the standby airspeed indicator and the
PFD airspeed tape.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8.3 GPS Receiver Interface Test
The GDU 620 receives position and flight plan and navigation data from an external GPS navigation
source. This check verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Select GPS (or GPS1) as the navigation source for the PFD CDI.
2. Turn on the external GPS Navigator (GPS1 for installations with dual navigators). If there are
dual GPS navigators installed, ensure the second GPS navigator is switched off.
3. For a 400W/500W Series unit, while on the power-up self-test page verify that the GDU 620 CDI
displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
For a GNS 480 unit, while it is going through its power-up sequence, verify that the GDU 620
CDI displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
4. Wait until the navigator acquires a position before proceeding.
5. Review the active alerts on the GDU 620 (if any) and verify that the GPS1 PPS FAIL (GPS2 PPS
FAIL if using GPS 2) alert is not present.
6. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigation source.
7. Verify that the MFD is not displaying the message NO GPS POSITION. Verify that the active
waypoint displayed in the PFD WPT field is the same as the active waypoint on the navigator.
8. Wait one minute, and verify that the alert “AHRS1 GPS –AHRS1 not receiving any GPS
information” is not displayed on the MFD by pressing the ALERTS soft key and verifying all
active alerts.
9. Verify that the flight plan is displayed on the GDU 620 using the flight plan (FPL) function.
10. On the GPS navigator, enter OBS mode.
11. Press the CRS button on the PFD and adjust the course using the PFD knob. Verify that the
course to the active waypoint changes as the PFD course pointer is rotated.
12. Exit OBS mode on the navigator.
13. If dual GPS receivers are installed, power off GPS 1 and power on GPS 2. Select GPS2 on the
CDI and repeat steps 6 through 12.
5.8.4 Navigation Receiver Interface Test
The GDU 620 can receive bearing and deviation information from a navigation receiver. This check
verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that the external navigation receiver (VLOC1 for installations with dual NAVNAV
receivers) is turned on. If there are dual NAVNAV receivers installed, ensure the second
NAVNAV receiver is switched off.
2. Select the navigation receiver (or navigation receiver 1) as the navigation source for the PFD
CDI.
3. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (for this check it is not necessary that a valid
localizer signal is being received).
4. Verify that the CDI on the PFD displays LOC (or LOC 1/LOC 2 for installations with dual
navigators).
5. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2. Select
navigation receiver 2 on the CDI. Repeat steps 3 through 4.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.8.5 Autopilot Interface Test
The GDU 620 can interface with various autopilots. Before proceeding with the autopilot interface tests,
verify that the GDU 620 has been configured for the installed autopilot and flight director, if applicable,
as defined in Section E.3. Only those interfaces which are directly affected by the G600 STC are covered
by this manual; if any other autopilot modifications were performed, check them in accordance with the
autopilot installation manual.
WARNING
It is important that the GDU 620 be properly configured in order to prevent signals from
the GDU 620 from damaging the autopilot computer. Refer to Section E.3.
5.8.5.1 Autopilot Engagement Test

This section verifies that the autopilot can be engaged.
1. Power up the G600 and other aircraft systems. Allow the GDU 620 to obtain a valid heading,
attitude, altitude, and GPS location (from the navigator).
2. Engage the autopilot. If the autopilot cannot be engaged, troubleshoot it in accordance with the
autopilot installation manual.
3. Disengage the autopilot.
5.8.5.2 Flight Director Test
This section verifies that the flight director interface between the autopilot computer and the GDU 620 is
functional. This test needs to be performed only if the flight director outputs from the autopilot computer
have been connected to the GDU 620, and if the GDU 620 supports that flight director. For dual-G600
installations, the flight director should be wired to each GDU, and each GDU should be configured
separately for that flight director. Refer to Section E.3 for instructions on configuring the GDU 620 to
display the flight director.
1. Activate the flight director with the autopilot in pitch/roll or heading/altitude mode. It is not
necessary for the servos to be engaged for this test.
2. Verify that the flight director is displayed on the GDU 620. If the flight director is not displayed,
troubleshoot using the guidelines in Table 6-3.
3. With the GDU 620 in normal mode and the flight director displayed, command the flight director
to pitch up. Verify that the command bars move up.
4. Command the flight director to pitch down. Verify that the command bars move down.
5. Command the flight director to roll right. Verify that the command bars move to the right.
6. Command the flight director to roll left. Verify that the command bars move to the left.
7. Press the Go Around button, if present. Verify that the command bars center laterally and move
to command a climb.
8. If the expected movement of the command bars does not occur, troubleshoot using the guidelines
in Table 6-3.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8.5.3 Flight Director Offset Calibration (if required)
NOTE
If an ADI with a flight director presentation is installed on the copilot’s side, the flight
director for this ADI must be aligned to its aircraft symbol before running this G600
flight director offset calibration procedure. Refer to the ADI/autopilot manufacturer’s
documentation for instructions on ADI flight director alignment.
The previous section verified the wiring between the flight director/autopilot computer. This section
describes how to correct any offset that may be present in the flight director command bars.
1. Center the heading bug on the GDU 620 by pressing the knob on the PFD.
2. Activate the autopilot in heading and altitude hold mode.
3. Observe the position of the flight director bar in relation to the aircraft icon the GDU 620 attitude
indicator.
4. If the flight director command bars are offset from the aircraft icon in the pitch axis, take note of
the number of degrees of offset for adjustment.
NOTE
Some autopilots have a flight director pitch adjustment that is used to correct for parallax
errors in mechanical steering horizons. If possible, correct any flight director offset using
the autopilot adjustment before making changes to the GDU configuration.
5. Ensure an Installer Unlock Card is inserted in the GDU 620.

6. Start the GDU 620 in configuration mode and navigate to the FLIGHT DIRECTOR page in the
FCS page group.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
7. Change PITCH V Ref as needed. Note that the V/DEG ratio for the flight director is displayed on
the same page. In the sample screenshot, the PITCH V/DEG is 0.217. Changing the PITCH V
ref by 0.217 would move the flight director by one degree.
8. The resulting FD Pitch can be read at the bottom of the screen. Adjust the PITCH V ref until the
FD Pitch is 0.00 ± 0.25°.
9. Restart the GDU 620 in normal mode and verify that the flight director is matched to the aircraft
icon.
10. For dual-GDU 620 systems, change PITCH V ref on GDU 620 #2 to the same value as PITCH V
ref on GDU #1.
5.8.5.4 Altitude Preselector Test
This test verifies that the altitude preselector between the GDU 620 and the autopilot is functional. For
dual-G600 installations, the altitude preselector input to the autopilot is connected only to the pilot’s
GDU.
NOTE
This test is applicable only for S-TEC autopilots which have the RS-485 altitude
preselector input connected to the GDU 620. The GDU 620 also must be configured for
the altitude preselector option. Reference section 5.5.5.2 for instructions on configuring
the GDU 620 for the altitude preselector.
1. Power up the GDU 620 in normal mode and wait until valid air data is displayed.
2. On the GDU 620, set the selected altitude to match the displayed field elevation plus
approximately 1000 feet.
3. Engage the autopilot in HDG mode. Press ALT and VS simultaneously to select altitude select
mode.
4. Verify that ALT and VS are displayed on the autopilot. If ALT is not displayed, the autopilot is
not receiving the RS-485 altitude preselector data from the GDU 620. Troubleshoot using the
guidelines in Table 6-3.
190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8.5.5 Heading and Course Error Test
This section verifies that the heading and course error interface between the GDU 620 and autopilot
computer is functional. For dual-G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU is wired to the autopilot, and
the following instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU.
1. Start the GDU 620 in configuration mode by holding the ENT key until INITIALIZING
SYSTEM appears on the screen. Navigate to the Autopilot Test page.
2. Engage the autopilot in heading mode.

3. On the GDU 620, set the HDG/CRS TEST to ACTIVE. In configuration mode, changes are
made by turning the outer and inner FMS knob on the lower right side of the display.
4. Set the DESIRED HEADING to 10° and press the ENT key.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the right.
7. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the left.
NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the opposite direction to what is expected, reverse
the LEFT/RIGHT polarity of the HDG+ setting on the AUTOPILOT
CONFIGURATION page. Refer to Table 5-7 in Section 5.10.2.2 for a description of the
autopilot configuration settings.
9. Set the lateral flag and superflag to VALID.
10. Set the DESIRED COURSE to 20° and press the ENT key.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
11. Put the autopilot into NAV mode.
12. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the right.
14. Verify that the control yoke or stick moves to the left.
NOTE
If the control yoke or stick moves in the opposite direction to what is expected, reverse
the LEFT/RIGHT polarity of the CRS+ setting on the AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION
page. Refer to Table 5-7 in Section 5.10.2.2 for a description of the autopilot
configuration settings.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.8.5.6 VOR/Localizer and Glideslope Deviation Tests
This test verifies that the lateral deviation, vertical deviation, lateral flag/superflag, and vertical
flag/superflag interfaces between the GDU 620 and autopilot are correct. Throughout this section, set
either the flag or superflag status depending on which output from the GDU 620 is connected to the
autopilot. For dual-G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU is wired to the autopilot, and the following
instructions apply only to the pilot’s GDU. Reference the interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
1. Engage the autopilot in heading/altitude mode.
2. On the GDU 620 Autopilot Test page in configuration mode, set the lateral deviation to 30% R.
3. Set the lateral flag/superflag to VALID.
4. Put the autopilot into APR mode.

5. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick to the right.
6. Set the lateral deviation to 30% L.
7. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick to the left.
8. Set the lateral deviation to 0%.
9. Set the lateral flag/superflag to INVALID.
10. Verify that the autopilot exits APR mode.
11. Set the lateral flag/superflag back to VALID and put the autopilot back into APR mode if
necessary.
12. Set the ILS/GPS APRCH to ACTIVE.
13. Set the vertical deviation to 30% UP.
14. Set the vertical flag/superflag to VALID.
15. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is capturing or tracking the glideslope.
190-00601-06 Rev. B
16. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick aft.
17. Set the vertical deviation to -30% DN.
18. Verify that the autopilot moves the control yoke or stick forward.
19. Set the ILS/GPS APRCH to INACTIVE.
20. Verify that the autopilot indicates that it is no longer capturing or tracking the glideslope.
21. Set the vertical flag/superflag to INVALID, the vertical deviation to 0%, and the lateral
flag/superflag to INVALID.
5.8.5.7 ARINC 429 GPS Roll Steering Test

This test verifies that the GPS roll steering interface between the GDU 620 and the autopilot is functional.
For dual-G600 installations, only the pilot’s GDU is wired to the autopilot, and the following instructions
apply only to the pilot’s GDU.
NOTE
GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways. First, if the autopilot has an ARINC
429 roll steering input, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll steering directly to the
autopilot. Second, if an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GDU can
provide ARINC 429 roll steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog heading
error signal to the autopilot. Third, the GDU can provide the roll steering via the heading
error output, taking the place of a separate roll steering converter. The autopilot is left in
heading mode, and the GDU varies the heading error output to steer the autopilot. Only
the ARINC 429 interface will be tested in this section.
1. Engage the autopilot in GPSS roll steering mode. If an external roll steering converter is used,
engage the autopilot in heading mode and set the roll steering converter to roll steering.
2. On the GDU 620 Autopilot Test page in configuration mode, set the GPS ANNUNCIATE
discrete output to ACTIVE.
3. Set the BANK ANGLE to 10°R.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
4. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the right.
5. Set the bank angle to 0°.
6. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick level.
7. Set the bank angle to 10°L.
8. Verify that the autopilot rolls the control yoke or stick to the left.
9. Disconnect the autopilot.
NOTE
For troubleshooting issues with the operation of the autopilot with the G600, refer to
Section 6.4.
5.8.6 Traffic System Interface Test

The GDU 620 can provide mode control and display data from various traffic systems. This check
verifies that the GDU 620 is configured correctly and is receiving and transmitting data to the traffic
system.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8.6.1 TAS Traffic Interface Test
If an L3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch® sensor , a Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810
TAS/KMH 820 IHAS/KTA 910 TAS/KMH 920 IHAS or an Avidyne TAS 620 (Ryan 9900BX TCAD)
has been connected to the GDU 620, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map page on the GDU 620.

2. Verify that the amber TAS FAIL is not displayed in the upper left corner, and NO DATA (amber)
is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
3. On the upper left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify that the status of the traffic system is
either TAS Standby or TAS operating (i.e. TIS should not be displayed).
NOTE
If the GDU 620 is configured for an external control (i.e. a display other than the GDU
620 is controlling the traffic system), then the following steps do not have to be carried
out.
4. Alternately press the STANDBY soft key and OPERATE soft key to change the mode of the
traffic system. It may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes. Verify that the
mode of the traffic system can be changed.
NOTE
The Self Test menu option will not be available if the traffic system is operating.
5. Put the traffic system in Standby mode. Press the MENU key and press ENT to initiate a traffic
system self test. Verify that the traffic system runs a self-test and the self-test traffic pattern is
displayed.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.8.6.2 TIS (Garmin GTX 33/330) Interface Test
If a Garmin GTX 33/330 sensor has been connected to the GDU 620, the traffic interface should be
verified as described in this section.
1. Select the Traffic Map page on the GDU 620.

2. Verify that the amber TIS FAIL is not displayed in the upper left corner, and NO DATA (amber)
is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
3. On the upper left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify that the status of the traffic system is
either TIS Standby or TIS Operating/Unavailable (i.e. TAS should not be displayed).
NOTE
If the GDU 620 is configured for an external control (i.e. a display other than the
GDU 620 is controlling the traffic system), then the following steps do not have to be
carried out.
4. Pull the GDC breaker and verify the Air data fields are red X’d.
5. Turn off all navigators to remove a valid GPS position to the GDU
6. If a squat switch (or airspeed switch) to the GTX 330 squat switch input is present, ensure that
this is in AIR mode.
7. Alternately press the STANDBY soft key and OPERATE soft key to change the mode of the
traffic system. It may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes. Verify that the
mode of the traffic system can be changed.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8.7 Garmin GDL 69/69A Checkout Procedure
Locate the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or southwestern sky. XM Satellite
Radio satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and western coasts of the continental
United States.
NOTE
The following section only verifies correct installation and activation of appropriate
GDU 620 functions. It does not activate the GDL 69/69A XM data link radio. Complete
instructions for activating the GDL 69/69A XM data link radio can be found in document
190-00355-04.
1. Go to the XM INFORMATION page in the AUX page group.

2. Verify that the Data Radio ID field has a valid value and is not blank.
NOTE
The following steps only have to be completed for GDL 69A installations.
NOTE
If the XM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is available
only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should be available
on multiple channels.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3. Select the XM RADIO page in the AUX page group.
4. Unmute the XM volume and verify that audio can be heard over the headsets. Adjustment of the
volume may be required.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.8.8 ADF Interface Checkout Procedure
The GDU 620 can receive relative bearing information from an external ADF source. This check verifies
that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that the G600 and ADF are powered up.
2. Press the PFD soft key on the PFD. Repeatedly press the BRG 1 soft key until ADF is displayed
as the source for the No. 1 bearing pointer.
3. Verify that the ADF window is not invalid (no red ‘X’).
4. Using an ADF test set, generate a bearing to a station.
5. Tune the ADF receiver to the same frequency as the test set.
6. Verify that the ADF bearing pointer indicates the correct relative bearing.
7. Verify correct display for three other bearings, at 90° increments.
8. If the ADF flag is used in the installation, tune the ADF receiver to an unused frequency and
verify that the bearing pointer is removed from the PFD.
5.8.9 GDU Cross-Fill Checkout Procedure (Dual GDU 620 Installations Only)
If dual GDU 620s are installed, one GDU 620 can share information with the other GDU 620. This check
verifies that the units are communicating.
1. Ensure that both G600 systems are powered up.
2. On the GDU 620 #1 MFD go to the AUX page and ensure that BARO SYNCHRONIZATION is
ON.
3. Press the BRO key on GDU 620 #1 and use the knob to change the barometric setting.
4. Verify that the barometric setting on both GDUs change to the same value.
5. Press the BRO key on GDU 620 #2 and use the knob to change the barometric setting.
6. Verify that the barometric setting on both GDUs change to the same value.
5.8.10 EMI/RFI Check
After installing the GDU 620 and verifying that all interfaces to external equipment are working
correctly, a brief EMI/RFI check must be conducted. This check will verify that the GDU 620 does not
produce unacceptable interference in other avionics systems, and other avionics systems do not produce
unacceptable interference in the GDU 620.
1. Start the aircraft engines and switch to aircraft power. Turn on all avionics except the GDU 620.
2. With the GDU 620 switched off, verify that all existing avionics systems are functioning
properly.
3. Turn the GDU 620 on and remove power from all other avionics systems.
NOTE
Removing power from systems interfaced to the GDU 620 will cause the associated
system flags on the GDU 620 to be displayed. This is normal behavior and does not
constitute a test failure.
4. Apply power to the other avionics systems one at a time and verify that the system is functioning
properly without any unacceptable interference caused by the GDU 620. Ensure that there is no
unacceptable interference in the GDU 620 when the avionics system is powered up. Wait for the
system to begin functioning normally before applying power to the next system.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.9 Placard Relocation/Switch Labeling
If any placards were relocated as a result of the GDU 620 installation, verify the following:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard which it is replacing
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard which it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same)
If the new switches were added as a result of the G600 installation, verify the following:
• The font size is legible from the pilot’s seat
• The labels are readable in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are readable with
ambient flood lighting in darkness.
5.10 Flight Checks
5.10.1 General System Flight Check
During flight the following items should be verified:
• The display of attitude, airspeed and heading on the GDU 620 while maneuvering.
• The display of attitude, airspeed and heading on the standby instruments.
• Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the GDU 620 CDI. For navigation receivers,
both VOR and ILS should be verified.
• The audibility of the altitude alerter chime.
• The display of traffic from any interfaced traffic system (if applicable)
• The display of bearing from any interfaced ADF (if applicable).
• The display of weather from the GDL 69/69A (if applicable).
• The control of GDL 69A audio functions (if applicable).
5.10.2 Autopilot Flight Checks and Final Adjustments
After verifying the autopilot interfaces as described in Section 5.8.5, the autopilot must be flight tested
and, if necessary, adjusted for the particular airframe. This section provides general guidelines for
verifying the autopilot and flight director performance and also for making necessary adjustments. Any
adjustments made must be reflected in the Checkout Log (Section 5.11.3).
5.10.2.1 Flight Director Performance
It is best to evaluate the flight director with the autopilot coupled in order to assess the performance of the
flight director versus the autopilot. Evaluate the flight director performance in level flight, turns, climbs,
and descents. Observe any excessive fluctuations in pitch or roll, as well as how closely the autopilot
follows the movements of the flight director.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
The flight performance can be adjusted by changing the settings on the Flight Director Configuration
page in configuration mode. For dual-G600 systems, all flight director configuration changes must be
made on both GDUs.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Table 5-6. Flight Director Configuration Settings
Parameter Description
PITCH FILTER Relative: Angles filtered in this setting are relative to the aircraft. Sets the filter
(leave set at default to be applied to inputs regardless of A/C orientation.
value) Absolute: Setting accounts for changes in aircraft body before applying the
filter. Sets the filter to be applied to inputs including A/C orientation.
PITCH FILTER TIME Sets the time in seconds for the flight director display to change from the
current value to the commanded value.
PITCH + Sets the polarity of the pitch response of the flight director.
PITCH V/DEG Sets the number of volts required for one degree of flight director movement.
PITCH ANGLE MAX Sets the maximum pitch up angle that the flight director can reach. The
displayed FD will not exceed this value even if a larger pitch up angle is
received from the autopilot computer.
PITCH ANGLE MIN Sets the maximum pitch down angle that the flight director can reach. The
displayed FD will not exceed this value even if a larger pitch down angle is
received from the autopilot computer.
PITCH V ref Sets the zero pitch reference point.
ROLL FILTER Relative: Angles filtered in this setting are relative to the aircraft. Sets the filter
(leave set at default to be applied to inputs regardless of A/C orientation.
value) Absolute: Setting accounts for changes in aircraft body before applying the
filter. Sets the filter to be applied to inputs including A/C orientation.
ROLL FILTER TIME Sets the time in seconds for the flight director display to change from the
current value to the commanded value.
ROLL + Sets the polarity of the roll response of the flight director.
ROLL V/DEG Sets the number of volts required for one degree of flight director movement.
ROLL ANGLE MAX Sets the maximum roll angle that the flight director can reach. The displayed
FD will not exceed this value even if a larger roll angle is received from the
autopilot computer.
ROLL V ref Sets the zero roll reference point.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.10.2.2 Autopilot Performance
The autopilot performance can be adjusted by changing the settings on the Autopilot Configuration page
in configuration mode. For dual-G600 systems, all autopilot configuration changes should be made on
the pilot’s GDU only.
Table 5-7. Autopilot Configuration Settings

Parameter Description
AC/DC Selects whether the autopilot receives AC or DC heading and course error
signals. This parameter should not be changed.
HDG + Changes the polarity of the heading error signal.
CRS + Changes the polarity of the course error signal.
HDG V/DEG Changes the gain of the heading error signal.
CRS V/DEG Changes the gain of the course error signal.
V Min Sets the minimum voltage that the GDU 620 will send to the autopilot. This
parameter should not be changed.
V Max Sets the maximum voltage that the GDU 620 will send to the autopilot. This
parameter should not be changed.
V Ref Sets the zero reference for the heading and course error signals.
1. To evaluate the autopilot heading performance, center the heading bug and engage the autopilot
in HDG mode. Change the heading bug by at least 45°. The autopilot should follow the heading
bug and roll out smoothly, without undershooting or overshooting the selected heading. If the
autopilot undershoots the selected heading, increase the HDG V/DEG appropriately. If the
autopilot overshoots the selected heading, decrease the HDG V/DEG appropriately.
2. To evaluate the autopilot course performance, engage the autopilot in NAV mode. Tune to a
NAV frequency that is out of range and select that NAV for display on the CDI, so that the GDU
invalidates the lateral deviation signal. Change the course by at least 45°. The autopilot should
turn to the new course and roll out smoothly, without undershooting or overshooting the selected
course. If the autopilot undershoots the selected course, increase the CRS V/DEG appropriately.
If the autopilot overshoots the selected course, decrease the CRS V/DEG appropriately.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
5.10.2.3 Roll Steering Performance
NOTE
GPS roll steering is handled in one of three ways. First, if the autopilot has an ARINC
429 roll steering input, the GDU 620 can provide ARINC 429 roll steering directly to the
autopilot. Second, if an external roll steering converter has been installed, the GDU can
provide ARINC 429 roll steering to the converter, which then outputs an analog heading
error signal to the autopilot. Third, the GDU can provide the roll steering via the heading
error output, taking the place of a separate roll steering converter. The autopilot is left in
heading mode, and the GDU varies the heading error output to steer the autopilot.
1. Set up a GPS flight plan that includes at least two legs with an angle between them. Set
the CDI to display the active GPS. Engage the autopilot in GPS roll steering mode. If
the autopilot uses the heading error input for roll steering, engage the autopilot in HDG
mode and activate the GPSS switch. When the switch is active the following
annunciation will appear on the PFD:
2. Verify that the autopilot flies the airplane smoothly through the turn between the two
legs.
5.10.2.4 Altitude Preselector Performance
NOTE
This test is applicable only for S-TEC autopilots which have the RS-485 altitude
preselector input connected to the GDU 620 and have the altitude preselector option
enabled in the GDU 620.
1. Set the altitude preselector on the GDU 620 to an altitude above the present altitude.
2. Engage the autopilot in altitude select mode by pressing the VS and ALT buttons
simultaneously.
3. Set a positive vertical speed on the autopilot.
4. Verify that the autopilot climbs and captures the selected altitude.
5. Set the altitude preselector on the GDU 620 to an altitude below the present altitude.
6. Set a negative vertical speed on the autopilot.
7. Verify that the autopilot descends and captures the selected altitude.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
5.11 Documentation Checks
5.11.1 AFMS
Ensure that the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) is completed and inserted in the Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) or Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
1. Fill in the required airplane information in the AFMS.
2. In AFMS Section 4.4 (Autopilot Operations), fill in all applicable checkboxes corresponding to
the interfaces to the autopilot. More than one box may be checked, depending upon the
installation. These are further described below.
This installation does not interface with the autopilot (basic wing leveling autopilot or no
autopilot is installed in the aircraft)
• Check this box if there are no interfaces between the G600 system and the autopilot, or if
no autopilot is installed in the aircraft. No other boxes should be checked if this box is
checked.
Course / NAV Selection coupling to the autopilot

• Check this box if the course datum signal is connected to the autopilot.
Heading Bug coupling capability to the autopilot

• Check this box if the heading datum signal is connected to the autopilot.
Roll Steering emulated via the heading mode

• Check this box if an external GPSS switch is installed with the G600.
Roll Steering capable autopilot

• Check this box if the ARINC 429 output from the GDU 620 is connected to the autopilot.
Altitude Pre-Selector integrated with the autopilot

• Check this box if the Altitude Preselect option is enabled (unlocked).
Flight Director display driven from external autopilot or FD computer

• Check this box if an external flight director is connected to and configured on the
GDU 620.
3. Insert the completed AFMS into the AFM or POH.
5.11.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICAW)
Ensure that the appropriate aircraft information is filled in on the Instructions for Continued
Airworthiness (ICAW) is completed and inserted in the aircraft permanent records.
1. Fill in the Aircraft Make, Model, Reg. No. and S/N information on the cover of the ICAW
(Garmin document 190-00601-00).
2. In the ICAW Appendix A, fill in the locations of all LRUs that were installed as part of the G600
installation. Also sketch the location of the wire runs for the G600 LRUs.
3. Insert the completed ICAW in the aircraft permanent records.
5.11.3 Configuration and Checkout Log
The completed checkout log sheet should be maintained with the aircraft permanent records. If a dual
GDU 620 installation is being done, a checkout log for each system must be completed.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Table 5-8. G600 System Configuration and Checkout Log
Page 1 of 4
Date: ____ /____ /____

G600 Configuration and Checkout Log
By: ________________
INSTALLATION
AIRCRAFT MODEL ___________________ AIRCRAFT SERIAL # ___________
INFORMATION:
GDU 620 P/N 011 - 01264 - _______ Mod Level __________
Single GDU Serial # ______________________
Dual – GDU #1 GRS 77 P/N 011 - 00868 - _______ Mod Level __________
Dual – GDU #2 Serial # ______________________
GMU 44 P/N 011 - 00870 - _______ Mod Level __________
Serial # ______________________
GDC 74A P/N 011 - 00882 - _______ Mod Level __________
Serial # ______________________
GTP 59 P/N 011 - 00978 - _______ Mod Level __________
Serial # ______________________
4300-4( ) P/N 4300-4_______ Panel Tilt _______°Lighting______V
[ N/A] Serial # ______________________
4200-( ) P/N 4200-_______ Panel Tilt _______°Lighting______V
[ N/A] Serial # ______________________
MD420 P/N MD420 Set for lighting voltage______V
[ N/A] Serial # ______________________
EQUIPMENT LOCATION:
For each unit listed below, record the fuselage station and provide a brief description of the location.
Unit Station (CG) Description of Location
GRS 77 AHRS _____________ (in) _______________________________________________
GDC 74A ADC _____________ (in) _______________________________________________
GMU 44 Mag. _____________ (in) _______________________________________________
GTP 59 OAT _____________ (in) _______________________________________________
MD420 [ N/A] _____________ (in) _______________________________________________

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Page 2 of 4
CONFIGURATION ITEMS:
System Configuration
Cross-side GDU: Present Not Present Type: GDU 620
AHRS: Present Not Present Type: GRS 77
ADC: Present Not Present Type: GDC 74
GPS1: Present Not Present Type:
GPS2: Present Not Present Type:
NAV1: Present Not Present Type:
NAV2: Present Not Present Type:
ADF: Present Not Present Type:
+ Superflag
Traffic: Present Not Present Type:
+ External Control
Data Link: Present Not Present Type:
Airframe Configuration
PFD Airspeeds (PFD)
DIS. SPD: Nautical Imperial Metric VS0: V r:
ALT. VS: X Feet VS1: Vx:
VS Tape Range: 2000 3000 4000 Vfe: Vy:
ADI ROLL POINTER: Sky Ground Vno: Vle:
MFD Vne: Vmca:
DIS. SPD: Nautical Imperial Metric GLIDE : Vyse:
ALT. VS: X Feet
Aircraft Icon:
Lighting Configuration
Brightness Display Key Photocell Override
Input Source: __________ __________ Key Backlight Cutoff %: [ N/A] _________
Minimum Level: __________ __________ Photo Transition %: [ N/A] _________
Response Time: __________ __________ Photo Slope: [ N/A] _________
Slope: __________ __________ Photo Offset: [ N/A] _________
Offset: __________ __________
Manifest Configuration
GDU 006-B0498-_____ ver ______ GMU 006-B0224-______ ver _______
GDC 006-B0261-_____ ver ______ GMU FPGA 006-C0048-______ ver _______
GDC FPGA 006-C0055-_____ ver ______ GRS 006-B0223-______ ver _______
GDL 69 [ N/A] 006-B0317-_____ ver ______ GRS FPGA 006-C0049-______ ver _______

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Page 3 of 4
CONFIGURATION ITEMS (CONT’D):
Feature Configuration Audio Alert Configuration
Charts: None FlightCharts ChartView Volume Adjustment: _______________ dB
Altitude Preselect Enabled Disabled
GDC Configuration GDL 69/69A[ N/A]

OAT Type: GTP 59 Antenna Gain (Lower): __________ dB
Cable Loss (Nominal) __________ dB
GDL 69/69A Activated Yes No
Autopilot [ N/A] Flight Director [ N/A]
Autopilot Present Not Present Flight Director Present Not Present
Type: Type:
Configuration (Active settings): Configuration (Active settings):
AC/DC: AC DC Pitch Filter: Absolute Relative
HDG +: RIGHT LEFT Pitch Filter Time:
CRS +: RIGHT LEFT Pitch +: DOWN UP
HDG V/DEG: Pitch V/DEG:
CRS V/DEG: Pitch Angle Max:
V Min: Pitch Angle Min:
V Max: Pitch Vref:
V Ref: Roll Filter: Absolute Relative
Roll Filter Time:
Roll +: LEFT RIGHT
Roll V/DEG:
Roll Angle Max:
Roll Vref:
GRS/GMU CALIBRATION
Pitch/Roll Offset completed? Engine Run-up Test passed?
Magnetometer Cal completed? Mag Interference Test passed?
Heading Offset completed? [ N/A]

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Page 4 of 4
SYSTEM CHECKOUT
Ground Checks
DATABASE CHECKS SYSTEM INTERFACE CHECKS
Jeppesen NavData current GPS Receiver Interface checked
Electronic Charts current [ N/A] Nav Receiver Interface checked
Terrain current Autopilot Checks [ N/A]
Autopilot Engagement Check
PITOT STATIC / ADC / TAPE CHECKS [ N/A] Flight Director Check
Pitot Static system leak checked [ N/A] FD Offset Calibration

CFR accuracy check completed [ N/A] Altitude Preselect Check
Airspeed tape settings checked Heading and Course Error Check
Airspeed accuracy checked VLOC and GS Deviation Check
GPS Roll Steering Check
GENERAL CHECKS [ N/A] Traffic System Interface checked
EMI/RFI Check Pass Fail [ N/A] GDL 69/69A Interface checked
All placards relocated [ N/A] [ N/A] ADF Interface checked
All labels are readable [ N/A] [ N/A] GDU Cross-fill checked
Flight Checks
GENERAL SYSTEM CHECKS
Primary Attitude, Heading and Airspeed [ N/A] Altitude Alerter Audibility
Standby Attitude, Heading and Airspeed [ N/A] Traffic Display
GPS1 Navigation [ N/A] ADF Bearing Display
[ N/A] GPS2 Navigation [ N/A] GDL 69/69A Weather Display
[ N/A] Nav1 Navigation [ N/A] GDL 69A Audio Control
[ N/A] Nav2 Navigation
AUTOPILOT CHECKS [ N/A]

[ N/A] Flight Director Performance [ N/A] Altitude Preselect Check
Autopilot Performance VLOC and GS Deviation Check
[ N/A] FD Offset Calibration [ N/A] GPS Roll Steering Check
Documentation Checks
AFMS completed and in POH/AFM ICAW completed and included in aircraft records
COMMENTS:

Rev. B 190-00601-06
6 Troubleshooting
This section provides information to assist troubleshooting if problems occur with a G600 installation.
6.1 GMU 44 Magnetometer Troubleshooting
When performing a magnetic interference survey numerous issues may arise. This section lists some
common causes for failures of the magnetometer interference test, and a description of some of the things
that can be done to remedy them.
6.1.1 Common Causes for Failures of the Magnetometer Interference Test
6.1.1.1 Electrical Current Return Paths
If electrical loads are grounded through the airframe, the returning electrical current will flow through the
airframe toward the alternator, generator, or battery. If the magnetometer lies along this current return
path, the current can cause significant magnetic interference. Electrical current return paths are the most
common cause of magnetic interference issues. Common examples of this problem are the navigation
lights at the wingtips for wing-mounted magnetometers or the strobe light on the tail for vertical
stabilizer-mounted magnetometers.
Before making changes to the aircraft, isolate the particular electrical load which is causing the
interference by running the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool while turning the load on and off or by
running the magnetometer interference test with the load on and again with it off.
To correct the problem, ground the electrical load through a wire rather than through the airframe. The
ground wire should run into the fuselage for wing-mounted magnetometers so that the return current no
longer flows through the airframe past the magnetometer. Ideally this ground wire should be routed
beside the power wire for that electrical load. This will maximize cancellation of the associated magnetic
field that is generated by the current.
6.1.1.2 Nearby Electrical Loads
Large electrical loads that are close to the magnetometer can generate significant magnetic interference.
It is important to install the GMU 44 using the guidelines provided in Section 2.5.11.5 and Table 2-5.
6.1.1.3 Ferromagnetic Materials
Ferromagnetic materials can become magnetized and cause magnetic interference. It is important to use
nonmagnetic materials to mount the GMU 44, and replace any magnetic fasteners within 20” (0.5 m) with
nonmagnetic equivalents (e.g. replace zinc-plated steel screws used to mount wing covers or wingtips
with nonmagnetic stainless steel screws.)
6.1.2 Examples of Magnetic Interference Problems

In order to isolate the cause the magnetic interference, first review the results from the GMU 44 Location
Survey Tool as described in Appendix G. Compare the survey results to the detailed test sequence to
identify which item caused the failure. Two examples of common survey failures are shown below.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Interference From The Wingtip Nav And Strobe Lights
Interference From The Pitot Heat
The cause of both of the interference issues above was determined to be electrical current return paths
through the airframe, as described in Section 6.1.1.1. Two options were available at this point: (1) run
new ground wires for the pitot heat, strobe light, and NAVNAV light, or (2) choose a different location
for the GMU 44. Since it was determined that running new ground return wires through the wing would
be difficult, the GMU 44 was relocated to more suitable location in the aft fuselage.
Interference From The Strobe Light On Vertical Stabilizer

Rev. B 190-00601-06
The cause of the interference above was determined to be an electrical current return path through the
airframe, as described in Section 6.1.1.1. The power return for strobe light power supply was through the
chassis of the power supply (the design for this power supply did not have a separate connection for a
power ground). To correct the problem, the power supply was replaced with a new power supply that had
a separate power ground that was isolated from the chassis. A new ground wire was run from the strobe
light power supply and attached to the airframe forward of the GMU 44.
6.2 G600 Troubleshooting

Table 6-1. GDU 620 Troubleshooting Guide
Problem Cause Solution
Unit does not power up – Improper wiring; circuit breaker Ensure power is properly wired to the
blank screen. open. GDU 620 and the circuit breaker is closed.
Unit intensity turned down. Ensure that unit is not in manual intensity
control mode with the intensity turned
down.
All expected configuration An Installer Unlock Card is not Insert the Installer Unlock Card
pages are not displayed. inserted into the GDU 620. P/N 010-00769-60 into the bottom slot of
the GDU 620 and cycle power.
The GDC OAT probe type The RS-232 connection to the Ensure that the GDC 74A RS-232
shows up as UNKNOWN GDC 74A is not working. connection to the GDU is properly wired,
and ensure that the GDC 74A circuit
breaker is closed.
When loading software, the The software loader card is Insert the loader card in the top slot and
LRU software is not being installed in the bottom slot of the cycle power to the GDU.
displayed on the GDU 620.
SOFTWARE UPLOAD page. The software loader card contains Repeat the process for making the
no information. software loader card.
Configuration errors are The configuration module has not Update the configuration module – refer to
displayed on power-up, been updated. Section 5.5.11.
before the GDU enters
normal mode.
Vertical GPS deviation is not For 400W/500W Series units, the Enable Labels on the 400W/500W Series
displayed on the GDU 620. ARINC 429 vertical deviation unit ARINC 429 configuration page.
labels are not being transmitted.
Unable to control the GPS The GPS navigator is not correctly Configure the ARINC 429 inputs/outputs
course when in OBS mode. configures as LNAV1/2 or for LNAV1 (SYS1) or LNAV2 (SYS2)
SYS1/2. based upon whether the navigator is
GPS1 or GPS2.
Data is not being received ARINC 429 bus hi and low are Verify wiring.
from an ARINC 429 device. swapped.
(valid data is being received
on the 429 input port as Wrong device is connected to port
shown on the GDU 620 on
PORT MONITORING page)
Data is not being received On the transmitting LRU, the Set the ARINC 429 transmitter speed to
from an ARINC 429 device. ARINC 429 transmitter speed is correct speed.
not set correctly.
(no data is being received on
the 429 input port as shown Wiring is not correct. Check for continuity/shorts and correct as
on the GDU 620 PORT required.
MONITORING page)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Attitude and heading on GDU Attitude and heading errors/resets This is expected behavior and no
620 red ‘X’ / GRS 77 resets are possible if the air data tests troubleshooting is required if this occurs.
during air data ground are conducted indoors without a To reduce the chances of inducing
testing. good GPS signal. With marginal attitude and heading errors/resets while
or no GPS signals present, conducting the air data tests, ensure that
sudden changes in airspeed the G600 is receiving good GPS signals.
caused by using a pressure tester
may result in attitude and heading
errors and possibly cause the
GRS 77 to reset. This occurs
because the artificial changes in
airspeed cause disagreement with
the other sensor measurements
internal to the GRS 77. This
sensor disagreement will not
occur in the normal conditions of
flight.
Heading red ‘X’ during air Invalidation of heading is possible This is expected behavior and no
data ground testing if the air data tests are conducted troubleshooting is required if this occurs.
indoors, due to typical magnetic
anomalies, even with a good GPS
signal.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
6.3 G600 Alerts
The G600 will display a number of alerts on the GDU 620 MFD. These are listed in the following table.
Table 6-2. GDU 620 Alert Troubleshooting Guide
Alert Text Cause Solution
AHRS GPS AHRS is using the backup GPS
information
AHRS1 GPS - AHRS is not AHRS is not receiving any GPS
receiving any GPS information.
information
AHRS1 GPS AHRS is operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SRVC AHRS magnetic field model Update GRS 77 IGRF model (current
should be updated. Appears on model is with aviation database).
ground only.
AHRS1 TAS AHRS is not receiving true GDC not powered up. Close ADC C/B.
airspeed from ADC.
GDC not receiving input from GTP 59
OAT probe. Verify wiring is correct.
ARINC 429 connection from GDC 74A to
GRS 77 is not working. Verify wiring is
correct.
There is a magnetic anomaly
CAL LOST Registry reports that it has lost

calibration data.
CNFG MISMATCH GDU in normal mode has
received updated crossfill tags for
configuration registry entries.
CNFG MODULE The configuration module is Verify wiring to configuration module
inoperative.
Replace configuration module
DATA LOST Pilot stored data was lost.
Recheck data and settings.
FAN 1 FAIL Fan 1 has reported 0 RPM when it
was powered with a PWM duty
cycle higher than or equal to 10%
FAN 2 FAIL Fan 2 has reported 0 RPM when it
was powered with a PWM duty
cycle higher than or equal to 10%
GDL69 CONFIG Error in the configuration of the
GDL69.
GDU (1/2) COOLING Specific GDU has poor cooling, Ensure fans on indicated GDU are
and power usage is being functioning
reduced.
Ensure fans on indicated GDU are not
obstructed
GDU (1/2) DB ERR Error in specific database, where

GDU (1/2) DB denotes specific
database.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Alert Text Cause Solution
GDU (1/2) VOLTAGE GDU supply voltage is below 12 Increase the voltage above 12VDC.
VDC.
GPS(1/2) FAIL No GPS1 or GPS2 data is Ensure GPS (1/2) is turned on
available. Verify RS-232 wiring from the GPS to the
GDU 620.
GPS(1/2) PPS Failure This alert will be set if the PPS Ensure GPS (1/2) is turned on
signal has not been received in
more than 5 sec. If the unit is Verify 1PPS wiring from the GPS to the
configured for dual GPSs then the GDU 620.
side will be specified in the error.
GPS2 FPL USED The GPS1 has failed and GPS2 is

configured and operating.
HDG FAULT AHRS magnetometer fault has GRS 77 not receiving information from
occurred. GMU 44. Verify wiring to GMU 44.
<LRU> SERVICE Specific LRU should be serviced, Return indicated LRU to Garmin for
where <LRU> denotes specific service.
LRU.
MANIFEST GDU has received product data Ensure the manifest is properly
for an LRU that should have a configured. Refer to Section 5.5.4 for
manifest entry, but is not in the additional information.
manifest.
NAV1 FAIL No navigation receiver 1 data.
NAV2 FAIL No navigation receiver 2 data.
SIMULATOR The simulator mode is active. Ensure P6202-36 is not grounded.
SW MISMATCH GDU software version strings do
not match.
TRAFFIC FAIL The traffic information system has The GDU 620 is not receiving traffic
failed. information from the traffic sensor. Verify
wiring between GDU 620 and traffic
sensor.
The GDU 620 is receiving information

from the traffic sensor, but the information
is indicating that the traffic sensor has
failed. Troubleshoot traffic system.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
6.4 Autopilot Troubleshooting
Table 6-3. Autopilot Troubleshooting Guide
Autopilot will not engage. External input to autopilot not valid. Troubleshoot in accordance with
Internal problem in the autopilot the autopilot installation manual.
computer, autopilot control panel, or
servos.
Autopilot servos turn GDU 620 not properly configured for Check GDU 620 flight director
opposite direction of flight flight director inputs. configuration settings per Section
director. 5.5.10.
Flight director signal wiring reversed. Check flight director signal wiring
between autopilot and GDU 620.
Reference the interconnect drawing
in Appendix F.
Autopilot servo rigged incorrectly. Check autopilot servo rigging if it

was changed during G600
installation.
Flight director not GDU 620 not configured for flight Configure GDU 620 for flight
displayed on GDU 620. director. director per Section 5.5.10.
Flight director valid signal not received Verify valid signal wiring between
by GDU 620. autopilot and GDU 620. Reference
the interconnect drawing in
Appendix F.
The valid signal status can be
observed on the GDU 620 on the
Flight Director page in configuration
mode.
Flight director bars are GDU 620 not properly configured for Check GDU 620 flight director
displayed on the GDU 620 flight director inputs. configuration settings per Section
but do not move. 5.5.10.
Flight director signals not being Check flight director signal wiring
received by GDU 620. between autopilot and GDU 620.
Reference the interconnect drawing
in Appendix F.
Flight director bars move in GDU 620 not properly configured for Check the GDU 620 autopilot and
wrong direction laterally on flight director inputs. flight director configuration settings
the GDU 620. per Sections 5.5.9 and 5.5.10.
Flight director signal wiring reversed. Check flight director signal, heading
GDU 620 heading error and/or course error, course error, and lateral
error inputs not configured correctly. deviation signal wiring between the
Heading/course error signal wiring autopilot and GDU 620. Reference
between the GDU 620 and autopilot the interconnect drawing in
reversed. Appendix F.
Lateral deviation signal wiring between

the GDU 620 and autopilot reversed.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Flight director bars move in GDU 620 not properly configured for Check the GDU 620 flight director
wrong direction vertically flight director inputs. configuration settings per Section
on the GDU 620. Flight director wiring reversed. 5.5.10.
Glideslope deviation signal wiring Check flight director signal and
between the GDU 620 and autopilot glideslope deviation signal wiring
reversed. between the autopilot and GDU
620. Reference the interconnect
drawing in Appendix F.
Autopilot rolls the control GDU 620 not properly configured for the Check the GDU 620 autopilot
yoke or stick in the wrong heading error output. configuration settings per
direction in heading mode. Section 5.5.9.
Heading error wiring between GDU 620 Check the heading error signal
and autopilot reversed. wiring between the GDU 620 and
autopilot. Reference the
interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Autopilot rolls the control GDU 620 not properly configured for the Check the GDU 620 autopilot
yoke or stick in the wrong course error output. configuration settings per
direction in NAVNAV or Section 5.5.9.
approach mode. Course error wiring between the GDU Check the course error signal and
620 and autopilot reversed. lateral deviation signal wiring
Lateral deviation signal wiring between between the GDU 620 and
the GDU 620 and autopilot reversed. autopilot. Reference the
Autopilot does not roll the Autopilot not receiving heading error Check the heading error signal
control yoke or stick to signal from the GDU 620. wiring between the GDU 620 and
follow the heading bug autopilot. Reference the
when in heading mode. interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
Autopilot does not roll the Autopilot not receiving course error Check the course error signal,
control yoke or stick to signal from the GDU 620. lateral deviation signal, and lateral
correct lateral deviation Autopilot not receiving the lateral flag wiring between the GDU 620
from the course when in deviation signal from the GDU 620. and autopilot. Reference the
NAVNAV or approach interconnect drawing in Appendix F.
mode. Autopilot not receiving the lateral flag
from the GDU 620.
Autopilot does not move Autopilot not receiving glideslope Check the glideslope deviation and
the control yoke or stick to deviation signal from the GDU 620. vertical flag signal wiring between
correct glideslope the GDU 620 and autopilot.
deviation when in Autopilot not receiving the vertical flag Reference the interconnect drawing
approach mode with a from the GDU 620. in Appendix F.
valid glideslope signal.
Autopilot remains in ARM Autopilot not receiving lateral or vertical Check the lateral and vertical flag
mode and does not flag from the GDU 620. signal wiring between the GDU 620
capture VOR, localizer, or and autopilot. Reference the
glideslope. interconnect drawing in Appendix F.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Autopilot does not respond Autopilot does not support altitude Verify that the autopilot supports the
to altitude preselector in preselector interface with the GDU 620. altitude preselector interface with
the GDU 620. the GDU 620.
GDU 620 not configured for altitude Check the GDU 620 autopilot
preselector output to autopilot. configuration settings per Section
5.5.9.
Autopilot not receiving the RS-485 Check the RS-485 altitude
altitude preselector setting from the preselector wiring between the
GDU 620. GDU 620 and autopilot. Reference
Appendix F.
Autopilot does not follow GDU 620 not in GPSS mode. Verify that the GDU 620 is in GPSS
GPS roll steering (ARINC mode. This is controlled by an
429 roll steering external switch and is annunciated
autopilots). (see Section 5.10.2.3 for a
screenshot).
Autopilot not receiving ARINC 429 roll Check the ARINC 429 roll steering
steering from the GDU 620. wiring between the GDU 620 and
autopilot. Reference the
Autopilot does not follow GDU 620 not in GPSS mode. Verify that the GDU 620 is in GPSS
GPS roll steering (analog Roll steering converter not receiving mode. This is controlled by an
roll steering autopilots). ARINC 429 roll steering from the GDU external switch and is annunciated
620. (see Section 5.10.2.3 for a
screenshot).
Autopilot not receiving analog heading Check the wiring between the GDU
error signal from GDU 620 or roll 620, roll steering converter (if
steering converter. installed), and autopilot. Reference
Appendix F.
6.5 Mid-Continent Standby ADI System (if installed)
Table 6-4. Mid-Continent Standby ADI Troubleshooting Guide

The Standby ADI system Unit is not getting aircraft power. Ensure that STBY ADI circuit breaker is
does not run from aircraft closed.
power.
Verify that power wiring to ADI is correct.
The Standby ADI system The battery power is not supplied Verify that STBY PWR switch has been
does not operate from to the ADI. pressed.
battery power.
Verify that standby battery is charged.
If the MD420 emergency power supply is

being used, verify that wiring from
emergency power supply to the ADI is
correct.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
6.6 Contacting Garmin for Assistance
If the G600 fails to operate despite troubleshooting efforts, contact Customer Service for assistance.
GARMIN International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062-3426
USA
Phone: 913 397 8200
FAX: 913 397 8282
http://www.garmin.com
Be prepared to offer the following information about the installation:
• Installation configuration (accessories, interfaced systems, completed configuration sheet)
• Model numbers, part numbers with mod levels, and serial numbers
• Software versions for GDU 620, GRS 77, GMU44, GDC 74A and GNS navigator(s).
• Description of problem
• Efforts made to isolate the problem

Rev. B 190-00601-06
7 LIMITATIONS
7.1 Operation
All functions of the G600 System meet the appropriate design assurance qualifications for primary flight
displays in Class I, Class II, and Class III aircraft in accordance with AC 23.1309-1C, Figure 2. The TSO
authorizations by function are listed in Section 1.6. The installation instructions in this manual must be
followed in order to ensure an airworthy installation for aircraft operating under Title 14 CFR Parts 91,
121, & 135 with the limitations of those installations listed here.
7.2 STC Installations
The physical mounting of the GDU 620 and required standby instruments are covered within this manual.
However, if it is necessary to relocate any required instrumentation in an instrument panel to make room
for the GDU 620 or required standby instruments, the relocation of these instruments is beyond the scope
of the STC. The installer should reference the aircraft manufacturer’s data or other approved alteration
methods.
Instruments relocated in accordance with this manual should use the original lighting system provided by
the type design. When modifying or re-fabricating an instrument panel which has an overlay for lighting
the installer must modify the lighting overlay in accordance with the manufacturer’s data or replace that
lighting with an approved lighting technique covered by the TC, applicable STC, or other approved
method.
For preservation of essential equipment in aircraft with multiple power busses, the GDU 620, GRS 77,
and GDC 74A must be powered from the essential bus. For aircraft with a single bus feed, this equipment
must be powered from the main bus. Operation of the pilot’s (primary) system on an avionics bus or
secondary bus is prohibited.
Backup CDIs which support GPS or GPS/NAV will not operate properly under all conditions; as such, if
a backup CDI is installed, it must be limited to VOR/LOC and/or ILS indications only.
Installations which utilize a standby attitude indicator with a flight director presentation integral to the
unit must disable the flight director presentation. The parallax view of the flight director requires FAA
evaluation to determine suitability for each panel location of the attitude indicator. Driving multiple flight
director displays from some autopilot / flight director computers may overload the signal and affect the
amplitude and overall delay of the presentation. Approval for the display of the flight director on the
standby attitude instrument may be done via TC, STC, or FAA Field Approval, but is beyond the scope of
the G600 AML STC.
Aircraft requiring a third attitude instrument for operations under Part 121 or 135 must still comply with
the G600 standby instrument requirements and placement; as such, one additional attitude indicator is
required for the copilot’s position. This third attitude indication may be a traditional gyro, or second G600
system installed in accordance with this manual.
Aircraft operating at or above RVSM published altitudes will not meet the RVSM requirements with the
G600 installation as outlined in this manual. RVSM compliance may be a future enhancement of the
G600 system.
7.2.1 Penetration of Aircraft Pressure Vessels
In pressurized aircraft some components of the G600 system may be mounted outside the pressurized
area, requiring that wires penetrate through the pressure vessel. This installation must utilize the
provisions of bulkhead penetrations, such as sealed connectors or wiring, as provided by the manufacturer
and in accordance with the aircraft maintenance manual. Substantiation for additional holes in the
pressure vessel is beyond the scope of the G600 AML STC and would require additional data from the
aircraft manufacturer or other FAA approved data.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
7.2.2 Equipment Interfaced to the G600 System
Connections from the G600 to aircraft systems other than those shown in this installation manual are
outside the scope of the G600 AML STC and may require further evaluation and / or certification
approval.
All equipment interfaced to the G600 must be previously or concurrently approved.
7.2.2.1 GNS 500W Series TAWS Annunciation
Only TAWS annunciations received from the No. 1 System (i.e. GPS or GPS 1) are displayed on the
PFD. If the aircraft’s TAWS system is embedded in a GNS 500W Series Navigator configured as system
No. 2, the remote annunciations will not display on the PFD of the G600.
7.2.2.2 Altitude Alerter and Pre-Selectors
Some autopilot systems support altitude capture during flight level changes. Of those systems, only a
subset of autopilots support external vertical speed and/or pre-selected altitudes. The G600 Altitude
Alerter can function as an Altitude Pre-Selector only for those systems identified in this installation
manual and only when the option is enabled in the G600 as a system upgrade. The functional extent of the
Altitude Alerter must be communicated to the pilot via the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement.
7.2.2.3 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the G600
The G600 System is certified to support only one traffic sensor for a given installation. The system
supports multiple types (TAS, TCAS I, TIS) of traffic systems, but only one system may be configured
for use.
7.2.3 Major Alterations
The installation of the G600 system is a major alteration to the aircraft type design. Before returning the
airplane to service, installers are required to complete and submit an FAA Form 337; “Major Repair and
Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance” to the appropriate FAA Flight Standards
District Office describing the work accomplished. The FAA Form 337 must detail the equipment and
systems to which the G600 system is interfaced.
7.2.4 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
Before returning the airplane to service, the G600 Configuration and Checkout Log must be completed
and attached with the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness so that any aircraft with the modifications
detailed in this manual may be properly maintained.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
8 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
The G600 is designed to not require any regular maintenance. Maintenance of all G600 LRUs is “on
condition” only.
8.1 Cleaning
The front bezel, keypad, and display of the GDU 620 can be cleaned with a soft cotton cloth dampened
with clean water. DO NOT use any chemical-cleaning agents. Care should be taken to avoid scratching
the surface of the display.
8.2 GDC 74A
Per Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(2), the GDC 74A must be checked using a test procedure
equivalent to Part 43 Appendix E, paragraph (b)(1) with two exceptions:
• The tests of sub-paragraphs (iv) (Friction) and (vi) (Barometric Scale Error) are not
applicable because the digital outputs of the GDC 74A are not susceptible to these types of
errors.
Other than for regulatory testing pertaining to Part 43 Appendix E and F, (Pitot/Static leak test as
described in Part 91.411) maintenance of the GDC 74A is “on condition” only.

190-00601-06 Rev. B

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix A STC Data
A.1 STC/PMA Information
The STC with Approved Model List (AML), Master Data List (Garmin P/N 005-C0313-00) information
is available on the Garmin web site at www.garmin.com. Download from the Dealers Only page.
A.2 Permission to use STC

Consistent with Order 8110.4B and AC 21-40, a permission letter to use this STC data is available for
download on the Dealers Only portion of the Garmin website at www.garmin.com.
A.3 Continued Airworthiness Instructions

Refer to the GDU 620 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (Garmin P/N 190-00601-00) which is
available on the Garmin web site at www.garmin.com. Download from the Dealers Only page.
A.4 STC Approved Model List

The G600 STC includes an Approved Model List (AML) attached to the STC. The G600 system is
approved for installation on all aircraft listed on the AML following installation instructions and
limitations described in this G600 System Installation Manual. The AML is attached to the STC and may
be downloaded from the Dealers Only portion of the Garmin web site at www.garmin.com.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page A-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Page A-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix B LRU Connector Pin-Out Information
B.1 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
Pin-out information is listed below. For a complete description of the signals refer to 190-00601-04 GDU
620 Installation Manual.
B.1.1 P6201 Connector
View of J6201 connector from back of unit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 1 In
2 RESERVED --
3 AUDIO INHIBIT IN* In
4 CDU SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* In
5 SPARE DISC IN* 4 In
8 GPSS ENABLE IN* In
9 FD ENABLE IN In
10 ADF VALID IN In
11 ETHERNET IN 1A In
12 ETHERNET IN 1B In
13 ETHERNET OUT 1A Out
14 ETHERNET OUT 1B Out
15 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH UP In
16 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH DOWN In
17 ADF X/COS IN In
18 ADF Y/SIN IN In
19 RESERVED --
20 COMPOSITE VIDEO IN 2 In
21 RESERVED --
22 GROUND --
23 AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* Out
24 SPARE DISC OUT* 5 Out
25 SPARE DISC OUT* 6 Out
26 TIS/TAS STANDBY* Out
27 TAS TEST* Out
28 AUDIO OUT HI Out
29 AUDIO OUT LO Out
30 ETHERNET IN 2A In
31 ETHERNET IN 2B In
32 ETHERNET OUT 2A Out
33 ETHERNET OUT 2B Out
34 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL LEFT In
35 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL RIGHT In
36 ADF DC REF IN In
37 RESERVED --
An asterisk (*) following a signal name denotes that the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate. If there is no asterisk, the signal is an Active-High.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page B-1
190-00601-06 Rev. B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 AIRCRAFT POWER In
2 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A Out
4 ARINC 429 IN 1A In
10 RS-232 IN 1 In
11 RS-232 IN 2 In
12 RS-232 IN 3 In
13 RS-232 IN 4 In
14 RS-232 IN 5 In
15 LIGHTING BUS HI In
16 LIGHTING BUS LO In
17 RESERVED --
18 AIRCRAFT POWER In
20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B Out
21 ARINC 429 IN 1B In
27 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
28 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
29 RS-232 OUT 3 Out
30 RS-232 OUT 4 Out
31 RS-232 OUT 5 Out
32 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
33 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK Out
34 AIRCRAFT POWER In
36 DEMO MODE SELECT* In
37 RESERVED --
38 GROUND --
39 RESERVED --
40 TIME MARK IN 1A In
41 TIME MARK IN 1B In
Page B-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Connector P6202 (continued)
Pin Pin Name I/O
42 TIME MARK IN 2A In
43 TIME MARK IN 2B In
44 RS-232 GND 1 --
45 RS-232 GND 2 --
46 RS-232 GND 3 --
47 RS-232 GND 4 --
48 RS-232 GND 5 --
49 CONFIG MODULE POWER Out
50 CONFIG MODULE GND --

190-00601-06 Rev. B
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43
Pin Pin Name I/O

6 RS-232 IN 6 In
7 RS-232 IN 7 In
8 RS-232 IN 8 In
9 RS-485 1A I/O
10 RS-485 2A I/O
11 RS-485 3A I/O
12 RS-485 4A I/O
13 RESERVED --
14 ARINC 708/453 IN 1A In
15 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM A In
16 ARINC 708/453 IN 2A In
17 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM A In
18 A/P HEADING ERROR HI Out
19 A/P COURSE ERROR HI Out
20 A/P AC REF HI In
21 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED --
28 RS-232 OUT 6 Out
29 RS-232 OUT 7 Out
30 RS-232 OUT 8 Out
31 RS-485 1B I/O
32 RS-485 2B I/O
33 RS-485 3B I/O
34 RS-485 4B I/O
35 RESERVED --
36 ARINC 708/453 IN 1B In
37 ARINC 708/453 IN 1 TERM B In
38 ARINC 708/453 IN 2B In
39 ARINC 708/453 IN 2 TERM B In
40 A/P HEADING ERROR LO --
41 A/P COURSE ERROR LO --

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Connector P6203 (continued)
Pin Pin Name I/O
42 A/P AC REF LO In
43 RESERVED --
44 GPS ANNUNCIATE* Out
45 GPS SELECT* Out
46 ILS/GPS APPROACH* Out
47 WX RADAR ON* Out
48 GROUND --
49 RS-232 GND 6 --
50 RS-232 GND 7 --
51 RS-232 GND 8 --
52 LATERAL +LEFT OUT Out
53 LATERAL +RIGHT OUT Out
54 LATERAL +FLAG OUT Out
55 LATERAL –FLAG OUT Out
56 VERTICAL +UP OUT Out
57 VERTICAL +DOWN OUT Out
58 VERTICAL +FLAG OUT Out
59 VERTICAL –FLAG OUT Out
60 LATERAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
61 VERTICAL SUPERFLAG OUT Out
62 RESERVED --

190-00601-06 Rev. B
B.2 GRS 77 AHRS
View of J771 connector looking at rear of unit.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
4 RESERVED --
5 SPARE --
6 GPS 2 RS-232 IN In
7 RESERVED --
8 SPARE RS-232 IN 1 In
9 MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT Out
10 MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT Out
11 GPS 1 RS-232 IN In
12 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A (CDU 1, high-speed) Out
13 ARINC 429 OUT 2 A (GIA 2, high-speed) Out
14 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A (GIA 1, high-speed) Out
15 ARINC 429 IN 1 A (AIR DATA, low speed) In
17 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
18 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 In
19 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B (CDU 2, high-speed) Out
21 GPS 2 RS-232 OUT Out
22 POWER GROUND --
23 SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 Out
24 POWER GROUND --
25 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A In
26 GPS 1 RS-232 OUT Out
27 ARINC 429 OUT 3 B (CDU 1, high-speed) Out
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2 B (GIA 2, high-speed) Out
29 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B (GIA 1, high-speed) Out
30 ARINC 429 IN 1 B (AIR DATA, low-speed) In
32 SPARE --
33 ARINC 429 OUT 3 A (CDU 2, high-speed) Out
34 SPARE --
35 SIGNAL GROUND (GPS 2) --
36 SPARE --
37 SIGNAL GROUND --
38 SIGNAL GROUND (MAGNETOMETER) --
39 MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B In

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Connector P771, continued
Pin Pin Name I/O
40 MAGNETOMETER GROUND --
41 SIGNAL GROUND (GPS 1) --
42 SIGNAL GROUND (CDU 1) --
43 SIGNAL GROUND (AFCS) --
44 SIGNAL GROUND (AIR DATA) --
B.2.1.1 Power Function

Pin Name Connector Pin I/O
AIRCRAFT POWER 1, GRS 77 P771 18 In
AIRCRAFT POWER 2, GRS 77 P771 20 In
MAGNETOMETER POWER OUT P771 9 Out
MAGNETOMETER GROUND P771 40 --
POWER GROUND, GRS 77 P771 22 --
POWER GROUND, GRS 77 P771 24 --
+12 VDC POWER, GMU 44 P441 9 In
POWER GROUND, GMU 44 P441 6 --
Power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
B.2.1.2 Serial Data
B.2.1.2.1 RS-232
GPS 1 RS-232 IN P771 11 In
GPS 2 RS-232 IN P771 6 In
SPARE RS-232 IN 1 P771 8 In
GPS 1 RS-232 OUT P771 26 Out
GPS 2 RS-232 OUT P771 21 Out
SPARE RS-232 OUT 1 P771 23 Out
MAGNETOMETER RS-232 OUT P771 10 Out
The RS-232 outputs conform to EIA/TIA-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ±5 V when
driving a standard RS-232 load.
B.2.1.2.2 RS-485
MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN B P771 39 In
MAGNETOMETER RS-485 IN A P771 25 In
MAGNETOMETER GROUND P771 40 --
RS-485 OUT A P441 4 Out
RS-485 OUT B P441 2 Out
B.2.1.2.3 ARINC 429

ARINC 429 OUT 3A (high-speed) P771 12 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 3B (high-speed) P771 27 Out
SIGNAL GROUND P771 42 --
ARINC 429 IN 1A (low-speed) P771 15 In
ARINC 429 IN 1B (low-speed) P771 30 In

Rev. B 190-00601-06
B.2.1.3 Configuration Module Connections
CONFIG MODULE GROUND P771 1 --
CONFIG MODULE DATA P771 16 I/O
CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT P771 17 Out
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK P771 31 Out
B.2.1.4 AHRS System ID Strapping

AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 P771 2 In
AHRS SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 P771 3 In
By hard strapping the program pins to ground, the GRS 77 is assigned a System ID. IDs identify a GRS
77 as an All Call, #1, #2, or #3 unit. For a single system, the pins are left open (All Call).
The GRS 77 has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or System ID) that is coded into its
ARINC 429 output messages/labels. The System ID may be used to uniquely distinguish the source of the
GRS 77 ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GRS 77. The GRS 77 System ID is set as
follows:
P771 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID

ARINC System ID 1 ARINC System ID 2
System ID Number
Pin 2 Pin 3
All Call Open Open
#1 Ground Open
#2 Open Ground
#3 Ground Ground

190-00601-06 Rev. B
B.3 GMU 44 Magnetometer
B.3.1 J441 Connector
View of J441 connector looking at face of connector pigtail.
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 SIGNAL GROUND --
2 RS-485 OUT B Out
3 SIGNAL GROUND --
4 RS-485 OUT A Out
5 SPARE --
6 POWER GROUND --
7 SPARE --
8 RS-232 IN In
9 +12 VDC POWER In
B.3.1.1 Power Function

+12 VDC POWER, GMU 44 P441 9 In
POWER GROUND, GMU 44 P441 6 --
B.3.1.2 Serial Data

B.3.1.2.1 RS-232
B.3.1.2.2 RS-485
RS-485 OUT A P441 4 Out
RS-485 OUT B P441 2 Out

Rev. B 190-00601-06
B.4 GDC 74A
View of J741 connector looking at rear of unit.
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Pin Pin Name I/O

1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND --
2 OAT PROBE POWER OUT Out
3 OAT PROBE IN HI In
4 OAT PROBE IN LO In
5 SIGNAL GROUND --
6 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 In
7 SIGNAL GROUND --
8 DISCRETE IN* 6 In
9 SIGNAL GROUND --
10 RS-232 IN 1 In
11 RS-232 OUT 1 Out
12 SIGNAL GROUND --
13 RS-232 IN 2 In
14 RS-232 OUT 2 Out
15 SIGNAL GROUND --
16 RESERVED --
17 POWER GROUND --
18 POWER GROUND --
19 POWER GROUND --
20 POWER GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT Out
22 SPARE --
23 ARINC 429 IN 1 A In
24 ARINC 429 IN 1 B In
25 SIGNAL GROUND --
26 ARINC 429 OUT 1 A Out
27 ARINC 429 OUT 1 B Out
28 SIGNAL GROUND --
31 SIGNAL GROUND --
34 SIGNAL GROUND --
37 SIGNAL GROUND --
* Indicates Active Low

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Connector P741, continued
Pin Pin Name I/O
38 SPARE --
39 SPARE --
43 SIGNAL GROUND --
46 SIGNAL GROUND --
49 SIGNAL GROUND --
50 DISCRETE IN 7 In
51 SIGNAL GROUND --
52 DISCRETE IN 8 In
53 SIGNAL GROUND --
54 SPARE --
56 SPARE --
57 SPARE --
59 SPARE --
61 DISCRETE IN* 1 In
62 SIGNAL GROUND --
64 SIGNAL GROUND --
66 SIGNAL GROUND --
68 SIGNAL GROUND --
70 SIGNAL GROUND --
71 ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 In
72 SIGNAL GROUND --
75 SIGNAL GROUND --
78 SIGNAL GROUND --
* Indicates Active Low

Rev. B 190-00601-06
B.4.1.1 Power
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 P741 55 In
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 P741 58 In
OAT PROBE POWER OUT P741 2 Out
POWER GROUND P741 17 --
The power-input pins accept 14/28 VDC. AIRCRAFT POWER 2 is for connecting to an alternate power
source, such as on aircraft with two electrical buses. AIRCRAFT POWER 1 (Pin 55) and AIRCRAFT
POWER 2 (Pin 58) are internally “diode ORed” to provide power redundancy.
B.4.1.2 Serial Data

B.4.1.2.1 RS-232 Input/Output
RS-232 IN1 P741 10 In
RS-232 OUT 1 P741 11 Out
RS-232 IN 2 P741 13 In
RS-232 OUT 2 P741 14 Out
The RS-232 outputs conform to EIA/TIA-232C with an output voltage swing of at least ±5 V when
driving a standard RS-232 load.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
B.4.1.2.2 ARINC 429 Input/Output
ARINC 429 OUT 1 A P741 26,41 Out
ARINC 429 OUT 1 B P741 27,42 Out
ARINC 429 IN 1 A P741 23 In
ARINC 429 IN 1 B P741 24 In
SIGNAL GROUND P741 37
The ARINC 429 transmitters currently operate at low speed. The receivers are capable of accepting either
high-speed or low-speed data. Unless high-speed transmission is necessary, low-speed transmission is
preferred.
B.4.1.3 Temperature Inputs

Temperature input is used for Outside Air Temperature (OAT) computations. The temperature input is a
three-wire temperature probe interface. OAT Power Out and OAT High are connected internally at the
OAT probe. A GTP 59 or other supported temperature probe is required for the GDC 74(X) ADC (Air
Data Computer) installation. The GTP 59 is a Resistive Temperature Device (RTD).

OAT PROBE POWER OUT P741 2 Out
OAT PROBE IN HI P741 3 In
OAT PROBE IN LO P741 4 In

Rev. B 190-00601-06
B.4.1.4 Discrete Signal Inputs
DISCRETE IN* 1 P741 61 In
DISCRETE IN* pins:

INACTIVE: 10 ≤ Vin ≤ 33VDC or Rin ≥100kΩ
ACTIVE: Vin ≤ 1.9VDC with ≥ 75 uA sink current, or Rin ≤ 375Ω
Sink current is internally limited to 200 uA max for a grounded input
DISCRETE IN pins:
INACTIVE: Vin ≤ 3.5VDC
ACTIVE: 10 ≤ Vin ≤ 33VDC with ≥ 75 uA source current
Source current is internally limited to 1.5 mA max for a 10-33VDC input
B.4.1.5 Configuration Module Connections

CONFIG MODULE GROUND P741 1 --
CONFIG MODULE DATA P741 40 I/O
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK P741 60 Out
The configuration module, mounted in the unit connector backshell, contains an EEPROM.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
B.4.1.6 ADC ARINC 429 System ID Connections
ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 1 P741 6 In
ADC SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 2 P741 71 In
By hard strapping the program pins to ground, the GDC 74A is assigned a System ID. IDs identify a
GDC 74A as an All Call, #1, #2, or #3 unit. For a single system, the pins are left open (All Call).
The GDC 74A has an associated Source/Destination Identifier (SDI or System ID) that is coded into its
ARINC 429 output messages/labels. The System ID may be used to uniquely distinguish the source of the
GDC 74A ARINC 429 labels in a system with more than one GDC 74A. The GDC 74A System ID is set
as follows:
Table B-1. P741 Strapping to Achieve Desired System ID

ARINC System ID 1 ARINC System ID 2
System ID Number
Pin 6 Pin 71
All Call Open Open
#1 Ground Open
#2 Open Ground
#3 Ground Ground

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix C Outline and Installation Drawings
C.1 Drawing List
Figure C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations
Figure C-2. GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-3. GMU 44 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-4. GRS 77 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity
Figure C-5. GDC 74A and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option I)
Figure C-6. GDC 74A and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option II)
Figure C-7. GDC 74A Mounting Orientation Limits
Figure C-8. GDC 74A Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation
Figure C-9. GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions
Figure C-10. Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )
Figure C-11. GRS 77 Universal Mount Dimensions
Figure C-12. GMU 44 Universal Mount Dimensions
Figure C-13. Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions
Figure C-14. GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page C-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
J6201
J6202
J6203
Figure C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations
Page C-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure C-2. GDU 620 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.25
3.37
0.30
2.10
AIRCRAFT MOUNTING 1.84
SURFACE
Ø2.38
Figure C-3. GMU 44 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. B 190-00601-06
NOTE:
1. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES [mm].
2. SEE DOCUMENT ENTITLED "REQUIREMENTS FOR AIRCRAFT MOUNTING OF GRS 77 AHRS
AND GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER UNITS" FOR SPECIFIC MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS.
3. MOUNTING RACK IS NOT SYMMETRIC. GRS 77 UNIT MUST BE MOUNTED WITH CONNECTOR FORWARD.
4. SECURE MOUNTING PLATE TO RIGID LOCATION ON AIRFRAME USING FIVE (5) #10 PAN HEAD OR
BUTTON HEAD SCREWS.
5.33
.210
REF
73.41
2X 2.890
CONNECTOR END
OF GRS 77
36.70
1.445
83.19
3.275
190.50
0
2X 7.500
GRS 77 FROM CONNECTOR END
SCALE 1:2
84.20
3.32
40.59
1.60
33
1.3
0
0
91.95
3.62
1.8
46
13.42
193.13
29.87
211.46
102
4.0
1.18
.53
7.60
8.33
Figure C-4. GRS 77 and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity

190-00601-06 Rev. B
GDC 74 (011-00882-10) OUTLINE DRAWING
FOR REMOTE MOUNTING OPTION I:
(CONNECTOR AND FITTINGS ARE OPPOSITE
THE SCREW DOWN MOUNTING HARDWARE.)
0.25 [6.2]
1.78 [45.2]
ALWAYS ORIENT BACKSHELL

WITH SLIDELOCK SPRING
TOWARDS THE TOP AS SHOWN
3.05 [77.5] 6.48 [164.6] 1.78 [45.1]
J400
GPN 330-00366-78
3.22 [81.8]
PITOT AIR FITTING:

1.88 [47.6] UNIT HAS 1/8-27 ANPT FEMALE THREAD.
1.40 [35.6]
0.98 [24.8]
2X 1.23 [31.1] STATIC AIR FITTING:

1.40 [35.6] 0.99 [25.0] 3.58 [90.9]
UNIT HAS 1/8-27 ANPT FEMALE THREAD.
3.09 [78.5] 1.38 [35.1]
6X Ø.17 [4.3]
0.80 [20.2]
2.30 [58.3]
3.10 [78.5]
0.98 [24.8] 0.86 [21.8]

3.26 [82.8]
5.66 [143.8]
6.52 [165.6]
6.82 [173.2]
GDC 74 REMOTE MOUNT PLATE

TOP VIEW SHOWING MOUNTING HOLES
Figure C-5. GDC 74A and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option I)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GDC 74 (011-00882-10) OUTLINE DRAWING
FOR REMOTE MOUNTING OPTION II:
(CONNECTOR AND FITTINGS ARE ON SAME END
AS THE SCREW DOWN MOUNTING HARDWARE.)
1.07 [27.1]
1.78 [45.2]
ALWAYS ORIENT BACKSHELL

3.05 [77.5] 0.31 [7.9] 6.48 [164.6] 1.78 [45.1] WITH SLIDELOCK SPRING
TOWARDS THE TOP AS SHOWN
J400
GPN 330-00366-78
3.22 [81.8]
PITOT AIR FITTING:

1.88 [47.6] UNIT HAS 1/8-27 ANPT FEMALE THREAD.
1.40 [35.6]
0.98 [24.8]
2X 1.23 [31.1] STATIC AIR FITTING:

1.40 [35.6] 3.78 [96.0]
UNIT HAS 1/8-27 ANPT FEMALE THREAD.
3.09 [78.5]
Figure C-6. GDC 74A and Mounting Rack Dimensions and Center of Gravity (Option II)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
VERTICAL
MOUNT
UP 45°
90°
PAST VERTICAL
MOUNT
NOTES:
1. ORIENTATION MUST BE LIMITED TO RANGE SHOWN

HORIZONTAL
TO AVOID FLUID ACCUMULATION INSIDE UNIT.
MOUNT
2. UNIT MAY BE ORIENTED AS SHOWN IN ANY POSITION
FROM HORIZONTAL TO 45 DEGREES PAST VERTICAL.
Figure C-7. GDC 74A Mounting Orientation Limits

Rev. B 190-00601-06
UP
45° 45°
MAX
MAX
NOTES:
1. ORIENTATION MUST BE LIMITED TO RANGE SHOWN

TO AVOID FLUID ACCUMULATION INSIDE UNIT.
2. UNIT MAY BE ORIENTED ON VERTICAL SURFACE AS SHOWN.

MOUNTING ORIENTATION MUST BE WITHIN 45 DEGREES OF VERTICAL.
Figure C-8. GDC 74A Vertical Surface Mounting Orientation

190-00601-06 Rev. B
0.07
R0.12 TYP 0.27
(Ø0.144) 107°
(Ø0.144) (0.08) R0.12 TYP
0.05
9.64
6X Ø 0.144 THRU ALL
0.31
107°
0.05
0.28 0.20 0.08
0.20
0.07
DETAIL D
DETAIL A NO SCALE
NO SCALE
R0.12 TYP
0.25
(Ø0.144)
0.08 (0.08)
0.04 FRONT SIDE VIEW
6.30 6.30
6.46 0.23
0.32 0.05
107°
2X 4.24
R0.12 TYP
3.25 0.07
DETAIL B (4X)
NO SCALE 0.20
DETAIL E
2X 1.74 NO SCALE
0.04 0.20
0.07
(0.08)
(Ø0.144)
0.02 (Ø0.144)
9.46 (0.07) 107°
9.60
0.12 0.28
R0.69
(0.08)
(0.56) 0.27
DETAIL C (2X) DETAIL F

NO SCALE NO SCALE
Figure C-9. GDU 620 Cutout Dimensions

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure C-10. Trim Plate P/N 115-01009-( )

190-00601-06 Rev. B
1.50
8.50
1.50
115-00909-00 ANGLE, AHRS BRKT MOUNTING

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
9.11
3.92
1.61
115-00922-00 BRACKET, TOP, AHRS, UNIV

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
3.87 1.72
3.73
1.00
3.25
115-01017-01 BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER, TOP, UNIV

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
3.77
2.03 0.75
3.59 2.50
2.50
1.56
115-00939-01 BRACKET, MAGNETOMETER, UNIV

Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
UP
OUTER PERIMETER OF
TEMPLATE IS SAME SIZE
AS GDU 620 BEZEL
RIGHT
10.00
9.600
3.050
6.459 6.70
3.250
CUTOUT PERIMETER
9.459
CUTOUT REPRESENTS
PFD DISPLAY AREA
NOTES:
1. CUTOUT TEMPLATE IS MADE FROM STAINLESS STEEL AND CAN BE USED FOR MULTIPLE
INSTALLATIONS.
2. CUTOUT TEMPLATE SHOULD BE TEMPORARILY AFFIXED TO INSTRUMENT PANEL IN DESIRED
LOCATION PRIOR TO MARKING CUTOUT. THE OUTSIDE EDGES OF THE CUTOUT PATTERN SHOULD
BE USED WHEN MARKING THE CUTOUT ONTO THE INSTRUMENT PANEL.
3. INSTRUMENT PANEL HOLES FOR GDU MOUNTING NUTPLATES SHOULD BE DRILLED USING A #30
(0.1285") DRILL BIT PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF THE TEMPLATE FROM THE INSTRUMENT PANEL. THE
HOLES ARE RESIZED LATER TO THEIR FINAL DIAMETER.
Figure C-13. Cutout Template P/N 115-01010-00 Dimensions

Rev. B 190-00601-06
10FT±6"
M27500-22TE3V14 CABLE
5/16-32 UNEF-2A
0.563
Ø0.255
1.015 0.500
2.065
Figure C-14. GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions

190-00601-06 Rev. B

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix D SAMPLE INSTALLATIONS
D.1 Sample Instrument Panel Layouts
Audio Panel
20
200 40
180
60
160 VOR INDICATOR
Clock 80
140
120 100 Nav/Com 1
Vac
d.c.
elec.
6 E
3 10
15
5 VERTICAL
12
SPEED
Fuel Qty UP 20
Nav/Com 2
33
0 VOR INDICATOR
15
turn coordinator DN 100 FEET 20
30
S
PER MIN
L R 5
21 15
2 min W
24 10
no pitch
information
Elec Current
ADF
Tachometer ADF
Transponder
BEFORE MODIFICATION
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-1. Installation of GDU 620 with Ideal Six-Pack
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page D-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Nav/Com 1
VOR INDICATOR
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
10
15
Nav/Com 2
6 5 VERTICAL
3 E SPEED
UP 20
0
N
VOR INDICATOR
12
d.c.
elec.
DN
100 FEET 20
33
15
PER MIN
5
15
10
30
W 21
24
turn coordinator Audio Panel
L R
2 min 6
no pitch
3 E
information
ADF
12
Transponder
15
3
30
S
Clock 21
S
OB
BEFORE MODIFICATION
GNS 530W
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
GNS 430W
Audio Panel
Clock
Transponder
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-2. Installation of GDU 620 with Non-Ideal Six-Pack
Page D-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
S-TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
Clock 80
140
120 100
SANDEL SN3308
6 E
d.c.
3 elec.
N v 10
A
V
u
e
15
5
12
33 N
VERTICAL
SPEED
M UP 20
A
15 S
P
0
turn coordinator B
DN
100 FEET 20
30
R PER MIN
L R G 5
21 15
2 min 10
24 W no pitch
information
S
OB
shft sync a-b
Switches
Ignition Vent
BEFORE MODIFICATION
S-TEC
Placard
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
Switches
Ignition Vent
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-3. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments on Stepped Part of Instrument
Panel

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Electrical Gauges
Audio Panel
Transponder
6 E
20 3
200 40
33 N
12
180
60
160 Tachometer
15
80
140
30
S
120 100 21
24 W
OBS
GNS 530
HDG 060
d.c.
elec.
6 E 10
3 15
5 VERTICAL
SPEED
N
12
UP 20
0 Blank Fuel Flow/Pressure
33
15
turn coordinator DN
100 FEET 20
30
PER MIN
L R 21 5
W 15
2 min 10
24
VOR 1 VOR 2
no pitch ijav ooo ORD
information
1.2 NM
GNS 430
Clock EADS
BEFORE MODIFICATION
Electrical Gauges
Audio Panel
Transponder
Tachometer
20
200 40
180
60
160
80
140
120 100
GNS 530W
Fuel Flow/Pressure
GNS 430W
Clock EADS
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-4. Installation of GDU 620 Using 2 1/4 Inch Backup Instruments

Rev. B 190-00601-06

#

!!"

BEFORE MODIFICATION

AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-5. Installation of GDU 620 with Standby Instruments Below

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Blank Blank
6 E
20 3 Audio Panel
200 40
12
33 N
180
60
160
15 S
80
140 Nav/Com 1
30
120 100 21
24 W
S
OB
d.c.
elec.
6 Nav/Com 2
3 E 10
15
5 VERTICAL
N
12
SPEED
UP 20
33
0 Blank
15
turn coordinator DN
100 FEET 20
30
S
PER MIN
L R 5
21 15
2 min W
10
no pitch
24
Transponder
information
BEFORE MODIFICATION
Blank
Audio Panel
GNS 430W
GNS 430W
Transponder
AFTER MODIFICATION
Figure D-6. Installation of GDU Using Both 2 1/4 Inch and 3 1/8 Inch Backup Instruments

Rev. B 190-00601-06
D.2 GMU 44 Installation Examples
MOUNTING
PLATE
6-32 NUTPLATE &

RIVETS (2X)
STAINLESS
6-32 SCREW &
WASHER (2X)
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Figure D-7. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted
For composite aircraft, screws with self locking nuts are an acceptable installation method.
6-32 LOCKING NUT &

WASHER (2X) MOUNTING
PLATE
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
6-32 SCREW &

WASHER (2X)
Figure D-8. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Side Mounted
190-00601-06 Rev. B
MOUNTING
6-32 LOCKING NUT & PLATE
WASHER (2X)
6-32 SCREW &

WASHER (2X)
Figure D-9. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Suspended - Side Mounted
6-32 LOCKING NUT &

WASHER (4X)
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
MOUNTING PLATE
6-32 SCREW &

WASHER (4X)
Figure D-10. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount- Bottom Mounted

Rev. B 190-00601-06
6-32 SCREW &
WASHER (4X)
MOUNTING PLATE
6-32 LOCKING NUT &

WASHER (4X)
GMU 44 UNIVERSAL
BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Figure D-11. Installation of GMU 44 with GMU 44 Universal Mount, Suspended - Bottom Mounted
Figure D-12. Not Used

190-00601-06 Rev. B
D.3 GDC 74A Installation Examples
GDC 74A
EXISTING FLOOR PANEL OR 3 IN

NEW SUPPORT PANEL (SEE CLEARANCE
REQUIREMENTS SECTION FOR
RECOMMENDED THICKNESS AND
DESIGN FEATURES)
SUPPORT PANEL SHOULD BE

FASTENED TO EACH AIRFRAME
MEMBER ACROSS THE SPAN
EXISTING
AIRFRAME
MEMBER
SKIN
Figure D-13. Installation of GDC 74A to Mounting Plate
GDC 74A UNIT
AIRFRAME
STRINGER
MOUNTING
BRACKET
FASTENING
HARDWARE
Figure D-14. Installation of GDC 74A – Horizontal Orientation

Rev. B 190-00601-06
1 SCREW (6 REQ'D)
BULKHEAD
MOUNTING SURFACE
2 115-00573-00
REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A
(PART OF 011-01011-00)
GDC 74A UNIT

CONNECTION ORIENTED DOWN
1 NUTPLATE
RIVET (2X)
115-00574-00 2 UP
HOLD-DOWN CLAMP, GDC 74A
(6 REQ'D);
(PART OF 011-01011-00)
(ALTERNATELY MAY USE
NUT AND WASHER)
NOTES:
OR NAS1149FN616P (M)K2000-06; OR F2000-06
OR
OR MS21042L06
2. THE REMOTE MOUNT PLATE MAY ALTERNATELY BE INSTALLED WITH THE HOLD-DOWN CLAMP AT THE
TOP OF THE INSTALLATION, SO IT IS AT THE OPPOSITE SIDE FROM THE GDC 74A CONNECTIONS. THE
CONNECTION PORTS HOWEVER ARE ALWAYS ORIENTED DOWN.
Figure D-15. Installation of GDC 74A – Vertical Orientation
SKIN
PRE-ASSEMBLED MOUNTING
UP PLATE (ANGLE ON REVERSE)
EXISTING GDC 74A UNIT

STRUCTURE
MS20470AD4-X RIVET OR
CR3213-4-X OR
#6 SCREW / WASHER / LOCKING NUT
(DO NOT MIX) (A/R)
115-00573-00
115-00574-00
REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A
(PART OF 011-01011-00)
(PART OF 011-01011-00)
Figure D-16. Installation of GDC 74A – Vertical Orientation using Stringers

190-00601-06 Rev. B
SKIN
MOUNTING ORIENTATION
MEETS CRITERIA FOR
ANGLE <45° FROM VERTICAL
MOUNTING PLATE ASSY
UP (FABRICATED 0.050 - 0.063"
2024-T3 ALUM)
SKIN GDC 74A UNIT
EXISTING
CONNECTIONS 1
STRUCTURE
MS20470AD4-X RIVET OR
#6 SCREW / WASHER /
LOCKING NUT
(DO NOT MIX) (A/R)
DIM A DIM B (SPACING)

TRIM ANGLE A/R
ENSURE NO CONTACT DIM A
115-00574-00 2
(PART OF 011-01011-00)
0.19 MIN HARDWARE DIM. A DIM. B

ANGLE LEG MIN. MAX.
DETAIL RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
NOTES:
1. REFER TO 190-00303-15 GDC 74A INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR APPROVED PRACTICES WHILE
INSTALLING LINES AND CONNECTIONS.
2. THE REMOTE MOUNTING PLATE MAY ALTERNATELY BE INSTALLED WITH THE HOLD-DOWN
CLAMP AT THE TOP OF THE INSTALLATION, SO IT IS AT THE OPPOSITE SIDE FROM THE GDC 74A
CONNECTIONS. THE CONNECTION PORTS HOWEVER ARE ALWAYS ORIENTED DOWN.

UP
2 MOUNTING
RIVETS 1
SUPPORT PLATE
A / R FOR SUPPORT ANGLE
ANGLE
SCREW 1
(6 REQ'D FOR ORIENTATION)
NUT 1 115-00573-00
WASHER 1 REMOTE MOUNT PLATE, GDC 74A
(6 REQ'D) (PART OF 011-01011-00)
NOTES:
RIVETS MS20470AD4-X; OR MS20426AD4-X
OR NAS1149FN616P (M)K2000-06; OR F2000-06
OR
OR MS21042L06
2. THE MATERIAL OF THE SUPPORT ANGLE SHOULD MINIMALLY BE 0.5" X 0.5" X 0.063" 2024-T3 or 6061-T6
ALUMINUM. TRIM THE ANGLE LEG THAT IS NORMAL TO THE MOUNTING PLATE AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CONTACT
WITH SKIN OR EXISTING STRUCTURES. ONLY ONE ANGLE IS REQUIRED.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix E Equipment Compatibility and Configuration
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the G600 system when configured as described herein. For G600 configuration information
refer to Section 5.5.
E.1 Electric Standby Attitude Indicators
Any air-driven attitude indicator may be used to provide back-up attitude information; however, if an electric attitude indicator is used to provide backup attitude
information, it must be one of the following:
Mfg Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Mid-Continent 4200 2 1/4 inch electric ADI Must be used with MD420 Emergency Power System
Instruments 4300-4XX 3 1/8 inch electric ADI With supplied Standby Battery Pack
E.2 GPS Source

The following GPS position sources are compatible with the GDU 620:
Mfr Model Data Format Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
400W/500W Series ARINC 429 Main software version 3.10 or Main ARINC 429 Config: IN 1: Low, Garmin GDU
RS-232 later is required. OUT: High, GAMA 429
SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1)
If a 500W TAWS unit is LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
installed, it MUST be VNAV: Enable Labels
connected as GPS1. Main RS-232 Config: CHNL 1: Off / MapMX
Single GDU 620 Installations:
Main CDI/OBS Config: Allow CDI Key
(i.e. CDI can be GPS or VLOC)
Dual GDU 620 Installations:
Main CDI/OBS Config: Ignore CDI Key
Garmin (i.e. CDI is GPS Only)
GNS 480 ARINC 429 Software version 2.2 or later is Serial Setup: CH 1 (RX/TX): MapMX / MapMX
RS-232 required. ARINC 429 Setup: CH 2 IN: Garmin GDU, Low,
Sys 1 (for GPS 1)
Sys 2 (for GPS 2)
CH 1 OUT: GAMA 429 NO FP
Single GDU 620 Installations:
Misc Setup: CDI SELECT: USE
(i.e. CDI can be GPS or NAV)
Dual GDU 620 Installations:
Misc Setup: CDI SELECT: IGNORE
(i.e. CDI is GPS Only)
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page E-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
E.3 Autopilot
The following autopilots are compatible with the GDU 620 / G600.
Data
Mfr Model Notes Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
II / III / IV
Century Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot G600 can interface with radio coupler only.
21 / 31 / 41
400B Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
For 400 IFCS, the mode control panel must be adjusted NOT
300 IFCS/400 IFCS/800 IFCS Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
Cessna to attenuate the heading or course error signal.
G-579( ) attitude gyro may replace G550A or G1050A ADI to
300B IFCS/400B IFCS/800B IFCS Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
provide attitude information to the autopilot system.
The original MCS-65 or YRS-65 heading/yaw rate system
APS-65 Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot must remain in the aircraft in order to provide the yaw rate
Collins
and compass monitor inputs to the autopilot.
AP-106/107 Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot
KAP 100/150/200
Analog [3] Attitude based autopilot [1] [2] [4]
KFC 150/200/250
Honeywell
KAP 140 Analog [3] Rate based autopilot [1]
(Bendix
King) Analog [3]
KFC 225/275/325 ARINC 429 Attitude based autopilot [1] [4] [5]
GPSS
20/30/40/50/55/60 Analog [3], Must be configured to operate with either the NSD-360 or
Rate based autopilot
60-2/65 Discrete KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
Must be configured to operate with either the NSD-360 or
KI-525 (KCS-55) heading system.
S-TEC Analog [3], • Rate based autopilot
Discrete, • Altitude If the optional altitude preselect function is activated:
55X
ARINC 429 preselect/capture is • 55X computer must have mod AC/AC
GPSS available as an option. (software/hardware).
• 55X computer must be strapped for a 01282 altitude
selector/alerter (P2-23 must be OPEN).
[1] The compass valid discrete input to the autopilot computer must be grounded when the G600 is installed. The autopilot uses this input to determine the
validity of the heading and course datum (error) signals. With mechanical instruments, when heading becomes invalid the heading and course datum
signals will remain set to the value when valid heading was last received. However, unlike mechanical instruments, the G600 will automatically set these
signals to zero error whenever the heading becomes invalid, resulting in a wings-level condition. This allows GPSS (simulated heading datum) from the
G600 to still be used by the autopilot if the gyro heading were to fail.
Page E-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
[2] For KAP 150/KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-16) is not supported.
[3] Analog signal characteristics for the interfaces from the GDU 620 to the autopilot can be found in Section 4.2.5 of the GDU 620 Installation Manual
(Garmin document 190-00601-04). The heading and course signal characteristics are determined by the “Autopilot Type” that is configured. Refer to
Section 5.5.9.
[4] KI 256 ADI or KVG 350 Gyro must be retained for the autopilot to function properly. Optionally, the KI 258 ADI may replace the KI 256 ADI to provide
attitude information to the autopilot system.
[5] For KFC 325, installations with an existing EFIS are not supported.
E.4 External Flight Directors
The following flight directors are compatible with the GDU 620/G600.
Mfr Model Data Notes [1] Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information
Format
Cessna 300B IFCS/400B IFCS/800B IFCS Analog
APS-65 Analog N/A
OUT OF VIEW+ signal from
Collins autopilot must be inverted
AP-106/107 Analog
to be active-high for correct
operation with the G600.
For KFC 150, EFIS-enabled KC-19X computer (P/N 065-0042-
Honeywell KFC 150/200/225/275 Analog
16) is not supported.
(Bendix
King) For KFC 325, installations with an existing EFIS are not
KFC 250 / 325 Analog
supported.
• ST-645 Remote Annunciator panel must be installed (or
retained) if the flight director is displayed on G600. This will
provide the required mode annunciations.
• Only flight director pitch/roll outputs directly from 55X
55X Analog
computer can be used for display on G600 (FD pitch/roll
S-TEC outputs from the Remote Annunciator panel cannot be used).
• If FD Logic output from 55/55X P2-4 is connected to P1-20
input on ST-645, it must be disconnected.
• ST-670 Single Cue FD Interface Unit for King KI 256 (PN
60-2/65 01180) must be installed or retained to display flight director
Analog
(with ST-670) information on the G600.
[1] The characteristics of the analog signals are determined by the “Flight Director Type” that is configured. Refer to Section 5.5.10.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
E.5 Navigation Receivers
The following navigation receivers are compatible with the GDU 620.
Only one SL30 can be
Garmin SL30 RS-232 Indicator Head Type Serial
connected
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 Config:
One or two navigation receivers RX: Low
GNS 430W/530W ARINC 429
can be connected SDI: VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
Garmin VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
ARINC 429 Setup: CH 1 OUT VOR/ILS Low,
One or two navigation receivers
GNS 480 (CNX80) ARINC 429 Sys 1 (for NAV 1)
can be connected
Sys 2 (for NAV 2)
E.6 Traffic Source

The following Traffic sources are compatible with the GDU 620:
• TIS 429 OUTPUT CHANNEL 2: GARMIN W/TIS
• The GDU 620 can control (this is a high-speed output)
Garmin GTX 33/330 ARINC 429 the TIS state, however, it
does not provide control of
the GTX 33.
KTA 810/KMH 820 ARINC 429 TAS Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
Controller Type: Discrete *
Honeywell * Controller type is only required if GDU 620 is used to control the
KTA 910/KMH 920 ARINC 429 TCAS I traffic system.
For SKY 497, ARINC 735 Alternate Display type must be set
L3 Comm
SKY497/SKY899 ARINC 429 TAS to “ARINC735 Type 1” (P1-80 must be grounded).
(Goodrich)
• TAS External unit capable of displaying traffic and controlling the
TAS 620 • GDU does not provide any TCAD is required in addition to GDU 620 (e.g. 400W/500W
Avidyne (Ryan) ARINC 429
(9900BX) control of TCAD and will only or Avidyne display/controller).
display TCAD traffic.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
E.7 Data Link
The following data link is compatible with the GDU 620:
XM subscription is required. Ethernet port that is connected to GDU #2 must be enabled.
Garmin GDL 69/69A Ethernet GDU 620 will also control
GDL 69A audio functions.
E.8 2 ¼” Standby Airspeed Indicators and Altimeters

The following 2 ¼” airspeed indicators and altimeters are suitable for use as standby instruments for a G600 installation:
25020-0179 200 knots maximum airspeed Range markings must be added to match the current
25025-0177 250 knots maximum airspeed airspeed indicator in the aircraft.
Aerosonic 25035-0181 350 knots maximum airspeed
Instruments [1] 25040-0180 400 knots maximum airspeed
15035-0110x 35,000 ft Inches or millibars must match the current altimeter in the
16550-11xx 50,000 ft aircraft.
[1] These instruments are available through Mid-Continent Instruments.

E.9 ADF Receiver
The following ADF receivers are compatible with the GDU 620:
Collins ADF-60A Analog DC Sin/Cos
KR 87
Honeywell Analog DC Sin/Cos
KDF 806

190-00601-06 Rev. B
E.10 Weather Radar Source
Not currently supported.
E.11 Lightning Source

E.12 External TAWS Source

NOTE
The GDU 620 will not display terrain data from an external source; however, if a 500W Series unit with TAWS is connected as defined herein, the
GDU 620 will display all of the required TAWS annunciations and eliminate the need for a separate TAWS annunciator panel.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix F Interconnect Diagrams
F.1 Drawing List
Figure F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)
Figure F-2. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Dual GDUs)
Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT- GDC 74A/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect
Figure F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)
Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDUs)
Figure F-6. GPS Source Interconnect (Single GDU)
Figure F-7. GPS Source Interconnect (Dual GDUs)
Figure F-8. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU)
Figure F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDUs)
Figure F-10. Honeywell (Bendix/King) Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect
Figure F-11. S-TEC Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect
Figure F-12. Century Autopilot/Flight Director Interconnect
Figure F-13. Collins Autopilot Interconnect
Figure F-14. Cessna Autopilot Interconnect
Figure F-15. Audio Interconnect
Figure F-16. GDL 69/69A Interconnect
Figure F-17. Traffic Advisory System Interconnect
Figure F-18. ADF Interconnect
Figure F-19. External Switches
Figure F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI Interconnect (Integral Battery)
Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI Interconnect (External Battery)
Figure F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect
Figure F-23. Weather Radar Provisions Interconnect
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page F-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Page F-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure F-1. Power, Lighting and Configuration Module Interconnect (Single GDU)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
10
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1
P6202 PFD 1 11
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG ESSENTIAL BUS

3
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG 5A (28 VDC)
7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 2 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
3
AIRCRAFT GND 35 20 AWG GROUND
5
CONFIG MODULE PWR 49 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 50 BLK 1
CONFIG MODULE DATA 32 YEL 3
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 33 WHT 2 4
LIGHTING BUS HI 15 TO AIRCRAFT

6 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16 LIGHTING BUS
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
S
8 9
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
P6201
ETHERNET IN 2B 31
ETHERNET IN 2A 30
ETHERNET OUT 2B 33
ETHERNET OUT 2A 32
S
CDU SYSTEM ID PGM* 4
GROUND 22
10
P6202 PFD 2
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 20 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS
3
AIRCRAFT POWER 34 20 AWG 5A (28 VDC)
7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 2 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
3 AIRCRAFT GND GROUND
35 20 AWG
5
LIGHTING BUS HI 15 TO AIRCRAFT

6 7
LIGHTING BUS LO 16 LIGHTING BUS
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
GRS 77 AHRS 8
P771
AHRS 9
3 ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GRS OR GRS 1)
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 18 22 AWG 22 AWG
5A AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GRS 2)
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 20 22 AWG (14/28 VDC)
3
AIRCRAFT GND 22 22 AWG 22 AWG 6 7
AIRCRAFT GND 24 22 AWG
5
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 31 WHT 2
4
5 P441
RS-485 IN 1A 25 4
RS-485 IN 1B 39 2
s
1
RS-232 OUT 2 10 8
MAGNETOMETER PWR OUT 9 9
MAGNETOMETER GROUND 40 6
s
3
ARINC 429 IN 1A 15
ARINC 429 IN 1B 30
s
GDC 74A ADC

P741
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 42 8
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 41 ADC 9
s
ESSENTIAL BUS (SINGLE GRS OR GRS 1)
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 55 22 AWG AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS (GRS 2)
5A
AIRCRAFT GND 17 22 AWG (14/28 VDC)
6 7
OAT POWER 2 WHT

OAT PROBE IN HI 3 BLU
OAT PROBE IN LO 4 ORN
s

5
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. GROUND DESIGNATIONS: s SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
3. BOTH POWER LEADS AND BOTH GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED. THE SPLICE MUST BE INSIDE THE CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL.
4. CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE LRU CONNECTOR.
5. CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION MODULE
MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P771 OR P741.
6. FOR A SINGLE GDU INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER TO THE ESSENTIAL BUS.
7. FOR A DUAL GDU INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER FOR THE SYSTEM 1 LRU TO THE ESSENTIAL BUS.
FOR THE SYSTEM 2 LRU’S THE THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE AVIONICS OR MAIN BUS.
8. CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN. LABEL AS SYSTEM 1 OR 2 AS APPROPRIATE FOR DUAL GDU 620
INSTALLATIONS (I.E. “AHRS 1”, ‘AHRS 2", “ADC 1” OR “ADC2").
9. IF THE AIRCRAFT DOES NOT HAVE AN “ESSENTIAL” BUS, CONNECT TO A BUS THAT RECEIVES POWER AS SOON AS
THE BATTERY MASTER IS TURNED ON. REFER TO SECTION 2.5.4 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
10 AT GRS 77 AND GDC 74A, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0 ".
Figure F-3. Power/Config Module/OAT- GDC 74A/GRS 77/GMU 44 Interconnect

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GRS 77 AHRS
P6202 P771
ARINC 429 IN 1A 4 14 ARINC 429 OUT 1A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 21 29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 26 GPS1 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 OUT 1 27 11 GPS1 RS-232 IN
RS-232 GND 1 44 41 SIGNAL GND
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 6 GPS2 RS-232 IN
4 4
s s
4
N/C 2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
N/C 37 SIGNAL GROUND
GDC 74A ADC

P741

s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 11 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 10 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 12 RS-232 GND 1
s s
N/C 6 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 1

N/C 7 SIGNAL GROUND
NOTES:
3. AT GDU 620, GRS 77 AND GDC 74A, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL
-- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 ".
4. THIS CONNECTION IS ONLY REQUIRED IF GPS #2 IS CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.
Figure F-4. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Single GDU)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #1 GRS 77 AHRS #1
P6202 P771
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 26 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 11 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 41 RS-232 GND 1
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 6 GPS2 RS-232 IN
s s
2 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
37 SIGNAL GROUND
GDC 74A ADC #1

P741
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 11 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 2 28 10 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 12 RS-232 GND 1
s s
6 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 1
7 SIGNAL GROUND
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 GRS 77 AHRS #2

P6202 P771
s s
RS-232 IN 1 10 26 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 OUT 1 27 11 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 44 41 RS-232 GND 1
s s
RS-232 OUT 4 30 6 GPS2 RS-232 IN
s s
3 AHRS SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
37 SIGNAL GROUND
GDC 74A ADC #2

P741
s s
RS-232 IN 2 11 11 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 2 28 10 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 2 45 12 RS-232 GND 1
s s
71 ADC SYSTEM ID PGM* 2
72 SIGNAL GROUND
NOTES:
3. AT GDU 620, GRS 77 AND GDC 74A, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL
-- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 ".
Figure F-5. Attitude and Air Data Interconnect (Dual GDUs)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
GARMIN GPS #1
9 6
GPS 400W
GDU 620 PFD/MFD GNC 420W GPS 500W
5 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
P6202 P1 P5 P4001 P5001
RS232 IN 3 12 5 - 56 56 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)
RS232 GND 3 46 23 - GND GND GROUND 8
s
7
TIME MARK IN 1A 40 19 - 16 16 TIME MARK OUT +
GPS 1 TIME MARK IN 1B -
41 17 - - TIME MARK OUT -
s
ARINC 429 IN 3A 6 - 4 46 46 GPS 429 OUT A (GAMA 429/

ARINC 429 IN 3B 23 - 24 47 47 GPS 429 OUT B 429 NO FP)
s
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 - 8 48 48 GPS 429 IN A

(GARMIN GDU)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 - 28 49 49 GPS 429 IN B
s
GPS #2
GARMIN 6
9
GPS 400W
GNC 420W GPS 500W
GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
P1 P5 P4001 P5001
- 8 48 48 GPS 429 IN A
(GARMIN GDU)
- 28 49 49 GPS 429 IN B
RS232 IN 4 13 5 - 56 56 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)

s
7
TIME MARK IN 2A 42 19 - 16 16 TIME MARK OUT +
GPS 2 TIME MARK IN 2B 43 17 - - - TIME MARK OUT -
s
ARINC 429 IN 5A 8 - 4 46 46 GPS 429 OUT A (GAMA 429/

ARINC 429 IN 5B 25 - 24 47 47 GPS 429 OUT B 429 NO FP)
s
NOTES:
3. AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS
THAN 3.0 ". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS
PRACTICAL.
4. IF ONLY ONE NAVIGATOR IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR GPS 1.
5. FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS REFER TO SECTION 5.5
6. FOR NAVIGATOR SETUP ITEMS REFER TO APPENDIX E.
7. THE TIME MARK B/- CONNECTION (P6202-41/43) IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE 400W/500W SERIES UNITS AND MUST
BE LEFT UNCONNECTED IN THE INSTALLATION. A SINGLE CONDUCTOR SHIELDED WIRE MAY BE USED FOR THE
TIME MARK IN THIS CASE.
8. FOR PINS IDENTIFIED WITH “GND”, CONNECT WIRE TO GROUND AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT.
9. IF A TAWS-EQUIPPED 500W SERIES UNIT IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GPS1 – ONLY TAWS
ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GPS1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO TAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS ARE INSTALLED, THE
TAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE CONNECTED AS GPS1.
10. REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PIN-OUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
PIN-OUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
Figure F-6. GPS Source Interconnect (Single GDU)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure F-8. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Single GDU)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
NAV 1
ARINC 429 GARMIN
4
PILOT’S GDU 620 6
GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
P6202 P5 P4006 P5006
ARINC 429 IN 4A 7 5 24 24 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A

NAV 1 25 23 23 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 4B 24
s
ARINC 429 IN 6A 9
NAV 2
ARINC 429 IN 6B 26
s
COPILOT’S GDU 620 6

NAV 2
P6202 GARMIN
4
ARINC 429 IN 4A 7 GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W
NAV 1
ARINC 429 IN 4B 24
s P5 P4006 P5006
ARINC 429 IN 6A 9 5 24 24 VOR/ILS 429 OUT A

NAV 2 25 23 23 VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 IN 6B 26
s
RS-232
PILOT’S GDU 620 6 P6202
NAV 1 RS-232 OUT 5 31
RS-232 IN 5 14
NAV 2 RS-232 GND 5 48 NAV 1 OR NAV 2
s
GARMIN
4 5 7
SL30
COPILOT’S GDU 620 6 37-Pin
P6202
NAV 1 RS-232 OUT 5 31 N/C 4 RXD1
RS-232 IN 5 14 5 TXD1
NAV 2 RS-232 GND 5 48 3 SERIAL GROUND
s
NOTES:
3. AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
BE LESS THAN 3.0 ". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A
CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH LRU INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
4. IF ONLY ONE NAV RECEIVER IS INSTALLED, WIRE AS SHOWN FOR NAV 1.
5. ONLY ONE SL30 MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620. IT CAN BE CONFIGURED AS NAV 1, OR AS NAV 2 IF
NAV 1 IS CONFIGURED FOR AN ARINC 429 NAV SOURCE.
6. FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS REFER TO SECTION 5.5.
7. THE SL30 MUST BE CONNECTED AS THE SAME NAVIGATION SOURCE TO BOTH GDU’S (I.E. AS NAV 1 ON
BOTH GDU’S, OR AS NAV 2 ON BOTH GDU’S).
Figure F-9. Navigation Receiver Interconnect (Dual GDUs)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. B 190-00601-06
FLIGHT DIRECTOR – SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS
KI 256 ADI 14
(on copilot’s side) P2561
12
CMD BAR RETRACT P
190-00601-06
ROLL CMD BAR IN M
PITCH CMD BAR IN L
(OPTIONAL)
CMD BAR REF N AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
KFC 150 11 KFC 200 KFC 225 KFC 275

GARMIN
GDU 620 KC 191 KC 29X KC 225 KCP 220
P6201 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P3

FD ENABLE IN 9 16 - - p - 48 8 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 C - - EE - 49 21 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 E - - BB - 50 29 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - A F - - 51 - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s
Sheet 2 of 4
KCI 310 ADI 14
(on copilot’s side) P1
12
CMD BAR RETRACT R
ROLL CMD BAR IN T
PITCH CMD BAR IN P
(OPTIONAL)
CMD BAR REF W AUTOPILOT
HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
KFC 250 KFC 325

GARMIN
GDU 620 KC 29X KCP 220
P6201
P1 P2 P1 P2 P3
FD ENABLE IN 9 - p 15 - - CMD BAR RETRACT

FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - EE 39 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - BB 7 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 F - - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s
Rev. B
Page F-15
FLIGHT DIRECTOR - DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
GARMIN
Rev. B
GDU 620 #2 P6201
Page F-16
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 8
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 AUTOPILOT
FD PITCH DOWN 16 HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
s
KFC 150 11 KFC 200 KFC 225 KFC 275
GARMIN KC 191 KC 29X KC 225 KCP 220

GDU 620 #1 P6201 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P3
s s 15
FD ENABLE IN 9 16 - - p - 48 8 - - CMD BAR RETRACT
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 C - - EE - 49 21 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT

FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 E - - BB - 50 29 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 - A F - - 51 - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s
Sheet 3 of 4
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 8
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 AUTOPILOT
FD PITCH DOWN 16 HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING)
s
KFC 250 KFC 325
GARMIN KC 29X KCP 220

GDU 620 #1 P6201 P1 P2 P1 P2 P3
s s 15
FD ENABLE IN 9 - p 15 - - CMD BAR RETRACT

FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - EE 39 - - ROLL CMD BAR OUT
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - BB 7 - - PITCH CMD BAR OUT

FD PITCH DOWN 16 F - - 41 - CMD BAR REF
s
190-00601-06
Sheet 4 of 4

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 2 of 4

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 3 of 4
Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 4 of 4

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Rev. B
Page F-22
AUTOPILOT
AUTOPILOT
CENTURY
Century Century Century Century Century Century
II III IV 21 31/41 2000
GARMIN 6 CD34 CD34 CD58 CD66 CD194 CD175 CD191 CD175 CD191 CD175 CD189
GDU 620 P6203
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 7 7 7
49 - 17 - 17 - 17 - HEADING DATUM HI
A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 - - - - - - - - HEADING DATUM LO
s
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 48 - 2 - 2 - 2 - COURSE DATUM HI
7 7 7
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 - - - - - - - - COURSE DATUM LO
s
LATERAL +FLAG OUT 54 - - - - 2 - 7 - 7 - - LAT DEV FLAG +

LATERAL -FLAG OUT 55 - - - - 3 - 8 - 8 - - LAT DEV FLAG -
s
LATERAL +LEFT OUT 52 B B - 32 4 - 6 - 6 - - LAT DEV +LT

LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 53 A A - 31 5 - 5 - 5 - - LAT DEV +RT
s
Sheet 1 of 4
VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 58 - - - - - - 2 - 2 - - GS DEV FLAG +
VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 59 - - - - - - 1 - 1 - - GS DEV FLAG -
s
VERTICAL +UP OUT 56 - - B 45 - - 4 - 4 - - GS DEV +UP

VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 57 - - A 46 - - 3 - 3 - - GS DEV +DOWN
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH 46 - - 44 10 1 - 9 - 9 - - LOC SWITCH

A/P AC REF HI 20 39 12 - - - - - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
7 7 7
A/P AC REF LO 42 40 - - - - - - - 5 kHz EXCITATION
s
- - - - - - - - - - 26 ALTITUDE CAPTURE
13 - - - - - - - - - - 24 ENB1
- - - - - - - - - - 25 ENB2
190-00601-06
RADIO COUPLERS RADIO COUPLER
CENTURY
1C388 1C388C
190-00601-06
1C388M 1C388MC
GARMIN 6 CD33 CD33
CD33 TO DG
GDU 620 P6203 TO AMP TO DG
9
A/P AC REF HI 20 C - D ROLL EXCITATION
10kΩ
T1
F - E ROLL EXCITATION
10k:10k
9
- A A HEADING SIGNAL
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 10kΩ

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 N/C
T1
- B B ROLL COMMON
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 N/C 18 mH .047µF
10k:10k
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 N/C - D - DG EXCITATION
- E - DG EXCITATION
RADIO COUPLER
CENTURY
Sheet 2 of 4
1C388-2 1C388-3
GARMIN 6 CD33 CD33
CD33 TO DG
GDU 620 P6203 TO AMP TO DG
9
A/P AC REF HI 20 - D E ROLL EXCITATION
10kΩ
T1
- E D ROLL EXCITATION
10k:10k
9
- A A HEADING SIGNAL
A/P HEADING ERROR HI 18 10kΩ

A/P HEADING ERROR LO 40 N/C 8

T1
B - F ROLL COMMON
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 10k:10k
A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 N/C 9
- B B COURSE SIGNAL
A/P COURSE ERROR HI 19 10kΩ

A/P COURSE ERROR LO 41 N/C 8
B - C ROLL COMMON
T1
10k:10k
Rev. B
Page F-23
Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. B 190-00601-06
190-00601-06
NOTES:
3. AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 ".
CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
4. REFERENCE SECTION 5.5 FOR GDU AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION.

5. CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED ONLY FOR THOSE INPUTS THAT THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER SUPPORTS.
6. FOR DUAL-GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, CONNECT TO GDU #1 ONLY. THESE PINS ARE NOT CONNECTED ON GDU #2.
7. SEE SEPARATE DRAWING FOR RADIO COUPLER WIRING.
8. SPLICE BOTH WIRES TOGETHER INTO PIN B OF CD33 TO AMP.
9. USE TRIAD TRANSFORMER P/N TY-141P OR EQUIVALENT.
10. THE CENTURY IV REQUIRES AN ISOLATION DIODE TO BE INSTALLED ON THE LOCALIZER SWITCHING INPUT AS SHOWN:
AUTOPILOT
Sheet 4 of 4
GARMIN CENTURY
GDU 620 CD66
P6203 P1
ILS/GPS APPROACH 46 44 LOC SWITCH
1N4444 OR
EQUIV.
11. REMOVE EXISTING FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING FROM ATTITUDE INDICATOR AND STOW NEAR THE PILOT’S GDU 620 P6201.
12. THE 5 kHz EXCITATION SIGNAL IS NEEDED ONLY FOR AC AUTOPILOTS.

13. FOR CENTURY 2000 AUTOPILOTS THAT DO NOT HAVE THE ALTITUDE PRESELECTOR INSTALLED, ROUTE PROVISIONAL WIRES FROM CD189
AND STOW NEAR P6201 ON BACK OF THE PILOT’S GDU 620.
Rev. B
Page F-25
Sheet 1 of 4
Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 2 of 4

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 4 of 4

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Sheet 2 of 4

190-00601-06 Rev. B
ADI
(on copilot’s side) CESSNA FLIGHT DIRECTOR – SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS
G-1050A G-550A
Rev. B
13
P1 J1 14 (OPTIONAL)
Page F-32
CMD BAR N VIEW 24 8
CMD BAR +RT 26 9

CMD BAR +LT/REFERENCE 27 26
CMD BAR +UP 28 10

CMD BAR +DN 29 -
MODE SELECTOR
CESSNA
300B IFCS 400B IFCS 800B IFCS
GARMIN S550A S550A S550A
GDU 620 #1 P6201 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
12
FD ENABLE IN 9 19 - 19 - 19 - FD COMPUTER ON
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 11 - 11 - 11 ADI ROLL BAR

FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 1 - 1 - 1 SIGNAL COMMON
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 22 - 22 - 22 ADI PITCH BAR

FD PITCH DOWN 16
s
Sheet 3 of 4
GARMIN
GDU 620 #2 P6201 FLIGHT DIRECTOR - DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS
FD ENABLE IN 9
FD ROLL RIGHT 35
FD ROLL LEFT 34
s
FD PITCH UP 15

FD PITCH DOWN 16 MODE SELECTOR
s
CESSNA
300B IFCS 400B IFCS 800B IFCS
GARMIN S550A S550A S550A
GDU 620 #1 P6201 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
s s
12
FD ENABLE IN 9 19 - 19 - 19 - FD COMPUTER ON
FD ROLL RIGHT 35 - 11 - 11 - 11 ADI ROLL BAR

FD ROLL LEFT 34 - 1 - 1 - 1 SIGNAL COMMON
s
FD PITCH UP 15 - 22 - 22 - 22 ADI PITCH BAR

FD PITCH DOWN 16
s
190-00601-06
FLIGHT DIRECTOR PROVISIONS
TO GDU 620 #2 IN DUAL INSTALLATIONS

MODE
10
190-00601-06
CONTROLLER
CESSNA
300IFCS 400IFCS 800IFCS
S530A S530A S530A
J3/P18 J3/P18 J3/P18
J J J ADI CMD BAR LEFT
TO GDU 620 K K K ADI CMD BAR COMMON
(GDU 620 #1 IN DUAL INSTALLATIONS)
10 L L L ADI CMD BAR RIGHT

NOTES:
3. AT THE GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 ". CONNECT
OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT GROUND WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
Sheet 4 of 4
4. REFERENCE SECTION 5.5 FOR GDU AUTOPILOT CONFIGURATION.
5. CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED ONLY FOR THOSE INPUTS THAT THE AUTOPILOT COMPUTER SUPPORTS.
6. FOR DUAL-GDU 620 INSTALLATIONS, CONNECT TO GDU #1 ONLY. THESE PINS ARE NOT CONNECTED ON GDU #2.
7. JUMPER IS REQUIRED FOR DC HEADING/COURSE ERROR SIGNALS.
8. THE ILS/GPS APPROACH DISCRETE OUTPUT MUST ALSO BE CONNECTED TO THE BACK COURSE RELAY – REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S
DOCUMENTATION FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.

9. USE TRIAD TRANSFORMER P/N TY-141P OR SIMILAR.
10. STOW PROVISIONAL FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING NEAR P6201 OF THE GDU 620. FOR DUAL-GDU 620 SYSTEMS, SPLICE WIRING AND STOW
NEAR P6201 OF EACH GDU 620.
11. TUNE RESISTANCE POTS ON HEADING ERROR HI AND COURSE ERROR HI TO END OF TRAVEL IN ORDER NOT TO AFFECT THE HEADING AND
COURSE ERROR SIGNALS.
12 MAINTAIN EXISTING CONNECTION BETWEEN AUTOPILOT COMPUTER AND MODE SELECTOR.
13 OTHER COMPATIBLE FLIGHT DIRECTOR ADI’S MAY BE UTILIZED.
14 FLIGHT DIRECTOR WIRING TO EXISTING ADI MUST BE DISCONNECTED IF THIS INDICATOR IS USED AS A STANDBY INSTRUMENT FOR THE
G600 – THE DISPLAY OF THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR MUST BE DISABLED IN THIS CASE. IF THIS INDICATOR IS BEING RELOCATED TO THE
COPILOT’S SIDE, WIRING MAY BE CONNECTED IN PARALLEL TO THIS ADI AND THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR MAY BE ENABLED. THE WIRING TO
THIS ADI MUST BE CONNECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. THIS ADI MUST BE LOCATED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 2.5.11.8.
Rev. B
Page F-33
GDU 620 PFD/MFD
GARMIN PS Engineering Bendix/King AUDIO PANEL
SL15 PMA6000 KMA 24
GMA 340 GMA 347 PMA8000
P6201 SL15M PMA7000 KMA 28 KMA 26
Bottom J1 J3471 Bottom J1 Bottom P261
7
HI 28 T 31 54 T 31 T 14 HI UNSWITCHED
AUDIO OUT
LO 29 Gnd Lug 32 55 Gnd Lug 32 Gnd Lug 31 LO AUDIO IN
s
AUDIO INHIBIT IN* 3 4 6
AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 23 5 6
MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS 7
BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION
EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED

LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN
R
GDU 620
AUDIO OUT
s
NOTES:
3. AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 ".
4. USE THE AUDIO INHIBIT IN* DISCRETE INPUT TO INHIBIT GDU 620 AURAL ALERTS WHEN A HIGHER PRIORITY SYSTEM IS
PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
5. USE THE AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* DISCRETE OUTPUT TO INHIBIT AURAL ALERTS FROM LOWER PRIORITY SYSTEMS WHENEVER
THE GDU 620 IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
6. FUNCTION NOT CURRENTLY IMPLEMENTED.
7. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM GDU 620 MUST BE MIXED WITH AN
EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR
MIXING RESISTORS IS 390Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER
MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
Figure F-15. Audio Interconnect

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure F-16. GDL 69/69A Interconnect

190-00601-06 Rev. B
CONNECTIONS TO TAS / TCAS I
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2

5 P6203
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
P6201
9
TAS TEST* 27
TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26
TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
13 L3 COMM HONEYWELL 9
KTA 870 KTA 970 6
GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) TRC 497 TRC 899 KMH 880 KMH 980
5 P6203 P1 P1 J10 J10
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 34 42 54 54 A
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 43 ARINC 429 OUT
33 55 55 B
s
P6201
TAS TEST* 27 85 19 2 2 FUNCTIONAL TEST
9 (OPTIONAL) 7
TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 82 21 23 23 STANDBY / OPERATE
TO GPS
P6202 NAVIGATOR(S)
15
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 45 54 - - A ARINC 429 IN (LS)
ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 55 B (HEADING/ALTITUDE) 10
44 - -
s (OPTIONAL)
- - 60 60 A ARINC 429 IN (LS) 11
- - 61 61 B (ALTITUDE)
69 - - - ARINC 429 HEADING

(OPTIONAL) 14 70 - - - CONFIG STRAPPING 14
GRS 77 AHRS (#1) 13 - - - STRAP COMMON
P771
(OPTIONAL)
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 13 - - 62 62 A ARINC 429 IN (HS) 11
15 ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 - - 63 63 B (HEADING/ATTITUDE)
s
CONNECTIONS TO TIS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
5 P6203
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
P6201
TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26
TIS SOURCE
GARMIN
(TRANSPONDER)
GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) GTX 33
GTX 330 6
5 P6203 P3301
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 30 A
ARINC 429 OUT 2
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 28 B
s
P6201
TIS/TAS STANDBY* 26 46 TIS CONNECT SELECT
TO GPS
15 P6202 NAVIGATOR(S)
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 32/33/26 A ARINC 429 IN (LS)

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 35/36/29 B (ALT/TEMP/HDG/ 12
s (OPTIONAL) SPD/SEL CRS)

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
CONNECTIONS TO TCAD / TAS
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2
5 16 P6203
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26
s
AVIDYNE TCAD TRAFFIC SYSTEM

GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1) 9900BX 6 17
5 16 P6203 P1 (25-pin)
ARINC 429 IN 7A 4 8 A
ARINC 429 TX
ARINC 429 IN 7B 26 9 B
s
TO GPS
15 P6202 NAVIGATOR(S)
ARINC 429 OUT 1A 3 10/12 A ARINC 429 RX 1/2 (LS)

ARINC 429 OUT 1B 20 11/13 B (ALT/HDG) 18
s (OPTIONAL)
NOTES:
3. AT GDU 620, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL -- THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS
THAN 3.0 ". CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO AIRCRAFT CHASSIS WITH AS SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS
PRACTICAL.
4. ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GDU 620.
5. FOR GDU 620 SETUP ITEMS REFER TO SECTION 5.5
6. FOR TAS/TIS SETUP ITEMS REFER TO APPENDIX E.
7. THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GDU 620 IS CONFIGURED FOR ‘+
EXTERNAL CONTROL’. IN THIS CASE, THE GDU 620 WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM
OPERATION.
8. IF ONLY A SINGLE G600 SYSTEM IS BEING INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GDU 620 PFD/MFD (#1)
9. FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS THE “FUNCTIONAL TEST” AND “STBY/OPERATE” DISCRETE INPUTS TO THE
TRAFFIC COMPUTER MUST BE CONNECTED TO ONE DISPLAY ONLY.
10 IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE G600 SYSTEM TO THE SKYWATCH SYSTEM. ANY
AVAILABLE ARINC 429 INPUTS ON THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MAY BE USED IF THOSE SHOWN ARE ALREADY USED.
THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MAY HAVE TO BE CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ALTITUDE AND HEADING VIA ARINC 429 (LOW-
SPEED). REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
11 IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, ATTITUDE AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE G600 SYSTEM TO THE HONEYWELL
TRAFFIC SYSTEM. THE HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEM WILL NOT ACCEPT HEADING/ATTITUDE AND ALTITUDE ON A
SINGLE ARINC 429 INPUT. CONSEQUENTLY, HEADING/ATTITUDE (HIGH-SPEED) AND ALTITUDE (LOW-SPEED) MUST
BE PROVIDED TO SEPARATE INPUTS. THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MUST BE CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ARINC 429
ALTITUDE, HEADING AND ATTITUDE.
12 IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, TEMPERATURE, HEADING, SPEED AND SELECTED COURSE INFORMATION MAY BE
PROVIDED BY THE G600 SYSTEM TO THE TRANSPONDER. THE GTX 33/330 WILL HAVE TO BE CONFIGURED TO
ACCEPT THIS INFORMATION VIA ARINC 429 (LOW-SPEED).
13 TRC 497 SOFTWARE VERSION 1.6 OR HIGHER IS REQUIRED.
14 THESE STRAPS SET THE HEADING INPUT SOURCE TO ARINC 429. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION
MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL STRAPPING INFORMATION.
15 FOR DUAL G600 INSTALLATIONS, ONLY ARINC 429 OUTPUTS FROM GDU #1 AND AHRS #1 SHOULD BE CONNECTED
TO THE TIS/TAS SYSTEM. ARINC 429 OUTPUTS FROM GDU #2 OR AHRS #2 SHOULD NOT BE CONNECTED TO THE
TIS/TAS SYSTEM.
16 THE GDU 620 MUST BE SET TO “SKYWATCH” AND “+EXTERNAL CONTROL” MUST BE SELECTED.
17 AN EXTERNAL UNIT CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING TRAFFIC AND CONTROLLING THE TCAD IS REQUIRED IN ADDITION TO
THE GDU 620 (E.G. A 400W/500W OR AVIDYNE DISPLAY).
18 FOR THE TCAD TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 HEADING AND ALTITUDE, PROCESSOR P/N 70-2420-5 OR LATER IS
REQUIRED.
Sheet 2 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure F-18. ADF Interconnect

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Figure F-19. External Switches (GPSS)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Figure F-20. Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI Interconnect (Integral Battery)

Rev. B 190-00601-06
STANDBY ADI EMERG PWR SUPPLY
MCI 4200-() MD420
MS3116F8-4S
3
AIRCRAFT POWER C 22 AWG 2 GYRO POWER
6
AIRCRAFT GND A 22 AWG 4 GYRO GROUND
10 GYRO LIGHTING LOW
4 LIGHTING BUS HI B 6 GYRO LIGHTING HIGH
EXTERNAL
SENSOR
GND
7 18 AUTOMATIC INPUT
ANNUNCIATION AIR (OPTIONAL)
CONTROL UNIT
MD422
ANNUNCIATION POWER 2 24 ANNUNCIATION POWER
ANNUNCIATION GROUND 3 25 ANNUNCIATION GROUND
STBY BUTTON 6 23 STBY BUTTON
GREEN ANNUNCIATION 1 19 GREEN ANNUNCIATION
RED ANNUNCIATION 4 20 RED ANNUNCIATION
AMBER ANNUNCIATION 5 21 AMBER ANNUNCIATION
WHITE ANNUNCIATION 8 22 WHITE ANNUNCIATION
TO AIRCRAFT 5 LIGHTING BUSS HI

6
LIGHTING BUS 9 LIGHTING GROUND
3 AIRCRAFT GROUND
1 AIRCRAFT POWER
3
STBY
ADI
ESSENTIAL BUS 5
2A (28 VDC)
4A (14 VDC)
NOTES:
1. ALL WIRES 22 AWG UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
3. POWER WIRES SHALL BE TWISTED PAIR WITH NO MORE THAN 6 INCHES UNTWISTED AT EITHER END.
4. THE UNIT’S LIGHTING INPUT MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR THE CORRECT LIGHTING BUS VOLTAGE (28 VDC, 14
VDC, 5 VDC). PLEASE SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR SWITCH SELECTION OPTIONS, MID-CONTINENT
INSTRUMENTS MANUAL NUMBER 9016182.
5. IF THERE IS MORE THAN ONE ESSENTIAL BUS, THE BACKUP ADI AND G600 MUST BE INSTALLED ON SEPARATE
ESSENTIAL BUSSES.
6. INSTALLER MUST SELECT 5V, 14V OR 28V LIGHTING ON THE MD421 BATTERY MODULE. PLEASE SEE
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR SWITCH SELECTION OPTIONS, MID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENTS MANUAL NUMBER
9016391.
7. MAY BE USED INSTEAD OF CONNECTING PITOT AND STATIC PORTS. A GROUND ON PIN 18, WHEN THE
AIRCRAFT IS IN FLIGHT, WILL ALLOW FOR FULL AUTOMATIC BACKUP POWER WHEN AIRCRAFT POWER IS LOST.
SEE INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS, MID-CONTINENT INSTRUMENTS MANUAL
NUMBER 9016391.
Figure F-21. Mid-Continent Electric Standby ADI Interconnect (External Battery)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
NOTE
This feature is currently not implemented. However, provisional wiring for the interface
defined above may be installed. If installing provisional wiring, ensure that existing
display still controls the Stormscope.
Figure F-22. Stormscope Provisions Interconnect

Rev. B 190-00601-06
SINGLE GDU INSTALLATIONS
GWX 68
GDU 620 PFD/MFD 4 WXR R/T
P6201 P400
A 32 34 A
ETHERNET OUT 2 ETHERNET IN
B 33 35 B
A 30 36 A ETHERNET OUT
ETHERNET IN 2 B
B 31 37
s s
44 RT ON/OFF
15 SIGNAL GROUND
DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS – PREFERRED ARCHITECTURE 7
GWX 68
GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD 4 WXR R/T
P6201 P400
5
A 13 34 A
ETHERNET OUT 1 ETHERNET IN
B 14 35 B
ETHERNET IN 1 B
B 12 37
s s
A 30 44 RT ON/OFF
ETHERNET IN 2 15 SIGNAL GROUND
B 31
32
ETHERNET OUT 2 33
s
GDU 620 PFD/MFD #2 4

P6201
A 31
ETHERNET IN 2
B 30
A 33
ETHERNET OUT 2 32 GDL 69/69A
B P691
s
A 11 25 A
ETHERNET IN 1 ETHERNET OUT 1
B 12 24 B
A 13 23 A
ETHERNET OUT 1 ETHERNET IN 1
B 14 22 B
s
S
DUAL GDU INSTALLATIONS – ALTERNATE ARCHITECTURE

GDU 620 #1 PFD/MFD
GDL 69/69A
P6201 P691
A 11 25 A
B 12 24 B
A 13 23 A
B 14 22 B
s s
A 30 GWX 68
ETHERNET IN 2 WXR R/T
B 31 P691 P400
32 5
ETHERNET OUT 2 6
33 A 13 34 A
s ETHERNET OUT 3 ETHERNET IN
B 14 35 B
GDU 620 #2 PFD/MFD P6201 ETHERNET IN 3
B 12 37 B
A 31 s s
ETHERNET IN 2 44
B 30 RT ON/OFF
A 33 15 SIGNAL GROUND
ETHERNET OUT 2
B 32
s
6
A 11 29 A
B 12 28 B
A 13 27 A
B 14 26 B
s s
NOTE
This feature is currently not implemented. However, provisional wiring for the interface
defined above may be installed.

Sheet 1 of 2

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix G Magnetic Interference Survey PC Software
G.1 Introduction
The following items are required to complete the magnetic interference survey.
Laptop or PC
A laptop or PC is required to run the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software. This laptop or PC
must meet the following requirements:
Operating System Windows 2000 SP4*, XP
Processor Speed 850 MHz
Hard Drive Free Memory 500 MB
RAM Memory 256MB
Screen Resoluation 1024 x 768
CD-ROM Drive
USB to RS-232 Converter Required only if the laptop or PC does not have a serial port.
WinZip® (or equivalent application) is required to extract downloaded file.
*Installation software may require user to install the latest version of Windows Installer which
can be downloaded from www.microsoft.com.
NOTE
The user must have administrative rights on the PC in order to install the GMU 44
Location Survey Tool software.
Magnetic Interference Survey Test Cable
A test cable fabricated by the installer is required to perform the magnetic interference survey (refer
to Section G.2 for details on manufacturing this cable).
GMU 44 Location Survey Tool Software P/N 006-A0240-00
GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software P/N 006-A0240-00 is required to perform the magnetic
interference survey. This software is supplied as an installation package P/N 006-A0241-00 (refer
to Section G.3 for details on downloading and installing this software).
DC Power Supply
A DC power supply capable of supplying 12 VDC/200 mA is required to supply power to the GMU
44 Magnetometer during magnetic interference survey.
RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (not required in most cases)
An RS-485 to RS-232 converter may be required to connect the magnetometer to the laptop or PC.
Usually a converter is not required, but may be needed if using older laptops or PCs. A suitable
converter is B&B Electronics Model 422LP9R (or equivalent).
Stopwatch or Watch with a Second Hand
A stopwatch or watch with a second hand is required measure the times for turning equipment on
and off during the survey test sequence.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page G-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
G.2 Test Cable Requirements
Fabricate a test cable in accordance with one of the following drawings. The cable shown in Figure G-1
should work in most cases; however, if the laptop or PC is not able to communicate with the GMU 44 an
RS-485 to RS-232 converter will be required and the cable shown in Figure G-2 should be fabricated.
Figure G-1. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup with Direct Connection to PC

GMU 44
MAGNETOMETER FABRICATED TEST CABLE
(length as required - 25 ft max)
RED +12V TO 12 VDC

RS-232 IN 8 8 n/c
9 9 22 AWG
POWER
+12V POWER IN
SUPPLY
POWER GROUND 6 6 22 AWG BLK GND
SHIELD GND 3 3 n/c
RS-485 OUT A 4 4
RS-485 OUT B 2 2 RS485 (RS422) TO RS232
SHIELD GND 1 1 CONVERTER
7 RS485 A RS232 TO COM

24 AWG
2 RS485 B
3 PORT ON
24 AWG
1 LAPTOP
9-pin OR PC
D-sub
(male)
PIN CONNECTION DEPENDENT ON DEVICE USED.

(connections for B&B 422LP9R shown)
NOTES:
1. P441 IS GARMIN CONNECTOR KIT P/N 011-00871-00. ALTERNATELY, P441 CAN BE MADE USING AN AMP
CONNECTOR P/N 206485-1.
2. WIRE AWG SHOWN IS MINIMUM WIRE AWG. CONNECTORS WILL ACCOMMODATE UP TO 20 AWG WIRE.
3. A SUITABLE CONVERTER IS B&B ELECTRONICS MODEL 422LP9R.
Figure G-2. Magnetic Interference Survey Setup using RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
Page G-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
G.3 GMU 44 Location Survey Tool Software Installation Instructions
This installation package will install the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool P/N 006-A0240-00 software on a
PC. The laptop or PC used to run the GMU 44 Location Survey Tool software.
To install the software perform the following steps:
In the newly opened Explorer window, double-click in the “install.bat” file to begin the setup process.
The following window will open and indicate the progress of the installation.
NOTE
The installation of the Matlab Runtime environment may take several minutes.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
For some installations a Windows Installer error message may appear as shown below. Before
proceeding, the installation software requires that the user install the latest version of Windows Installer,
which can be downloaded from www.microsoft.com.
When the Runtime environment is ready to be installed, an InstallShield Wizard window will appear.
NOTE
The procedure for installing the MATLAB runtime environment depends upon whether or
not the runtime environment has been previously installed. Proceed to the applicable
section.
G.3.1 For New MATLAB Installations:

NOTE
The window below only appears if the MATLAB Runtime environment has not previously
been installed. If MATLAB was previously installed, proceed to Existing MATLAB
Installations.
Click ‘Next: and follow the setup instructions.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
For some installations a MATLAB Runtime error message may appear as shown in the following figure.
The Garmin GLS tool does not require the software listed in the error message. Click ‘OK’ to continue
installation. The Install Wizard will complete the setup of the MATLAB Runtime and the following screen
will appear.
Select ‘Finish’. After several moments the setup wizard will continue and install the GMU 44 Location
Survey Tool software.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
Click ‘Next’ and follow the final setup instructions. The final screen will appear.
Select ‘Finish’ to complete the installation. A shortcut for the GLS Tool software will be created on your
the desktop.
The GLS Tool software is now ready to use. Proceed to Section G.4.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
G.3.2 For Existing MATLAB Installations:
NOTE
Follow the instructions below if the MATLAB Runtime environment has previously been
installed.
Click ‘Next’ and the following window will appear:
Leave Modify selected and click ‘Next’, ‘Next’ and ‘Install’ to install the required components.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
For some installations a MATLAB Component Runtime error message may appear as shown in the
following figure.
The Garmin GLS tool does not require the software listed in the error message. Click ‘OK’ to continue
installation. The Install Wizard will complete the setup of the MATLAB Runtime and the following screen
will appear.
Select ‘Finish’. After several moments the setup wizard will continue and install the GMU 44 Location
Survey Tool software.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Click ‘Next’ and follow the final setup instructions. The final screen will appear.
Select ‘Finish’ to complete the installation. A shortcut for the GLS Tool software will be created on your
the desktop.
The GLS Tool software is now ready to use. Proceed to Section G.4.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
G.4 Conducting the GMU 44 Location Survey with the GLS Tool
CAUTION
Do not permanently install the GMU 44 prior to successfully completing the magnetic
survey. It is possible that the location will fail the survey and a new location will be
required.
NOTE
The GLS Tool is designed to identify transient magnetic disturbances. In rare instances
the GLS Tool magnetic survey will pass but the installation will fail the magnetometer
calibration during the post installation checkout. This is usually due to a constant
magnetic field present in the aircraft (e.g. the structure is magnetized). Contact Garmin
for assistance if this occurs.
Place the GMU 44 on the desired installation location and secure in place using a non-ferrous material.
With the aircraft leveled, ensure that the GMU 44 is within five degrees of level – the actual tilt of the
GMU 44 can be confirmed when the survey is completed. Do not use clamps or other devices that are
ferrous or magnetic. It is preferable to have the GMU 44 forward direction aligned to the aircraft
heading, but not required.
Prepare a detailed test sequence list with precise start and stop times for exercising all items in the aircraft
which are likely to affect the operation of the GMU 44 magnetometer. The list of relevant items varies
from aircraft to aircraft. An example of a test sequence is given in Table G-1. This sequence contains
items that will not be applicable to every installation and should be tailored to each particular installation
– additional items may have to be added when doing so.
Connect the test equipment as shown in Figure G-1.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Table G-1. Example Detailed Sequence
A/C Reg. : ___________ Magnetometer Survey Data File: __________________________
Elapsed Elapsed
Time Since Time Since
Action
Start of Test Start of Test
(secs) (min:secs)
0 0:00 Test begins (Calibration Period – no activity permitted)
20 0:20 Calibration Period Ends
30 0:30 Aileron full right
40 0:40 Aileron full left
50 0:50 Aileron level
60 1:00 Rudder full right
70 1:10 Rudder full left
80 1:20 Rudder neutral
90 1:30 Elevators full up
100 1:40 Elevators full down
110 1:50 Elevators neutral
120 2:00 Flaps down
140 2:20 Flaps up
160 2:40 Landing gear up
180 3:00 Landing gear down
190 3:10 Speed brake up
200 3:20 Speed brake down
210 3:30 Navigation lights on
220 3:40 Navigation lights off
230 3:50 Landing lights on
240 4:00 Landing lights off
250 4:10 Taxi lights on
260 4:20 Taxi lights off
270 4:30 Air conditioning on
280 4:40 Air conditioning off
290 4:50 Landing + Taxi lights on
300 5:00 Landing + Taxi lights off
310 5:10 Strobes on
320 5:20 Strobes off
330 5:30 Recognition lights on
340 5:40 Recognition lights off
Turn on all wing-tip lights simultaneously (typically will include
350 5:50
navigation lights, recognition lights and strobe)
360 6:00 Turn off all wing-tip lights simultaneously
370 6:10 Beacon on
380 6:20 Beacon off
390 6:30 Autopilot engaged in a pitch and roll mode (to engage servo clutches)
400 6:40 Autopilot disengaged.
410 6:50 Pitot heat on
420 7:00 Pitot heat off
430 7:10 End of test

190-00601-06 Rev. B
G.4.1 Data Collection
Open the Garmin GLS tool by double-clicking on the shortcut to the Garmin GLS Tool.
NOTE
It may be necessary to adjust your screen settings in order to display the tool screen
properly on your laptop or PC. Consult your operating software instruction manual for
instructions on how to change screen settings.
Once the test software is open, pull down the File menu and select ‘Sources’. Select the appropriate COM
port and select ‘OK’. This step is only required for the initial setup and does not need to be completed for
subsequent use of the GLS Tool software.
NOTE
The Garmin GLS tool will start displaying received data from the GMU 44 as soon as
power is applied to the GMU44 (assuming correct test harness interconnect).
Connect the test harness to the appropriate COM port on the laptop and open the test software. Limit
current to 200 mA and apply 12V to the GMU.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
NOTE
To get accurate results from the survey, ensure that the standard power architecture in
the aircraft is ON during the first 20 seconds of the survey.
Before beginning the survey, power up the aircraft with the standard power architecture ON (master
switch, avionics bus if applicable, etc.) With test sequence in hand, start the survey by selecting ‘F4 Strt
Suvy’ or pressing the F4 key on the keyboard and start the stopwatch simultaneously. Perform the test
sequence making sure to follow the timeline for all actions. Ensure that for the first 20 seconds the
aircraft is not disturbed, i.e. no movement of flight controls or use of instrumentation, etc.
When the operator has completed the actions specified in the test sequence, stop the test software by
selecting ‘F5 Stop Suvy’ or pressing the F5 key. Select ‘F6 Save Data’ or press the F6 key on the
keyboard to save the file. Record file name on the test sequence sheet.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
G.4.2 Data Analysis
To analyze the data select the ‘F11 Rvw Data’ or press the F11 key on the keyboard.
A window will open asking for the file name of the data to be analyzed. Select the saved file for the
appropriate test and select ‘Open’.
After selecting ‘Open’ the following DOS window will appear while the data is being analyzed. The
analysis may take several minutes, depending upon how much data was recorded.
When the analysis is complete, the test results will be displayed in a graph format. Two plots will be
displayed – the magnetic survey field results and the magnetometer tilt measurements. The plots of the
magnetic interference results and magnetometer tilt will be automatically saved as bitmap (.bmp) files in
the same directory as the source data file, with the same name as the source data file – these can be used
for future reference.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Select the magnetometer tilt measurements window (MagTilt).
Verify that the X Tilt (Roll) and Y Tilt (Pit) are within the range -5° < X/Y Tilt < 5°. If the tilt is not
within 5° of level the temporary GMU 44 installation must be corrected to level the GMU 44, and the
survey must be repeated before proceeding.
If the tilt is within the acceptable range, select the magnetic survey field results (MagField) window.
Verify that there are no electromagnetic anomalies during the first 20 seconds of the test in which the
aircraft was not disturbed.
The Graph will show the electromagnetic boundary limits for each axis (X, Y and Z) for information
only. The message on top right of the screen will show if the survey has ‘Passed’ or ‘Failed’.

190-00601-06 Rev. B
If the survey displays that the survey has failed, use the zoom options to determine the time of
occurrence.

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Correlate the time of occurrence of the failure with the action performed on the detailed test sequence and
correct the source of the interference. Refer to Section 6.1 for additional information on troubleshooting
and correcting a GMU 44 magnetometer installation. If the magnetic interference cannot be remedied,
another location should be chosen and tested.
If the test fails, the location should be considered unreliable until the source of the magnetic interference
is identified, remedied and the location is retested and passes the test.
If the test passes, the location is considered reliable for the installation of the GMU 44.
The following example is a result from a survey with ideal passing results:
When done, the data analysis windows can be closed by closing the three windows individually, or by
returning to the DOS window shown below and pressing the <Enter> key.

190-00601-06 Rev. B

Rev. B 190-00601-06
Appendix H Miscellaneous Instrument Panel Installations
H.1 Panel Patches for GDU 620 and Accommodation of Oversize Indicators
In some installations, once the cutout is made for the GDU 620, there is insufficient material remaining
on the instrument panel on which to affix nut plates. If at least four nut plates have sufficient material for
attachment directly to the instrument panel, it is acceptable to use patch plates for the remaining one or
two nut plates. Patch plates may be installed as described in Figure H-1.
In some installations, once the cutout is made for the GDU 620, there is no material remaining between
adjacent instrument cutouts. This usually occurs for oversize indicators, such as the King KI 256. If this
occurs for one instrument, it is acceptable to install angle brackets or custom adapter plate, as described in
Figure H-1.
G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page H-1

190-00601-06 Rev. B
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MODIFIED 115-01009-00
TRIM PLATE
EXISTING INSTRUMENT
GDU 620 DISPLAY
NEW LOCATION
FOR KI-256
DESIRED RESULT
INADEQUATE MATERIAL
TO MOUNT CORNER
NUTPLATE FOR GDU 620
DISPLAY
NEW CUTOUT
INSTRUMENT PANEL FOR KI-256
MATERIAL BREAK
FRONT VIEW, CUTOUT EXAMPLE
MS21073-06 NUTPLATE SEE CORNER NUTPLATE

MS20426AD3-X RIVET DETAIL
(2X) FARSIDE THRU PANEL
AND ADAPTER MS21071-06 NUTPLATE
MS20426AD3-X RIVET (2X)
2X, (OR EQUIVALENT)
2 CUSTOM KI-256
ADAPTER PLATE
MS21071-06 NUTPLATE
MS20426AD3-X RIVET
(1X) FARSIDE THRU PANEL
AND ADAPTER
REAR VIEW, ADAPTER PLATE EXAMPLE
MS21071-06 NUTPLATE
MS20426AD3-X RIVET (2X)
(OR EQUIVALENT)
MODIFIED ALUMINUM ANGLE

(SEE ANGLE DETAIL)
MODIFIED ALUMINUM ANGLE
(SEE ANGLE DETAIL)
TWO ANGLES ARE RIVETED TOGETHER 1
(EQUAL GAP DISTANCE)
REAR VIEW, ANGLE SUPPORT EXAMPLE

NOTES:
1. RECOMMENDED RIVET HARDWARE TO MOUNT ANGLES IS MS20426AD3-X IF FLUSH IS
REQUIRED OR MS20470AD3-X IF HEAD CLEARS OTHER ITEMS.
2. FABRICATE CUSTOM ADAPTER PLATE FOR KI-256. PLATE MUST UTILIZE AT LEAST TWO OF THE
GDU 620 MOUNTING LOCATIONS AND HAVE PROVISIONS TO SECURE THE KI-256 TO THE PANEL.
ADDITIONAL ATTACHMENTS TO THE PANEL (I.E. RIVETS) IS RECOMMENDED FOR EASE OF
INSTALLATION. MATERIAL IS 0.125" MIN. THICKNESS 6061-T6 OR 2024-T3 ALUMINUM.
Figure H-1. Instrument Panel Patches

(Sheet 1 of 2)
Page H-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. B 190-00601-06
RIVET GAP IS 0.75" ± 0.25"
2 CORNER PATCH PLATE
RIVET (2X) THRU PATCH PLATE AND PANEL 1 2
RIVET (1X) THRU PATCH PLATE AND NUTPLATE
RIVET (1X) THRU PATCH PLATE, NUTPLATE, AND PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(VIEW LOOKING AFT)
GDU620 FASTENER
LOCATION (HOLE FOR #6 SCREW)
EXISTING CUTOUT
RIVET GAP IS 0.75" ± 0.25"
INTERIOR EDGE OF
115-01009-00
MIN. TO EDGE = 0.25"
TRIM PLATE
TYPICAL
1 NUTPLATE
NEARSIDE CORNER NUTPLATE DETAIL
INTERIOR EDGE OF
115-01009-00 115-01009-XX
TRIM PLATE
TRIM PLATE INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTES: (VIEW LOOKING AFT)
RIVETS MS20426AD3-X
NUTPLATES (M)F5000-06; (M)K1000-06; (M)K2000-06; OR F2000-06
2. A PATCH PLATE MAY BE REQUIRED FOR ANY GDU620 FASTENING LOCATION DEPENDING UPON
THE RAW OPENING OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL MATERIAL. THE MATERIAL OF THE PATCH PLATE
SHOULD BE 0.063" MIN. THICKNESS ALUMINUM 2024-T3. TRIM THE PATCH PLATE TO AVOID
CONTACT WITH EXISTING INSTRUMENTS AND MATCH THE PATCH INNER EDGE TO THE OPENING
OF THE TRIM PLATE. THREE RIVETS SHOULD PENETRATE AND SECURE THE PATCH PLATE TO THE
PANEL. FOLLOW THE DIMENSIONAL GUIDELINES PROVIDED.
3. CORROSION COAT FABRICATED PARTS WITH ZINC CHROMATE PRIMER ALL SURFACES.
0.098 DIA THRU HOLE (FOR EITHER MS20470AD3-X 0.098 DIA THRU HOLE (FOR EITHER
OR MS20426AD3-X RIVET) CSK Ø 0.172 X 100° MS20470AD3-X OR MS20426AD3-X RIVET)
(FOR MS20426AD3-X RIVET ONLY) TYPICAL (QTY A/R TO MEET LENGTH)
TYPICAL (QTY A/R TO MEET LENGTH)
DIM. A DIM. A
DIM. A DIM. B DIM. A DIM. B
0.15 MIN. Ø 0.098 THRU HOLE

0.098 DIA HOLE (FOR MOUNTING ANGLE TO PANEL
0.15 MIN. WITH MS20426AD3-X RIVET)
4X
0.38 MIN.
6061-T6 ALUMINUM ANGLE

(AND10133-XXXX) 0.06 THK, NUTPLATE MOUNTING PATTERN
LEG LENGTH MAY VARY 6061-T6 ALUMINUM ANGLE AND MATERIAL CLEARANCE A/R
(AND10133-XXXX) 0.06 THK, (FOR #6-32 SCREW)
LEG LENGTH MAY VARY
ANGLE DETAIL ANGLE DETAIL

KI-256 SIDE GDU 620 SIDE

MIN. MAX.
RIVETS 0.25" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
SCREWS 0.30" 0.50" 0.5" < DIM B < 1.75"
Figure H-1. Instrument Panel Patches

(Sheet 2 of 2)

190-00601-06 Rev. B
H.2 Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments
In some installations there is unused space in the bolster immediately below the instrument panel. If the
location meets the requirements for the location of 3 1/8” Standby Instruments (refer to Section 2.5.11.2),
it may be desirable to install one or more standby instruments in the bolster. It is acceptable to rework the
bolster and cut holes in the subpanel as shown in Figure H-2.
AVAILABLE AVAILABLE SUB-PANEL

DRAFT DRAFT
DEPTH OF SUB-PANEL
TO BOLSTER EDGE
DEPTH OF SUB-PANEL
TO BOLSTER EDGE
CLOSEOUT VIEW LOOKING DOWN

DESIRED RESULT
EDGE OF BOLSTER PHYSICAL DISTANCE MAY BE LIMITED

BY ADJACENT EQUIPMENT
LIMITING PHYSICAL
PARAMETERS
FINAL TRIMMED CLOSEOUT

EDGE OF BOLSTER
VIEW LOOKING FORWARD

DESIRED RESULT
NOTES:
1. WHEN A SUB-PANEL IS CREATED FOR USE IN A BOLSTER, TO SUSTAIN ADEQUATE VISIBILITY, IT IS IMPORTANT
TO MAKE THE CUT-OUT ON THE BOLSTER LARGER THAN THE SUB-PANEL SURFACE AREA. THIS WILL CREATE A
DRAFT ANGLE IN THE FIBERGLASS CLOSEOUT PART. ACTUAL PHYSICAL SIZE OF THE CUT-OUT WILL DEPEND UPON
VARIOUS COCKPIT FACTORS, PRIMARILY WHAT OTHER DEVICES ARE ADJACENT TO THE SELECTED LOCATION AND
THE DEPTH DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE SUB-PANEL AND BOLSTER.
FIXTURE PLATE WITH INSTRUMENT

MOUNTING HOLES. SHOWN ON
PACKAGING (RELEASE) TAPE SUB-PANEL.
COATED WITH
MOLD RELEASE WAX.
7.34
2.48 2.48 Ø .151 THRU 8X
EXISTING AIRCRAFT
SUB-PANEL
BEHIND THE 2.48 4.0
BOLSTER. BOLSTER
TRIM LINE ON BOLSTER. R 2.0

(REMOVE MATERIAL TO CREATE 0.94
OPENING FOR CLOSEOUT.)
EXAMPLE FIXTURE PLATE
ISO VIEW MATERIAL: .13" ALUMINUM PLATE OR .38-.50" PLYWOOD.
(DEVELOPMENT OF CLOSEOUT AND SUB-PANEL) EXAMPLE SHOWN IS FOR TWO 3.125" INSTRUMENTS.
DIMENSIONS SHOWN FOR REF ONLY. ACTUAL
DIMENSIONS WILL DEPEND UPON INSTRUMENTS USED.
NOTES:
1. BOLSTER IS INSTALLED IN AIRCRAFT FOR THIS OPERATION.

2. FABRICATE A FIXTURE PLATE THAT CONTAINS THE MOUNTING HOLE PATTERN(S) FOR THE INSTRUMENT(S) TO BE
MOUNTED IN THE BOLSTER.
3. TRIM BOLSTER TO PROVIDE DESIRED DRAFT ANGLE IN CLOSEOUT PART. TEMPORARILY AFFIX THE FIXTURE
PLATE ONTO THE EXISTING AIRCRAFT SUB-PANEL FORWARD OF THE BOLSTER. CENTRALLY LOCATE THE PLATE TO
THE CUTOUT IN THE BOLSTER.
4. MATCH DRILL THE INSTRUMENT MOUNTING HOLES FROM THE FIXTURE PLATE ONTO THE SUB-PANEL.
5. REMOVE THE FIXTURE PLATE. ADD RELEASE TAPE AND MOLD RELEASE WAX TO THE SUB-PANEL AND FIXTURE
PLATE.
Figure H-2. Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments

(Sheet 1 of 2)
Rev. B 190-00601-06
2 OR 3 PLY CLOTH
FOR CLOSEOUT PART
EXISTING AIRCRAFT
SUB-PANEL STRUCTURE
BEHIND THE DASH BOLSTER.
BOLSTER
FIXTURE PLATE
#6 SCREW, NUT
8X
ISO VIEW
(DEVELOPMENT OF CLOSEOUT AND SUB-PANEL)
NOTES:
1. LAY DOWN 2 OR 3 PLY CLOTH IN PLACE. CLOTH ON SUB-PANEL SHOULD BE LYING FLAT. PERFORATE CLOTH AT SUB-PANEL
HOLE LOCATIONS FOR INSTRUMENTS. INSERT FIXTURE PLATE. FASTEN WITH SCREWS THAT ARE PRE-COATED WITH MOLD
RELEASE WAX.
2. TRIM EDGES OF CLOTH SO ONE CAN TAPE THE WET CLOTH DOWN TO THE FIRST TAPE LAYER ON BOLSTER TO PREVENT THE
GLASS CLOTH FROM SAGGING. PULL THE GLASS OUTWARD TO CREATE A GOOD FORM WITHOUT WRINKLES OR SAGS. TAPE
THE RESULTANT CLOTH SECURELY TO HOLD THE SHAPE AS IT CURES. CURE IN PLACE.
FINAL TRIMMED CLOSEOUT
3
ISO VIEW
(DEVELOPMENT OF CLOSEOUT AND SUB-PANEL)
NOTES:
1. USING AIR PRESSURE BETWEEN THE NEW CLOSEOUT AND THE BOLSTER, GENTLY REMOVE THE NEWLY FORMED PART.
2. PEEL OFF ALL THE TAPE FROM THE BOLSTER AND SUB-PANEL. CLEAN ALL PARTS.
3. IN THE SUB-PANEL AND CLOSEOUT PART CUT OUT THE LARGE HOLES REQUIRED FOR EACH INSTRUMENT. TEMPORARIILY INSTALL
THE INSTRUMENTS TO VALIDATE THE OPENINGS ARE SATISFACTORY.
4. USE BODY AND GLAZING PUTTY FOR FILLING SURFACES ON THE CLOSEOUT. FINISH THE SURFACES AND EDGES WITH SAND
PAPER UNTIL A SMOOTH FINISH IS ACCOMPLISHED (WITH 220 GRIT PAPER).
5. PRIME AND PAINT THE CLOSEOUT TO MATCH THE BOLSTER COLOR.
Figure H-2. Bolster Modification for Standby Instruments

(Sheet 2 of 2)

190-00601-06 Rev. B

Rev. B 190-00601-06

G600IntegratedSystem STCInstallationManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G600IntegratedSystem STCInstallationManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

G600IntegratedSystem STCInstallationManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

G600

AML STC Installation

190-00601-06 November 2008 Rev. B

Garmin International, Inc.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page A

6-4 6.2 Added troubleshooting information to table.

Page B G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Included additional Cessna, Collins and Honeywell autopilots, and

Included additional Cessna, Collins, Honeywell, and S-TEC external

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page C

Page D G600 AML STC Installation Manual

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page i

Page ii G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Page iv G600 AML STC Installation Manual

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page vii

Page viii G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Page x G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Figure C-1. GDU 620 Connector Locations ............................................................................................. C-2

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page xi

Page xii G600 AML STC Installation Manual

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page xiii

Table G-1. Example Detailed Sequence .................................................................................................G-11

Page xiv G600 AML STC Installation Manual

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-1

Page 1-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-3

Page 1-4 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

GRS 77: The GRS 77 is an attitude, heading and reference unit, or

GMU 44: The GMU 44 magnetometer senses magnetic field information.

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-5

GNS 480: The GNS 480 unit is a panel-mount WAAS/GPS navigator /

Page 1-6 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

ARINC 429 (NAV)*

G600 AML STC Installation Manual

RS-232 (Crossfill) Time Mark

ARINC 429 (GPS Navigator)

ARINC 429 (GPS)

ARINC 429 (NAV)*

ARINC 429 (Autopilot)

Figure 1-3. G600 Interfaces – Single GDU

TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL BEFORE MODIFICATION

TYPICAL INSTRUMENT PANEL AFTER G600 INSTALLATION

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-9

Unit Weight w/Rack

[1] Diameter of GMU 44 is 3.35 inches (8.51 cm), including flange.

Page 1-10 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.6.1.1 GDU 620

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-11

1.7 G600 System Documentation

Table 1-5. Other Reference Documentation

Table 1-6. Optional Garmin System Reference Documentation

Page 1-12 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

1.8.1 Basemap Database

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 1-13

Page 1-14 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

G600 AML STC Installation Manual Page 2-1

Page 2-2 G600 AML STC Installation Manual

Create a G600 Software Loader Card as follows:

1. Go to the Dealer Resource section of www.garmin.com.